[UNO  WHO 


E.STOUGHTON  GALE-WHITE 


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


7 


3? 


UNO   WHO 


BY 
ELIZABETH  STOUGHTON  GALE-WHITE 


THE 

Hbbey  press 

PUBLISHERS 

114 
FIFTH   AVENUE 

Xon&on  NEW  YORK  Montreal 


Copyright,  .900, 

by 
THE 

Press 


"Though  ye  have  lain  among  the  pots,  yet  shall  ye  be  as  the  wings  of 
a  dove  that  is  covered  with  silver  wings,  and  her  feathers  like  gold." 


ps 


Co  m^  busbant, 

Sames  SlOnep  TRQbtte, 

tbts  volume 
is  affectionately 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  PAOB 

I.  "  Childhood  shows  the  man,  as  morning  shows  the 

m  day" 7 

§J          II.  In  the  quick  forge  and  workhouse  of  thought 31 

III.  "A  little  bitter  mingled  in  our  cup  leaves  no 

relish  of  the  sweet " 47 

|j          IV.  Stronger  in  prophecy  than  in  criticism 59 

V.  "A  tale  of  romance  and  lies,  false  tears,  and  real 

perjuries  " 74 

jr          VI.  "  Oh  !  happiness,  our  being's  end  and  aim  " 87 

c\/         VII.  "  Tropic  eyes  too  full  of  light  and  languor ;  North- 
ern soul  too  gray  with  Northern  frost  " 100 

III.  "  The  air  was  full  of  farewells  " 112 

IX.  "Facts  and  crimes  are    concealed,  truths   and 

^  treasures  are  hidden  " 123 

X.  " .  .  .  She  made  his  eye  the  lonely  star  of  her 

idolatry  " 139 

£3  XI.  "Man's  love  is  of  man's  life  a  thing  apart — 'tis 

woman's  whole  existence  " 151 

XII.  "  Her  face  a  heart  of  flint  might  tender  make".. .  161 
<       XIII.  "  Afford  me  place  to  show  what  recompense  to- 
wards thee  I  intend  for  what  I  have  misdone  "  174 
3 


448015 


4  Contents. 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

XIV.  "  I  must  be  cruel  only  to  be  kind  ;  thus  bad  begins, 

and  worse  remains  behind  " 193 

XV.  "Bright  with  the  radiance  of  intellect,  not  dark- 
ened by  madness  or  passion  " 213 

XVI.  "  When    remorse  is   blended  with    the    fear   of 
punishment  and  arises  to  despair,  it  constitutes 

the  supreme  wretchedness  of  the  mind  " 229 

XVII.  "It  came  o'er  their  ears  like  the  sweet  South, 

that  breathes  upon  a  bank  of  violets  " 236 


BIOGRAPHICAL  NOTE. 


THE  subject  of  this  sketch,  Elizabeth  Stoughton 
Gale,  wife  of  James  S.  White,  was  born  in  Plattsburgh, 
N.  Y.,  on  the  banks  of  historic  Lake  Champlain.  Her 
parents  moved  to  the  West  when  she  was  an  infant. 

Her  father,  John  Gale,  was  a  pioneer  merchant  of 
Milwaukee,  Wis.,  and  moved  his  family,  stock  of  mer- 
chandise, and  frame  for  a  store  building  on  a  sailing 
vessel,  that  occupied  six  weeks  in  making  the  voyage 
from  Cleveland,  0.,  to  Milwaukee. 

He  was  one  of  the  prominent  men  of  the  new  city 
and  territory.  He  continued  business  as  a  merchant 
until  his  decease  in  1850.  He  was  a  large  landowner, 
also  interested  in  building  up  new  towns,  notably  Wau- 
kesha  and  Algoma,  Wis.,  where  he  had  large  manufac- 
turing interests  and  branch  stores. 

An  old  Milwaukee  paper  in  the  possession  of  Mrs. 
White  shows  her  father  to  have  been  one  of  seven  men 
to  whom  a  dispensation  was  issued  for  the  formation  of 
the  first  Masonic  lodge  in  the  then  territory  of  Wis- 
consin. 

The  old  family  homestead  was  included  in  a  plot  of 

5 


6  Preface. 

land  purchased  by  the  Government,  on  the  site  of  which 
the  new  post-office  and  customs  building  is  in  course  of 
erection. 

The  following  names  are  found  in  Mrs.  White's  gen- 
ealogy: Gale,  Stoughton,  Wolcott,  Allyu,  Eice,  War- 
ham,  Norcross,  Holcomb,  Ellsworth,  Fiske,  Child  and 
Flagg. 

The  Gales  settled  in  Watertown,  Mass.,  in  1640,  and 
the  histories  of  the  state  give  them  as  prominent  in 
promoting  the  settlement  of  colony.  This  family  gives 
her  the  war  record,  not  only  of  the  Revolution,  but 
the  colonial  wars,  and  the  right  of  the  order  of  the  Cin- 
cinnati is  vested  in  her  nephew.  The  Gales  have  been 
among  the  landed  gentry  of  England  since  1273.  The 
Gales  and  Stoughtons  are  closely  allied  to  Harvard, 
the  first  family  by  the  Gale  Library  given  in  1678,  and 
at  that  time,  according  to  the  college  records,  was 
larger  than  all  of  the  colleges  combined,  and  the  latter 
by  the  founding  of  Stoughton  Hall. 

Thomas  Stoughton,  who  was  descended  from  these 
Stoughtons,  was  an  ancestor  of  Mrs.  White,  as  was  also 
Edwin  W.  Stoughton,  the  latter  minister  to  Russia 
under  President  Hayes'  Administration. 

THE  PUBLISHERS. 


UNO  WHO. 


CHAPTER  I. 

"  Childhood  shows  the  man, 
As  morning  shows  the  day." 

IT  was  Christinas  eve.  The  streets  were  thronged 
with  people  going  and  coming  in  every  direction.  Some 
had  been  and  others  were  going  to  the  Cathedral  to  say 
a  few  prayers,  then  joining  the  crowd  visiting  the  gaily 
decorated  shop  windows.  Children  looking  at  the  much- 
coveted  toys  would  wistfully  eye  those  more  fortunate 
as  they  emerged  from  the  shops  with  their  Christmas 
gifts. 

On  the  sidewalks  were  booths,  many  of  them  presided 
over  by  women  of  the  Seminole  tribe,  who  still  lived  in 
their  cabins  or  wigwams  on  the  outskirfs  of  the  town, 
and  supported  themselves  by  making  the  beadwork 
they  were  now  trying  to  sell.  Their  gaily  decorated 
booths  and  Indian  dress  made  it  a  picturesque  scene  as 
they  in  silence  held  up  different  articles  for  inspection, 
and  put  up  their  fingers  to  tell  the  price.  There  was 
nothing  that  seemed  able  to  move  their  cold,  impene- 

7 


8  Uno  Who. 

trable  faces,  which  were  in  strong  contrast  to  those  of 
the  Spaniards  who  went  along  laughing,  chatting  and 
gesticulating,  and  the  colored  people  ever  ready  to  show 
their  white  teeth  on  the  slightest  provocation.  There 
were  horses  and  carriages  with  liveried  drivers  going 
and  coming  in  all  directions,  but  one  seemed  to  attract 
more  attention  than  all  others. 

Paulo  Who  was  a  young  man  of  fifteen,  hut  in  looks 
and  appearance  much  older;  he  was  accompanied  by 
his  friend,  Alberto  de  Gomora,  a  young  man  nearly  his 
own  age,  but  more  youthful-looking.  They  drove  up 
the  shell  road  to  a  large  mansion  that  overlooked  the 
sea.  It  was  called  "  Sunnyside."  Alberto  de  Gomora 
alighted,  saying,  "I  will  be  there  at  five  o'clock/' 
Paulo  was  driven  around  a  circle  (in  the  center  of 
which  was  a  large  fountain)  to  the  street.  Turning  the 
corner  and  driving  the  same  distance  whence  he  came, 
he  drove  up  a  shell  road  to  another  large  circle,  the 
edge  of  which  joined  the  one  he  had  left,  and  in  the 
center  of  which  stood  a  fountain  that  seemed  to  vie  with 
its  neighbor  in  throwing  its  sprays  over  the  surround- 
ing shrubbery  of  the  beautifully  cultivated  grounds. 
This  place  was  called  "The  Shadows,"  as  it  faced  a 
grove  of  moss-covered  trees  that  had  been  carefully 
trained.  From  the  side  of  the  house  was  a  fine  view  of 
the  sea. 

As  he  drove  up  to  the  house  he  was  greeted  by  a  half- 
dozen  children  dressed  in  white,  who  exclaimed  as  they 
rushed  on  the  broad  piazza :  "  Paulo  has  come, 


Uno  Who.  9 

Paulo  has  come!"  After  saying  he  would  come 
to  them  at  five  o'clock,  he  retired  to  his  room. 
He  then  paid  a  visit  to  his  mother  in  her  bou- 
doir. She  was  reclining  upon  a  couch,  while  his 
father  read  a  letter  to  her.  She  put  out  her  hand  as  he 
entered,  saying:  "My  son,  how  have  you  succeeded  in 
the  distribution  of  the  gifts  to-day  ?  "  He  replied  that 
everything  had  heen  done  as  she  requested;  that  his 
aunts  and  Meno  had  superintended  the  getting  them 
ready,  and  that  he  and  Alberto  had  assisted  each  other 
in  the  distribution,  and  he  would  now  attend  to  the 
lighting  of  the  tree  for  the  children.  He  sat  beside  his 
mother  holding  her  beautiful  hand,  as  she  languidly 
looked  at  him  as  if  devouring  every  word  he  said. 
After  a  moment's  silence  she  said :  "  Paulo,  you  will 
never  know  what  a  treasure  you  have  been  to  me/' 

She  was  a  native  of  Spain,  and  conversed  in  that 
language,  and  as  there  were  few  English  people 
in  the  town  at  the  period  of  which  we  write  she 
was  not  very  proficient  in  their  language.  Her 
crimson  robe  trimmed  with  swan's  down  relieved  the 
pallor  of  a  face  whose  chief  attractions  were  its 
dimples  in  chin  and  cheeks.  Her  short  upper  lip 
displayed  beautiful  teeth;  her  face  seemed  always 
wreathed  in  smiles ;  her  brown  eyes  were  full  of  tender- 
ness and  good  feeling;  her  dark  hair  was  combed  from 
a  rather  low  brow,  and  the  Psyche  knot  was  held  by  a 
jeweled  dagger.  On  her  feet  were  moccasins  beauti- 
fully beaded  by  Wauka,  her  husband's  youngest  sister. 


io  Uno  Who. 

Osceola  Who  was  walking  the  room,  running  his 
fingers  through  his  long  black  hair — his  habit  when  in 
deep  thought.  He  was  tall  and  straight,  with  a  firm 
mouth  and  high  forehead;  the  high  cheek  bones  told  of 
his  Indian  ancestry.  Paulo  was  like  his  father  in  looks 
and  appearance,  but  the  expression  of  his  face  was  a  re- 
flection of  his  mother.  He  had  her  gentle  and  kind 
manner,  ever  thoughtful  of  others.  As  he  arose  to  go 
his  father  said :  "  Here  is  a  letter  from  Havana.  Your 
cousin  Cobre  has  gone  to  Madrid  for  the  winter." 

He  kissed  his  mother,  and  bidding  his  father  "  good 
night,"  took  his  departure. 

Alberto,  with  his  sisters  Flora  and  Elaine,  were  in 
the  drawing-room  with  the  children.  Paulo  at  once  be- 
gan putting  things  in  order.  They  must  all  be  seated 
until  after  the  distribution  of  the  gifts,  then  they 
should  have  a  dance.  He  ordered  the  doors  thrown 
open  into  the  music  room,  and  there  was  the  tree  beauti- 
fully lighted.  As  the  gifts  were  handed  him,  he  called 
out  the  name  and  sent  it  by  one  of  the  maids,  who  was 
dressed  in  yellow  and  white.  His  aunts,  Thetis  and 
Wauka,  were  there  to  assist  him.  There  stood  his  eldest 
sister,  Mercedes  Who,  a  very  dignified  girl,  then  Florita, 
Burnedita,  Seminole,  Marie  and  baby  Ola,  as  she  was 
then  called.  Then  there  were  the  two  proteges  of  his 
mother,  Meno  and  Wewe  Wildflower.  Meno  was  only 
a  year  younger  than  Paulo. 

Pamphilo  de  Gomora  was  in  Madrid.  His  sisters, 
Flora  and  Elaine,  with  their  brother,  Alberto,  consti- 


Uno  Who.  ii 

tuted  the  ehidren  of  the  two  families,  each  to  play  an 
important  part  in  the  drama  of  life. 

When  it  came  to  the  dancing  there  was  a  call  for 
Uncle  Jake  and  his  violin.  To  this  Paulo  consented, 
he  and  Alberto  dancing  with  the  children  until  eight 
o'clock  ;  then  kissing  his  sisters,  he  bade  them  "  good 
night,"  and  they  quietly  obeyed  his  instructions  to  re- 
tire. Paulo  then  accompanied  Alberto  and  his  sisters 
to  "  Sunnyside."  They  found  Don  Pamphilo  de  Go- 
mora  in  the  library.  He  looked  up  from  the  letter  he 
was  reading  and  said :  "  Paulo,  your  cousin  Cobre  is 
going  to  spend  the  holidays  with  my  son  at  his  grand- 
father's." 

Paulo  replied :  "  My  mother  to-day  received  a  letter 
from  her  sister  saying  Cobre  had  gone  to  Madrid  for 
the  winter." 

Don  Pamphilo  de  Gomora  was  the  second  son  of  the 
Marquis  of  Floraine.  He  had  been  an  officer  in  the 
Spanish  navy  at  the  time  of  the  Indian  wars  in  Florida. 
Osceola  Who  had  attended  a  military  school  in  Spain, 
and  while  there  he  met  Don  Pamphilo,  and  it  was  in  a 
measure  due  to  his  influence  that  he  resigned  his  com- 
mission in  the  navy  and  settled  in  Florida.  His  wife, 
a  very  beautiful  woman,  was  the  daughter  of  Lord 
Oughton,  of  England. 

Alberto  told  his  father  that,  with  his  permission, 
they  would  be  driven  out  to  Col.  Sebastian's.  His  son, 
who  was  spending  his  holiday  vacation  at  home,  was 
entertaining  his  friends.  They  did  not  return  until 


12  Uno  Who. 

the  dawn  of  day,  and  were  then  informed  that  Paulo 
had  a  seventh  sister,  born  just  after  the  convent  clock 
had  struck  the  hour  of  midnight,  and  that  a  little  girl 
born  at  the  same  time  was  a  welcome  guest  at  "  Sunny- 
side." 

As  Osceola  Who  on  that  Christmas  morning  stepped 
upon  the  piazza  to  hail  the  new-born  day,  he  suddenly 
took  off  his  hat,  his  arms  dropped  by  his  side,  and  he 
stood  like  one  in  the  presence  of  the  Great  Spirit  as  he 
gazed  upon  the  glorious  orb  just  rising  from  the  sea. 
He  was  aroused  from  his  reverie  by  the  tramping  of 
horses,  and  he  immediately  went  down  to  the  yard.  In 
silence  he  threw  himself  into  the  saddle,  and,  accom- 
panied by  his  attendant,  he  rode  several  miles  into  the 
country. 

They  stopped  at  a  plantation  house.  At  one  side,  in 
a  grove,  was  a  wigwam;  to  that  Osceola  directed  his 
steps.  It  had  been  there  since  the  days  of  the  oldest  in- 
habitants; it  had  been  repaired  from  time  to  time,  but 
no  money  could  induce  the  owner  to  live  in  the  planta- 
tion house.  He  wished  to  be  buried  there,  and  the  wig- 
wam to  remain  a  monument  to  old  "  You-Know-Who." 
He  knew  his  wishes  would  be  conscientiously  carried 
out  by  his  great-grandson,  Osceola,  the  heir  to  his  vast 
estates.  Osceola,  his  father,  his  grandfather,  his  great- 
grandfather, and  others  before  him  had  been  seventh 
sons,  and  now  there  was  a  seventh  daughter. 

When  Osceola  entered  the  wigwam  he  found  the 
three  old  men  sitting  in  silence. 


Uno  Who.  13 

His  father  said :  "  The  spell  is  upon  him.  We  have 
not  slept  during  the  night." 

The  old  Indian  sat  with  bowed  head,  his  hands  rest- 
ing upon  the  arms  of  an  old  wicker  chair.  Osceola  sat 
down  beside  him,  and  laying  his  hand  on  his,  said: 
"  Grandfather,  it  is  a  girl." 

The  old  oracle  nodded  his  head  in  acquiescence  as  he 
said :  "  There  will  be  no  more  sevenths  born  to  our 
tribe.  She  will  carry  the  name  of  You-Know-Who  to 
her  grave.  She  will  be  very  much  of  an  Indian;  will 
love  freedom  and  the  Great  Spirit.  She  will  be  the  de- 
fender of  many." 

He  was  silent  for  a  few  moments,  then  pitifully 
added :  "  Poor  little  pale-face,  she  will  have  a  sad  life 
with  pale-face  man,  and  will  be  in  great  danger  from  a 
woman  of  our  tribe,  but  You-Know-Who  will  save  her 
and  the  pride  of  the  de  Gomora  family." 

Osceola  made  a  written  statement  of  what  his  grand- 
father said,  for  he  believed  in  the  old  oracle.  His 
father  and  his  sisters  kept  a  copy,  for  this  was  a  child 
of  promise.  It  was  food  for  talk  among  those  who 
came  to  call  on  the  old  oracle  that  Christmas  day,  and 
to  bring  him  some  token  of  affection.  There  were  now 
living  five  generations  of  the  Who  family — four  seventh 
sons  and  a  seventh  daughter,  and  the  old  man  straight- 
ened himself  up  as  he  said :  "  I  do  not  feel  a  day  older 
than  when  Osceola  was  born." 

He  then  seated  himself  in  the  old  wicker  chair  from 
which  he  had  arisen  to  show  off  his  strength.  After  a 


14  Uno  Who. 

moment's  silence,  he  said :  "  Osceola,  I  am  living  over 
my  young  days.  They  tell  me  it  is  second  childhood. 
There  was  great  rejoicing  when  you  were  born,  but  it 
was  a  great  disappointment  when  Thetis  came.  It  was 
looked  upon  as  a  bad  omen  to  have  the  firstborn  a  girl. 
The  poor  little  pappoose  was  heartbroken  when  your 
father  would  not  look  at  her;  but  when  all  the  rest 
were  boys  she  found  great  favor  in  his  eyes.  Your 
grandmother  was  very  good  to  pappoosie,  as  she  called 
her.  She  was  but  a  child  when  your  father  brought  her 
to  live  among  the  Indians,  hardly  seventeen  when 
Thetis  was  born.  She  cried  all  the  time,  and  it  made 
your  father  cross.  Indians  do  not  like  crying  women. 
I  think  it  was  remorse  that  made  him  so  cross,  for  he 
was  blamed  by  his  brother,  the  Chief,  and  all  our  tribe. 
Your  father's  youngest  sister  was  living  in  Cuba  with 
her  brother.  We  sent  for  her  to  come  here,  and  comfort 
pappoosie,  fearing  she  would  die.  She  would  take  her 
pappoose  and  sit  in  the  grove  singing  the  most  mourn- 
ful songs.  I  thought  sometimes  the  birds  stopped  sing- 
ing to  listen.  She  was  happy  with  her  children,  and 
taught  them  everything.  I  sent  to  Havana  for  books. 
She  could  talk  very  well  in  our  language,  but  they 
talked  mostly  in  Spanish,  sometimes  in  English.  She 
often  asked  your  father  to  take  her  to  Georgia,  where 
she  could  see  some  English  people,  but  he  would  not. 
I  asked  her  to  write  for  me  the  words  she  used  to  sing 
so  much.  They  are  yours  now." 

He  took  from  his  pocket-book  a  piece  of  thin  skin, 


Uno  Who.  15 

and  carefully  laid  between  its  folds  was  a  paper  on 
which  was  written  in  the  Seminole  language : 


What  are  nature's  charms  combined 

To  one  whose  weary  breast 
Can  neither  peace  or  comfort  find, 

Or  friend  whereon  to  rest. 

Alas  !    My  daily  sacrifice  is  still  to  weep  and  pray, 

For  never,  never,  while  I  live 
Will  my  heart's  anguish  cease. 

O  !  Friendly  death,  thy  mandate  give, 
And  let  me  be  at  rest." 


Osceola  then  asked:  "Was  there  any  stain  on  my 
mother's  name  ?  " 

"  No,"  was  the  decided  answer.  "  She  was  too  pure 
and  good  for  this  world." 

He  then  asked :    "  Who  was  she  ?  " 

"  Osceola,  I  cannot  tell  you.  I  do  know  that  none 
of  the  tribe  were  to  blame  for  what  your  father  did. 
They  were  married  by  a  priest.  The  certificate  is  in 
Cuba  for  safe  keeping.  The  Chief  had  them  married 
again  by  the  forms  of  our  tribe,  setting  at  rest  any 
doubts  in  the  minds  of  our  people.  I  often  see  her  in 
the  clouds,  and  I  know  the  day  is  not  far  distant  when 
I  will  join  her  in  the  Happy  Hunting  Grounds.  Your 
brother  was  killed  when  so  young  he  had  not  married, 
and  you  are  the  first  seventh  son  to  become  chief  of 
our  tribe,  taking  the  name  Osceola,  and  some  day  truth 
that  has  been  crushed  to  earth  will  throw  off  the  dust 


16  Uno  Who. 

of  ages  and  honor  the  descendants  of  old  You-Know- 
Who." 

Osceola  was  greatly  impressed  by  what  his  grand- 
father had  told  him.  He  had  never  known  him  to  talk 
so  long  and  freely  before. 

Upon  his  arrival  home  he  found  Don  Pamphilo  had 
been  there.  He  left  a  note  saying :  "  What  unspeak- 
able rejoicing  and  congratulations  will  there  be  be- 
tween us." 

In  his  study  hi  made  a  memorandum  of  the  conver- 
sation with  his  grandfather,  and  after  making  a  hasty 
call  of  congratulation  at  "  Sunnyside,"  he  prepared  to 
spend  the  remainder  of  the  eventful  day  with  his 
family. 

Lord  Oughton,  with  his  wife  and  daughter,  Lady 
Margaret,  had  spent  the  winter  with  their  daughter  at 
Sunnyside.  Lady  Margaret  felt  highly  honored  when 
asked  to  bestow  a  portion  of  her  name  upon  the  last 
arrival.  The  little  Garita  was  baptized  in  the  Episco- 
pal church,  Uno  in  the  Catholic  church.  Don  Pam- 
philo and  his  sons  were  Catholics,  but  in  the  family  it 
was  one  God,  one  Faith,  one  Baptism. 

Osceola  had  some  of  the  superstitions  of  his  tribe, 
for  which  Don  Pamphilo  had  upon  several  occasions 
caused  him  to  feel  he  had  a  contempt.  He,  therefore, 
did  not  tell  him  of  the  prophecy  in  regard  to  the  chil- 
dren until  Don  Pamphilo  asked  him  about  it. 

Dona  and  Lady  Margaret,  having  heard  something 
about  the  prophecy,  would  like  to  know  particulars. 


Uno  Who.  17 

He  gave  it  to  them  in  writing,  saying :  "  I  know  your 
unbelief,  and  did  not  consider  it  worth  while  to  trouble 
you.  Everything  my  grandfather  has  told  you  has 
come  true,  and  I  believe  this  will,  although  I  think  the 
day  of  change  has  come." 
«i  "  Osceola,  you  are  a  fatalist." 

"Yes,  Pamphilo,  I  believe  in  cruel  and  relentless 
fate.  We  can  smooth  the  way  and  help  our  friends  to 
bear  the  inevitable  until  they  reach  the  fatal  place  of 
rest  foretold." 

"  Osceola,  neither  you  nor  your  father  nor  grand- 
father seemed  to  have  this  gift  of  prophesying,  and  you 
are  seventh  sons." 

"  Pamphilo,  there  are  a  sort  of  men  whose  visages  do 
cream  and  mantle  like  a  standing  pond.  When  he  is 
gone  the  mantle  may  fall  more  heavily  upon  the  others. 
Now  he  absorbs  them.  As  for  myself,  I  am  out  in  the 
world,  and  do  not  give  thought  to  affairs  of  this  nature 
until  they  are  forced  upon  me,  as  they  are  to  us  all  at 
times;  fears  are  oft  prophetic  of  events." 

"  Osceola,  it  is  not  a  healthy  state  of  mind  for  one  to 
dwell  upon  an  inevitable  necessity." 

"I  quite  agree  with  you,  Pamphilo,  but  a  healthy 
brain  and  body  will  find  too  much  to  think  about  and 
do,  in  this  beautiful  world,  to  become  morbid  on  any 
subject  that  is  not  forced  upon  them.  Still  great  mon- 
archies have  risen  from  barbarism  and  fallen  again  to 
ruin.  You  think  I  still  adhere  to  some  of  the  super- 
stitions of  my  race.  Find  me  a  man  or  woman  that  has 


i8  Uno  Who. 

not  one  superstitious  notion.  We  have  had  a  conversa- 
tion on  this  subject  before,  and  I  have  made  a  study  of 
these  peculiarities  in  people,  and  I  can  assure  you  t 
have  some  very  funny  things  to  relate.  There  is  a  dig- 
nity about  the  superstitions  of  an  Indian.  The  white 
man's  are  so  absurd  that  he  often  tries  to  conceal 
them." 

Osceola  had  just  finished  telling  Don  Pamphilo  what 
he  had  learned  from  his  grandfather  in  regard  to  his 
mother,  when  Dona  and  Lady  Margaret  entered  the 
room.  They  had  taken  the  little  Garita  to  visit  the  old 
oracle,  and  had  just  returned.  After  telling  Osceola 
of  the  pleasant  call  they  had,  Lady  Margaret  talked 
with  Don  Pamphilo  in  regard  to  their  taking  Flora  to 
England.  She  wished  to  have  her  educated  there. 

"  Margaret,  I  have  every  confidence  in  your  judg- 
ment. Your  life  has  been,  devoted  to  your  family  and 
their  interests,  but  we  would  be  very  lonely  without 
Flora." 

"  Pamphilo,  I  have  not  forgotten  how  we  felt  when 
you  brought  my  sister  to  this  far  away  home  to  which 
she  has  become  so  attached." 

"  Margaret,  I  fear  it  would  result  in  your  keeping 
Flora,  as  you  have  the  reputation  of  being  a  match- 
maker." 

"  I  can  assure  you,  Pamphilo,  it  would  be  very  grati- 
fying to  have  my  sister's  children  occupying  the  posi- 
tions in  England  to  which  their  birth  entitles  them,  and 
I  know  it  would  be  no  less  gratifying  to  you  who  think 


Uno  Who.  19 

so  much  of  your  ancestry.  It  is  time  we  were  giving 
thought  to  this  subject,"  and  Lady  Margaret  drew  her 
mantle  about  her  with  the  air  of  one  who  felt  her  sis- 
ter's family  were  out  of  their  sphere  in  life. 

"  Osceola,"  said  Dona,  "  we  called  at  '  The  Shadows/ 
and  Senora  tells  me  you  are  going  to  send  Mercedes 
and  Florita  to  Madrid,  and  have  them  educated  in  the 
convent." 

"  Dona,  it  is  not  my  choice.  I  would  prefer  sending 
them  to  England.  Mercedes  is  a  very  thoughtful  girl, 
cares  little  or  nothing  for  society,  and  I  fear  she  will 
become  a  nun." 

Don  Pamphilo's  large  brown  eyes  were  fixed  in  won- 
der upon  him  as  he  said :  "  Osceola,  you  are  prognos- 
ticating, but  it  is  a  difficult  problem  to  solve  what  is 
best  for  your  children.  Alberto  wishes  to  enter  college 
at  the  North,  as  Paulo  is  going,  too;  just  think  how 
desolate  our  fireside  will  le  next  winter." 

Dona  had  little  to  say.  Her  calm,  sweet  face  was 
never  disturbed.  She  had  no  choice ;  it  was  always  just 
as  Pamphilo  said.  Her  soft,  brown  hair,  blue  eyes, 
pink  and  white  complexion  were  in  strong  contrast  to 
her  distinguished  looking  husband. 

Lord  Oughton  left  them  in  April,  and  June  found 
the  two  families  at  their  cottages  in  Saratoga,  where 
they  were  joined  by  Senora  Who's  sister  and  family  of 
Havana.  In  the  fall  the  boys  went  to  college.  The 
families,  as  was  their  custom,  remained  at  the  North 
until  the  October  days  were  drawing  to  a  close,  then 


20  Uno  Who. 

went  to  one  of  the  plantations  for  a  month,  Dona  and 
Senora  getting  home  in  time  for  the  Christmas  work  of 
their  respective  churches.  Dona  played  what  was  called 
an  organ  in  the  schoolhouse  where  service  was  held 
when  she  first  went  there,  but  it  was  not  long  before  a 
clergyman  and  money  were  sent  from  England  for  a 
church.  When  Senora  came  there  a  bride  she  was  very 
much  interested  in  the  poor  Indian  girls  and  women 
who  had  been  left  destitute  by  the  husbands  and  fathers 
being  killed  in  the  wars.  Among  them  was  the  mother 
of  Meno  and  Wewe.  Her  husband  and  father  were  full 
blood  Indians  of  rank.  She  was  called  Wildflower. 
When  her  husband  was  called  by  that  name  he  said: 
"  Me-no-wildflower."  In  that  way  the  name  "  Meno  " 
was  suggested  to  Senora,  and  "Wewe"  was  mother's 
baby. 

Their  mother  died,  leaving  them  to  Senora,  and  she 
took  them  into  her  family.  They  grew  up  with  a  feel- 
ing that  they  were  a  little  better  than  other  Indians. 
With  the  assistance  of  the  priest,  Padre  Narcisso,  she 
found  homes  for  many  of  these  poor  girls.  Mercedes' 
nurse,  Sitka,  was  an  Indian  girl,  and  to  her  she  gave 
the  care  of  the  baby  "  Uno."  At  Christmas  there  were 
birthday  parties  at  "  Sunnyside  "  and  "  The  Shadows." 
The  boys  were  home  on  their  vacation.  Col.  Sebastian's 
daughter,  who  lived  in  Madrid,  was  home  on  a  visit, 
and  he  was  made  happy  by  the  presence  of  his  little 
granddaughter,  Isla  Manrique. 

In  the  spring  the  old  oracle  died.     He  was  buried 


Uno  Who.  21 

with  all  the  pomp  and  ceremony  of  his  tribe,  after 
which  the  father  and  grandfather  of  Osceola  went  to 
Cuba  to  live  with  his  uncle. 

Osceola  and  Senora  joined  Col.  Sebastian's  daughter 
on  her  return  to  Madrid.  Thetis,  whose  husband  and 
sons  were  killed  in  the  wars,  went  to  "  The  Shadows  " 
to  live  during  their  absence.  This  woman  was  a  thor- 
oughbred Indian.  If  there  was  any  other  blood  in  her 
veins  she  did  not  show  it.  She  was  tall  and  straight,  her 
black  hair  was  combed  smooth  down  on  her  face,  not 
anything  like  a  curl  was  allowed,  for  it  looked  like  the 
negro,  and  tied  so  tight  at  the  back  it  looked  as  if  her 
eyebrows  were  drawn  by  the  strain,  giving  deep  furrows 
running  crosswise  of  her  forehead.  In  the  coil  at  the 
back  was  a  high  top  comb.  She  had  snapping  black 
eyes,  a  nice  nose,  and  beautiful  teeth  which  were  im- 
prisoned by  the  compressed  lips ;  a  more  severe  type  of 
woman  it  would  be  difficult  to  find.  The  only  one  she 
showed  any  affection  for  was  her  sister  Wauka,  who  was 
a  sad,  sweet-faced  woman  with  large  brown  eyes  and  a 
mouth  the  expression  of  which  was  of  one  whose  hopes 
are  buried.  She  lived  at  the  plantation,  and  took  care 
of  a  worthless,  dissipated  husband  that  even  Spanish 
bullets  had  failed  to  make  any  impression  upon,  and 
now  that  the  old  men  had  gone,  he  had  brought  his 
mother  there  to  live.  During  Thetis'  absence  they  had 
things  their  own  way,  so  Wauka  would  come  to  "  The 
Shadows"  and  let  Thetis  go  to  the  plantation  and 
straighten  out  their  affairs.  The  old  woman  would 


22  Uno  Who. 

take  her  pipe  and  go  out  under  the  trees.  There, 
wrapped  in  her  blanket,  she  would  every  now  and  then 
look  out  of  the  corner  of  her  eye,  to  see  what  the  Gen- 
eral (as  she  called  Thetis)  was  doing.  Wauka  did  the 
most  beautiful  bead  work  and  all  kinds  of  nice  needle 
work,  which  delighted  the  hearts  of  Dona  and  Senora. 
She  was  a  welcome  guest  among  her  many  friends. 
Paulo  remained  at  home  with  his  sisters,  and  as  his 
father  and  mother  did  not  return  until  Christmas,  and 
he  and  Alberto  had  spent  their  vacation  in  travel  at  the 
North,  he  did  not  see  the  family  until  summer  at  Sara- 
toga; he  then  discovered  that  his  mother  was  not  well. 
She  had  taken  a  severe  cold  on  the  return  voyage,  from 
which  she  had  not  recovered.  When  he  went  home  for 
the  holidays  he  found  his  mother  no  better. 

Pamphilo  and  Cobre  had  returned  from  abroad,  and 
she  joined  their  party  on  a  visit  to  her  sister  in  Havana, 
where  she  remained  several  weeks.  Upon  her  return 
home  she  entered  upon  her  lenten  work  with  something 
of  her  old-time  vigor.  N"ow  that  Meno  and  Wewe  were 
out  of  school,  she  arranged  for  them  to  assist  her. 
Meno  must  look  after  the  children  in  their  studies. 
Wewe,  who  was  quite  proficient  in  music,  must  assist 
them.  She  was  devoted  to  Seminole,  and  as  she  wag 
quite  an  artist  with  her  needle,  she  even  looked  after 
her  clothes. 

Senora  had  never  taken  her  proteges  to  Saratoga; 
she  now  decided  to  do  so,  that  the  children  might  con- 
tinue their  studies.  Burnedita  played  the  harp,  and 


Uno  Who.  23 

she  wished  her  to  take  instructions  while  at  the  North. 
Thus  she  continually  planned  for  her  children;  no 
word  of  complaint  escaped  her,  but  she  was  restless. 
Osceola  had  consulted  the  best  physicians  and  all  ad- 
vised change. 

Don  Pamphilo  and  family  spent  the  summer  in  Eng- 
land at  the  ancestral  home  of  Lord  Oughton,  going  to 
Spain  in  the  fall  to  visit  his  father,  the  Marquis  of 
Floraine,  and  with  him  going  to  Seville  in  the  winter. 

Upon  their  return  in  the  spring,  they  found  Senora 
Who  had  not  improved  in  health.  Their  son,  Pam- 
philo, had  been  devoting  himself  to  an  English  lady  in 
Georgia  while  looking  after  his  father's  estates.  In 
the  summer  Senora  did  not  wish  to  leave  her  home,  but 
the  physicians  said  she  must  have  change,  so  she  was 
taken  to  Saratoga.  Paulo  was  not  prepared  for  the 
great  change  in  his  mother.  He  went  to  Dona,  asking 
her  if  she  thought  his  mother  would  die.  He  was  quite 
overcome  when  she  told  him  consumption  had  claimed 
her  as  a  victim. 

His  mother  noticed  the  change  in  his  looks  and  de- 
meanor, and  said  as  she  put  her  hand  in  his :  "  Paulo, 
my  son,  you  must  be  brave;  your  father  will  need  your 
support  in  this  trying  ordeal.  I  know  you  desire  to  go 
to  Spain  and  enter  the  army  when  you  leave  college." 

She  could  say  no  more.  After  a  few  moments'  si- 
lence, Paulo  said :  "  Mother,  I  will  never  leave  you 
nor  my  father  and  sisters  while  they  need  me." 

During  the  winter,  though  confined  to  her  room, 


24  Uno  Who. 

Senora  continued  to  take  an  interest  in  her  family  af- 
fairs. Meno  was  her  companion.  After  giving  in- 
structions to  Ola  and  the  little  Uno,  in  her  presence, 
that  she  might  hear  their  childish  talk  and  questions, 
she  asked  Meno  to  talk  to  them  sometimes  of  their 
mother  when  she  had  gone.  She  often  had  Burnedita's 
harp  brought  in  that  she  might  listen  to  the  sweet 
voices  of  the  children  as  they  accompanied  her,  laugh- 
ing at  Ola,  whom  she  called  her  prodigy  in  music,  and 
Marie  her  sister  of  charity ;  Seminole  was  her  sunbeam 
in  "The  Shadows."  She  was  pleased  when  she  re- 
ceived a  letter  from  Mercedes  that  she  was  going  to  be 
a  nun,  and  that  Florita  was  coming  home.  To  Aunt 
Thetis'  heart  of  adamant  she  had  found  the  key,  and 
there  were  unclaimed  treasures  which  she  had  no  diffi- 
culty in  taking  possession  of.  Thetis  thought  it  showed 
a  lack  of  confidence  in  her  when  told  that  Senora  had 
left  her  little  Uno  to  the  care  of  Dona.  Senora  told 
her  it  was  Don  Pamphilo's  request,  and  Osceola  had 
given  his  consent  that  Uno  and  Garita  be  brought  up 
together.  Thetis  said,  with  a  toss  of  her  head,  that 
she  had  brought  up  one  family,  and  she  thought  she 
could  another,  to  which  Senora  replied :  "  Yes,  Thetis, 
my  husband  shows  his  good  training." 

Dona  was  devoted  to  her  friend,  and  when  informed 
by  Lady  Margaret  of  the  engagement  of  Flora,  she  re- 
plied :  "  There  could  be  no  arrangements  for  a  wed- 
ding while  Senora  was  so  ill." 

The   spring    days   with   their   enervating   influence 


Uno  Who.  25 

made  a  great  change  in  Senora.  She  could  no  longer 
have  little  Uno  kneel  beside  her  bed  to  say  her  prayers 
and  receive  her  good-night  kiss,  but  at  brother  Paulo's 
knee,  and  in  her  own  room,  where  he  soothed  the  petted 
child  into  f orgetf ulness  of  her  first  grief.  His  devotion 
to  his  mother  and  his  loving  kindness  in  trying  to  sus- 
tain his  father  was  never  forgotten  by  his  many  friends. 

When  all  was  over,  Don  Pamphilo  and  his  family 
went  to  England.  It  was  his  son's  wedding-trip. 
There  was  a  brilliant  wedding  for  Flora  in  the  ances- 
tral home  of  her  grandfather.  Lady  Margaret's  pride 
and  ambition  had  been  gratified.  Osceola  had  taken 
his  family  to  Saratoga.  Florita,  though  young,  proved 
herself  equal  to  managing  her  father's  household  with- 
out the  assistance  of  Meno,  which  was  gratifying  to 
him.  His  wife's  sister  and  husband,  Senor  de  Filipe, 
were  at  their  cottage,  but  Osceola  was  restless;  he 
must  find  work,  and  they  went  to  their  Southern  home 
earlier  than  had  been  their  custom.  They  found  Don 
Pamphilo  had  returned,  leaving  Alberto  and  Elaine  in 
Spain. 

It  was  Lady  Margaret's  request  that  Osceola  would 
send  Seminole  to  her;  to  this  he  readily  assented,  as 
she,  of  all  his  children,  most  needed  discipline.  She 
had  become  so  accustomed  to  Wewe's  doing  for  her  that 
she  treated  her  as  if  she  were  a  maid,  which  highly  of- 
fended Wewe's  dignity,  and  their  friendship  was  at  an 
end. 

Seminole  was  not  old  enough  to  realize  what  she  had 


26  Uno  Who. 

done,  being,  like  most  really  amiable  people,  very  self- 
ish. Careless  was  stamped  upon  everything  she  owned; 
her  manner,  her  whole  make-up,  bore  the  stamp,  and 
now  she  would  not  have  Wewe  try  to  obliterate  it.  Her 
Indian  blood  was  up,  and  she  never  forgave  Seminole. 
Meno  had  always  shown  an  envious  and  jealous  spirit 
towards  Elaine,  who  treated  her  with  a  great  deal  of 
dignity,  and  was  always  making  excuses  for  Seminole's 
shortcomings.  Now  that  she  was  going  to  England  to 
be  with  Elaine,  she  was  very  happy,  much  to  Meno's 
disgust,  and  she  foolishly  remarked :  "  Oh,  the  de 
Gomoras  are  perfection  with  this  family."  This  re- 
mark was  not  forgotten  in  after  years  by  Seminole. 

Dona  had  taken  Uno  to  her  home,  and  Meno,  as 
governess  to  her  and  Garita,  went  there  to  live.  In  the 
spring  Florita  was  married,  and  went  to  Madrid,  taking 
with  her  Burnedita,  who  went  to  the  convent.  Semi- 
nole had  joined  Elaine  in  England.  There  were  now 
only  two  children  left,  Marie  and  Ola,  with  Wewe  as 
their  governess.  Thetis  was  now  a  fixture  at  "The 
Shadows."  Paulo  prevailed  upon  his  father  to  go 
abroad,  as  Dona  said  she  would  be  a  mother  to  the 
children,  but  she  hoped  Paulo  would  return  and  live  at 
home.  To  this  he  replied :  "  That  can  never  be ;  hence- 
forth I  shall  be  a  wanderer.  I  will  spend  a  year  in 
travel  with  my  father,  then  enter  the  army,  but  Dona, 
your  boy,  as  you  have  often  called  me,  will  never  give 
you  cause  to  blush  at  his  name." 

Uno  was  heartbroken  when  told  that  her  father  and 


Uno  Who.  27 

brother  were  going  away.  Heaven  was  bad  enough  to 
take  a  little  girl's  mother,  but  Spain  was  worse.  Meno 
could  not  conceal  her  feelings  at  Paulo's  departure. 
By  him,  the  tall,  handsome  man,  she  was  no  longer 
treated  like  a  sister;  they  had  outgrown  that  period  of 
their  lives,  and  when  he  took  Uno  and  Garita  in  his 
arms  and  kissed  them  good-by,  saying :  "  Meno,  take 
good  care  of  my  little  sister,  for  my  sake,"  he  did  not 
think  how  she  would  dwell  upon  those  parting  words, 
"for  my  sake."  They  were  the  seeds  of  hope  which 
she  nourished  with  fond  care.  In  her  narrow  sphere  of 
life,  she  could  not  realize  how  quickly  she  and  the  idle 
remark  had  passed  out  of  his  mind. 

The  day  after  they  left,  Dona  took  Garita  and  TJno 
to  see  Wauka ;  her  husband  had  been  out  hunting,  and 
had  called  at  the  wigwams  scattered  about  the  coun- 
try, and  the  squaws  had  come  with  their  pappooses  to 
have  a  feast  of  game,  smoking  and  taking  snuff  with 
his  mother,  much  to  Wauka's  disgust.  The  little  pap- 
pooses, strapped  to  a  board,  were  standing  up  by  the 
house  or  anything  they  could  lean  the  board  against, 
picking  at  the  bone  that  had  been  given  them.  These 
babies  always  amused  the  children,  so  Dona  let  them 
get  out  of  the  carriage  and  go  with  Meno  to  look  at 
them.  The  squaws  were  delighted  to  see  Meno,  as 
some  of  them  remembered  her  mother,  and  she  could 
talk  in  their  language.  Dona  had  given  Meno  her 
purse,  telling  her  to  distribute  its  contents  among  them. 
They  wanted  to  go  to  the  carriage  door  and  see  Dona, 


28  Uno  Who. 

but  Meno  told  them  they  must  be  satisfied  with  having 
seen  the  children  of  old  You-Know-Who's  prophecy. 
They  blessed  them  by  clasping  their  hands  and  looking 
up  to  the  Great  Spirit.  Garita  was  a  very  mild  and 
quiet  child,  while  Uno  was  self-willed  and  mischievous, 
often  causing  Dona  anxiety.  She  did  not  wish  to  study, 
but  would  improve  every  opportunity  to  get  away  from 
Sitka,  often  taking  Garita  with  her,  thus  annoying  the 
nurse,  Nannette,  who  was  a  slave,  and  had  no  use  for 
the  poor  Indian. 

It  was  Saint  Patrick's  day;  the  music  was  exciting, 
and  in  the  passing  of  the  procession,  Garita  and  Uno 
escaped  from  their  nurses.  They  were  found  at  the 
negro  quarters  having  a  fine  time.  Some  boys  had 
stuffed  a  pair  of  pants  and  coat  with  straw,  and  put 
them  together;  a  hat  on  the  head,  a  stick  in  the  hand, 
a  big  green  sash  made  of  leaves,  and  placed  their  Saint 
Patrick  on  the  platform,  from  which  the  negroes  de- 
livered their  speeches.  They  were  hurrahing  in  fine 
style,  which  brought  a  crowd  of  angry  Spaniards. 
Some  one  went  to  the  house  for  Don  Pamphilo.  He 
was  not  at  home,  but  Dona  mounted  a  horse  that  stood 
in  the  yard  and  went  flying  to  the  rescue.  She  was  a 
beautiful  sight;  her  dress  was  white  and  her  hair  fly- 
ing in  the  breeze;  one  hand  on  the  bridle,  with  the 
other  she  was  waving  to  the  crowd.  She  mounted  the 
steps  and  threw  Saint  Patrick  to  the  ground,  amid  the 
wild  cheers  of  the  excited  crowd.  She  addressed  them 
in  Spanish,  telling  how  it  was  the  foolishness  of  chil- 


Uno  Who.  29 

dren,  and  begging  them  to  be  quiet.  Two  of  the  men 
went  on  the  platform  and  shook  hands  with  her,  and 
then  she  rode  away,  amid  wild  cheers  for  Dona  Marie. 

Padre  Xarcisso  said  it  was  well  that  Don  Pamphilo 
was  not  at  home,  for  he  doubted  his  being  able  to  quiet 
them  as  well.  Dona  saw  the  children  looking  at  Saint 
Patrick  and  clapping  their  hands.  Garita  told  her 
mother  she  thought  they  were  old  enough  to  take  care 
of  themselves.  When  questioned,  Uno  said  they  had  a 
lovely  time,  but  she  would  not  go  next  Saint  Patrick's 
day.  Dona  kissed  them  as  she  said  they  had  been 
naughty  girls,  but  she  was  thankful  they  were  not 
trampled  on. 

Another  day  they  felt  they  were  old  enough  to  dis- 
tribute tracts  among  the  poor,  and  helped  themselves 
from  a  pile  that  had  been  left  at  the  house.  They 
could  read  quite  well.  While  the  nurses  were  prepar- 
ing to  take  them  out  they  escaped,  took  a  back  street, 
and  were  soon  near  the  water  where  a  good  many  poor 
people  lived.  They  could  both  speak  Spanish  and 
English,  and  attracted  a  good  deal  of  attention,  as 
many  knew  who  they  were,  and  thanked  them  for  their 
tracts.  Finally  they  sat  down  on  a  doorstep  to  talk 
with  a  pretty  child.  The  neighbors  called  to  them  to 
come  away,  for  they  had  smallpox  there.  Uno  said  they 
had  no  more  tracts,  and  kept  on  talking.  They  saw 
the  nurses  coming  all  out  of  breath,  as  they  had  been 
told  by  the  neighbors  of  the  smallpox  case.  Dona  was 
very  much  excited,  and  sent  for  their  physician,  and 


30  Uno  Who. 

precautions  were  taken  to  prevent  the  disease.  They 
were  severely  lectured  this  time,  Garita  saying  she 
would  never  distribute  tracts  again.  Uno  said:  "I 
will,  for  I  am  going  to  be  a  missionary,  work  for  the 
Master,  who  says, '  Go  into  all  the  world  and  preach  the 
gospel,'  but  I  will  never  worry  Dona  again,"  and  she 
kept  her  word. 


Uno  Who.  31 


-.  ,      CHAPTER  II. 

IN  THE  QUICK  FORGE  AXD  WORKHOUSE  OF  THOUGHT. 

THE  next  year  Don  Pamphilo  took  his  family  abroad. 
Osceola,  with  Paulo  and  Alberto,  were  still  wanderers, 
and  they  did  not  see  them.  After  three  years  Osceola 
and  Alberto  returned  with  Flora  and  her  two  children. 
There  were  great  preparations  for  their  reception;  the 
beautiful  grounds  were  made  more  beautiful ;  the  finest 
horses  were  brought  from  the  plantations;  the  houses 
were  thronged  with  visitors  who,  in  true  Southern 
style,  showed  their  hospitality  and  good  feeling.  Aunt 
Thetis  was  on  the  warpath.  "  I  can  do  more  work  in  a 
day  than  these  shiftless  negroes  can  in  a  week;  they  do 
wear  my  patience  threadbare,"  and  she  made  the  bunch 
of  keys  that  hung  over  her  spotless  white  apron  rattle 
as  she  went  from  room  to  room.  She  would  now  wear 
her  gold-bowed  spectacles  every  day,  and  had  some 
dainty  little  caps  made,  asking  Wewe  if  they  were  be- 
coming. "  It  is  a  poor  house  that  cannot  afford  one 
lady/'  Wewe  pretended  not  to  see  the  servants  showing 
the  whites  of  their  eyes  at  this  remark.  She  had 
learned  to  take  Meno's  advice :  "  Give  thy  thoughts  no 
tongue." 

Uno  told  her  father  she  felt  as  though  she  had  been 


32  Uno  Who. 

in  dreamland  during  his  absence,  and  had  suddenly 
awakened  to  find  herself  a  woman.  Osceola  was  greatly 
interested  in  the  sage  remarks  of  this  child. 

A  year  soon  passes  in  a  large  family.  They  seem  to 
have  only  gotten  ready  for  one  season  before  another  is 
upon  them.  Mary  Dee,  whom  Dona  had  brought  from 
England,  was  no  longer  young,  and  Dona  called  upon 
Meno  to  assist  her  in  many  ways.  The  children  would, 
in  another  year,  be  taken  to  England,  then  Meno  could 
devote  herself  to  the  family,  and  look  after  Dona's 
charities,  so  without  saying  anything,  and  with  a  great 
deal  of  tact,  she  worked  Meno  into  Mary  Dee's  place 
without  offending  her  dignity,  and  she  would  still  have 
a  home  at  "  Sunnyside."  The  children  were  very  much 
attached  to  Meno.  She  seemed  woven  into  their  young 
lives,  and  to  her  it  was  like  parting  with  her  other  self. 
She  smiled  sadly  when  Uno  told  her  they  would  live 
together  upon  her  return  from  school,  and  "  I  will 
take  you  to  Spain,  and  that  will  please  my  mother  in 
her  far  away  home  called  Heaven." 

She  quietly  listened  to  Uno,  then  putting  her  arm 
about  her,  said :  "  My  dear  child,  you  cannot  imagine 
how  I  will  miss  you." 

Uno  was  surprised  to  see  tears  in  the  eyes  of  that 
cold,  dignified  woman;  hers  seemed  like  a  heart  whose 
hopes  are  buried,  and  when  Uno  said :  "  What  shall  I 
tell  Paulo  for  you,  and  will  you  not  send  him  a  kiss  ?  " 

"Hush,  hush,  my  dear,  not  for  the  world  will  you 
say  that  to  him." 


Uno  Who.  33 

"  Why,  Meno,  do  you  not  love  my  brother  ?  " 

Child  as  she  was,  she  could  not  but  observe  the  deep 
flush  that  crimsoned  her  cheeks,  and  thinking  her  of- 
fended, she  said  no  more. 

Dona's  mother,  who  had  been  sick  a  long  time,  died 
eoon  after  their  arrival  in  England,  and,  at  their  urg- 
ent request,  she  spent  a  year  with  her  aged  father  and 
Lady  Margaret. 

Don  Pamphilo  then  went  to  Spain  that  Elaine  might 
visit  with  his  relatives.  She  was  very  like  her  father 
in  looks  and  manner,  tall  and  graceful,  a  lovely  com- 
plexion, black  hair  and  an  abundance  of  it.  She  and 
Garita  had  their  father's  large  brown  eyes.  There  was 
no  end  of  matchmaking,  but  her  mother  soon  found 
she  was  not  heartwhole  or  fancy  free,  and  that  Lord 
Ayliffe  was  Lady  Margaret's  choice  among  all  her  ad- 
mirers. 

Garita  and  Uno  went  to  Lord  Oughton's  Friday 
afternoons  and  remained  until  Monday.  It  was  a 
lovely  April  day,  near  the  close  of  the  month,  and  they 
had  been  out  driving.  The  evening  was  cool,  and  the 
family  had  gathered  in  the  large  library ;  the  andirons 
stood  out  like  sentinels  guarding  the  wood  fire  as  it 
snapped  and  crackled  in  the  open  fireplace.  At  one  side 
sat  Lord  Oughton  in  a  large  arm-chair.  He  was  very 
feeble.  His  hand  looked  pale  and  thin  as  he,  at  inter- 
vals, leaned  over  to  stroke  a  large  cat  that  lay  on  a 
cushion  at  his  feet.  As  Dona  sat  down  beside  him, 
laying  her  hand  on  the  arm  of  his  chair,  she  said: 
3 


34  Uno  Who. 

"  Father,  this  room  seems  like  home ;  I  tried  to  have 
our  own  library  as  near  like  it  as  possible,  and  I  think 
I  have  succeeded." 

"  My  child,  I  was  just  wondering  how  many  years  it 
is  since  we  we  were  seated  in  this  room  talking  of  your 
going  to  America;  I  well  remember  that  conversation. 
It  was  the  first  we  thought  Don  Pamphilo  serious  in 
wishing  to  take  you  there.  During  this  visit  I  have 
had  time  to  recall  the  past;  where  so  much  is  crowded 
into  a  little  time,  one  does  not  get  an  opportunity  to 
give  expression  to  his  thoughts,  if  he  have  any."  He 
then  suddenly  said,  as  if  it  had  just  come  to  his  mind : 
"Pamphilo,  what  about  that  old  Indian?  Did  he  not 
tell  you  you  were  a  brave  and  would  lay  down  your 
arms,  and  settle  in  a  new  country  ?  " 

"  Lord  Oughton,  that  is  just  what  he  said,  and  Dona 
laughed  with  tears  in  her  eyes  when  old  You-Know- 
Who  told  her  she  would  not  go  back  to  England  to 
live.  My  wife  is  very  modest;  she  has  never  told  how 
she  became  the  wonder  and  admiration  of  the  dark- 
eyed  race.  To  them  she  was  pale  as  a  wordless  grief, 
and  in  their  kindness  was  mingled  a  sort  of  pity.  I 
have  often  thought  of  Margaret's  exclamation,  '  Just 
think  of  Mary  going  to  church  in  a  schoolhouse.' " 

"  We  have  a  beautiful  church  now,"  said  Dona,  "  but 
I  do  not  think  I  ever  had  anything  give  me  more  real 
pleasure  than  the  money  for  that  little  church." 

Uno  .was  very  much  interested  at  the  mention  of  her 
grandfather's  name;  she  and  Garita  had  heard  the 


Uno  Who.  35 

story  of  the  prophecy  from  Nannette,  who  was  the  daugh- 
ter of  Dona's  maid,  and  she  knew  the  family  history. 
The  conversation  was  interrupted  when  Lord  Ayliffe 
was  announced,  and  the  girls  retired  to  a  remote  part 
of  the  room  to  discuss  Elaine's  approaching  marriage, 
which  had  been  postponed  by  the  sudden  death  of  the 
aged  Marquis  of  Floraine.  Garita  was  her  only  brides- 
maid. The  pretty  child  had  developed  into  a  very 
beautiful  young  woman;  she  was  tall  and  very  slight, 
had  her  mother's  pink  and  white  complexion,  soft  wavy 
hair  with  a  tinge  of  gold,  and  her  father's  large  brown 
eyes,  those  dreamy,  liquid  eyes  that  seem  ever  looking 
for  something  beyond.  The  bride  was  beautiful,  but 
Garita's  beauty  seemed  for  the  first  time  to  dawn  upon 
their  many  friends.  As  a  schoolgirl,  little  attention 
had  been  paid  to  her;  they  knew  she  had  a  fine  voice, 
which  was  being  carefully  cultivated,  and  a  talent 
which  brought  her  into  prominence  in  the  school  was 
her  reading  and  reciting.  Uno  had  the  greatest  ad- 
miration for  her,  watching  over  her  with  jealous  care. 

Don  and  Dona  returned  to  their  home  in  Florida,  ac- 
companied by  his  sister  and  her  son,  Captain  Fran- 
cisco de  Aldana,  who  would  spend  the  winter  with 
them.  They  found  Col.  Sebastian  and  wife  prostrated 
with  grief;  their  son  and  daughter,  with  her  husband 
and  child,  were  on  a  steamer  that  had  been  lost  at  sea. 
In  a  most  miraculous  way  the  little  girl  had  been  saved, 
and  was  at  her  grandfather's. 

Osceola  had  taken  Wewc  to  Havana,  where  she  was 


36  Uno  Who. 

employed  as  governess  to  the  young  children  of  his 
wife's  sister;  she  would  not  remain  in  the  house  where 
Seminole  was  to  be  mistress.  Meno  and  Seminole  be- 
came fast  friends ;  with  a  great  deal  of  tact  she  helped 
Thetis  to  overlook,  what  she  called,  Seminole's  airs, 
and  when  she  was  not  of  enough  consequence  to  suit 
her  dignity  at  "  Sunnyside,"  she  artfully  managed  to 
have  Aunt  Thetis  sent  to  Cuba,  and  she  became  Semi- 
nole's companion  and  friend.  The  sunbeam  pene- 
trated "The  Shadows,"  and  they  passed  a  very  gay 
winter,  Captain  de  Aldana  contributing  to  their  pleas- 
ure. There  were  two  of  Osceola's  children  whom  he 
felt  had  been  neglected,  Marie  and  Ola.  The  former 
was  constantly  at  the  convent,  painting  and  studying; 
the  latter  would  not  go  there,  for  they  lectured  her. 
She  had  a  fine  voice,  and  she  informed  them  she  would 
be  an  opera  singer,  that  she  was  going  on  the  stage, 
and  she  was  always  dressing  and  acting  by  herself, 
much  to  the  disgust  of  the  family.  Osceola  sent  them 
North  to  pursue  their  studies,  trusting  to  Marie's  re- 
straining influence  over  Ola. 

In  the  spring  Lord  Oughton  had  his  son  come  to 
the  ancestral  home  to  live.  He  was  a  widower  with 
two  children.  Philip  Oughton  was  a  distinguished- 
looking  man,  and  very  popular,  so  the  house  once  more 
resumed  something  of  its  old-time  hospitality.  His 
sister,  Elsbeth,  was  a  very  plain,  unassuming  girl, 
with  a  most  charming  manner.  This  was  the  last  year 
of  school  for  Garita  and  Uno,  and  Elsbeth  Oughton 


Uno  Who.  37 

was  anticipating  the  pleasure  of  introducing  her  beau- 
tiful cousin  in  society.  Uno  was  in  one  sense  the 
adopted  child  of  their  sister,  but  what  would  be  her 
position  in  this  family  where  ancestry  was  everything? 
How  would  they  feel  about  introducing  an  Indian 
girl,  as  she  was  in  every  feature,  was  a  question  with 
Uno.  She  was  tall,  had  a  fine  figure  and  carried  her- 
self in  a  royal  manner.  She  had  a  full  black  eye  and 
straight,  black  hair;  her  redeeming  features  being  her 
mouth  and  lips,  and  she  well  knew  how  to  show  off  her 
beautiful  teeth.  She  seemed  always  preparing  for 
coming  events.  In  a  most  dignified  manner,  she  told 
Lady  Margaret  that  now  the  school  days  were  over,  she 
would  go  to  Spain  and  remain  with  her  sister  until 
time  for  her  to  return  to  her  father.  Lady  Margaret 
said :  "  Uno,  I  understand  your  feelings  perfectly,  but 
you  are  my  guest,  and  I  do  not  wish  you  to  leave  me." 

Uno  knew  there  was  no  deception  in  that  woman; 
the  family's  position  in  life  had  placed  them  where  it 
was  not  necessary  to  cultivate  those  traits  of  character, 
and  she  felt  herself  a  fortunate  girl  to  have  the  in- 
fluence of  such  people  thrown  about  her,  and  they  were 
unconsciously  preparing  her  for  her  life's  work.  She 
would  prove  herself  worthy  of  their  friendship. 

It  was  a  few  days  before  Christmas,  and  a  cold,  blus- 
tering storm  made  Lady  Margaret's  morning  room 
look  very  inviting.  She  said :  "  Come,  girls,  this  is  a 
good  day  to  work;  it  would  be  very  urgent  business 
that  would  take  any  one  out  in  this  storm,  and  we  are 

449015 


38  Uno  Who. 

not  in  danger  of  being  interrupted.  We  will  first  read 
our  letters,  then  Uno  can  tell  us  about  Seminole's 
wedding." 

They  worked  and  talked,  Lady  Margaret  wishing  to 
know  who  the  family  was  into  which  Seminole  had 
married.  When  told  that  his  father  was  a  captain  in 
the  Spanish  navy  and  a  friend  of  Don  Pamphilo's  and 
that  some  of  his  family  were  titled  people,  she  was 
satisfied. 

Garita  said :  "  Aunt  Margaret,  where  did  my  father 
first  meet  my  mother  ?  " 

"  In  Seville,"  was  her  reply.  "  My  mother  was  quite 
delicate,  and  we  often  spent  our  winters  there.  The 
Marquis  of  Floraine,  who  was  at  his  villa,  was  an  old 
friend  of  my  father.  You  will  never  know  how  dread- 
fully we  felt  when  your  father  took  that  beautiful 
woman  to  live  among  Indians.  It  was  only  after  visit- 
ing her  that  we  became  reconciled." 

The  winter  passed  very  quickly,  and  the  spring 
brought  Don  and  Dona  to  England.  Lady  Margaret 
laughingly  told  them  she  had  come  to  an  end  of  her 
matchmaking,  for  she  had  never  known  three  such  in- 
different girls  as  had  graced  her  home  the  past  year. 
"  I  had  a  most  desirable  match  for  Uno,  and  thought 
at  one  time  she  would  accept  -him.  I  still  think  her 
undecided.  Elsbeth,  I  think,  will  be  a  second  Aunt 
Margaret.  In  regard  to  Garita,  I  have  left  her  to 
you,  but  I  do  hope  she  won't  marry  an  American;  I 
wish  she  was  going  to  remain  with  me." 


Uno  Who.  39 

Had  Lady  Margaret  told  the  true  state  of  her  mind, 
which  she  did  not  like  to  admit  even  to  herself,  it  would 
have  been  that,  if  there  was  anything  in  that  prophecy, 
she  did  not  want  the  responsibility  of  its  being  her 
work. 

They  went  to  Spain  and  spent  the  winter  with  the 
Marquis  of  Floraine.  Uno  improved  the  opportunity 
of  getting  an  idea  of  her  life's  work.  She  told  her  sis- 
ters there  was  plenty  of  work  where  she  could  have  her 
freedom  and  enjoy  this  beautiful  world,  and  she  thought 
Burnedita  was  making  a  mistake  if  she  became  a  nun, 
as  Mercedes  wished  her  to. 

Then,  hearing  that  Ola  was  studying  for  the  stage, 
she  said :  "  Perhaps  you  have  chosen  the  better  part." 

It  was  a  great  disappointment  that  she  could  not  sec 
her  brother,  who  was  away  with  his  regiment. 

Upon  their  return  to  Florida,  Osceola  asked  his 
daughter  if  she  was  not  going  home,  to  which  Dona  re- 
plied :  "  Yes,  with  me." 

Uno  had  not  thought  of  any  other  home  than  "  Sun- 
nyside,"  and  would  have  been  unhappy  out  of  the  at- 
mosphere in  which  she  had  been  living.  She  went 
away  a  child,  and  had  returned  with  a  woman's 
thoughts  and  feelings.  There  was  a  change  in  every- 
thing, animate  and  inanimate,  and  she  felt  like  getting 
some  of  the  people  out  of  the  rut  in  which  they  had 
been  living,  and  for  the  first  time  she  realized  the  great 
blessing  that  had  been  bestowed  upon  her. 

At  the  Saratoga  cottage  that  summer  she  met,  for  the 


40  Uno  Who. 

first  time  in  years,  her  sisters  Ola  and  Marie ;  she  had 
from  time  to  time  received  graphic  accounts  of  the  stage 
Ola  had  in  the  top  of  the  house,  of  Uncle  Jake  playing 
the  violin  for  her  to  dance,  and  his  daughter  being  em- 
ployed as  her  dressmaker  -and  maid.  To  this  Thetis 
objected,  but  was  cautious  how  she  interfered  with 
the  high-spirited  girl,  who  was  called  the  wayward 
child.  After  acting  and  singing  for  her  father  several 
times,  he  discovered  she  was  possessed  of  more  than 
ordinary  talent.  He  gave  Dina  to  her,  and  told  Uncle 
Jake  to  obey  her  commands.  He  told  Marie  she  must 
cease  her  religious  acting  in  the  presence  of  Ola,  and 
not  treat  her  as  if  she  was  afraid  of  being  contami- 
nated. She  was  already  estranged  from  the  family  at 
"  Sunnyside,"  Dona  feeling  it  her  duty  to  tell  her  she 
did  not  approve  of  the  stage,  and  she  hoped  she  would 
turn  her  talents  to  better  account.  It  was  this  state  of 
affairs  that  made  Osceola  tell  Marie  if  she  loved  her 
sister,  as  she  professed  to,  she  must  go  with  her  as  her 
companion  and  friend.  He  knew  that  such  talent  as 
she  possessed  would  not  bear  curbing,  and  that  he  must 
gain  the  confidence  of  that  proud,  unbending  spirit. 
There  was  a  little  restraint  on  the  part  of  Ola  on  meet- 
ing Uno,  who,  she  felt,  had  been  prejudiced  against 
her  by  the  de  Gomoras,  but  it  soon  wore  away,  and  they 
were  fast  friends.  Garita  pronounced  her  the  flower 
of  the  Who  family.  There  was  a  fascination  in  her 
dusky  beauty  and  commanding  presence.  Her  friends 
felt  perfect  confidence  in  her  ability  to  accomplish 


Uno  Who.  41 

whatever  she  undertook,  for  firmness  and  decision  were 
her  strong  characteristics. 

At  the  de  Gomora  cottage  was  the  eldest  son  of  the 
Marquis  of  Floraine,  Don  Alfonso,  also  Philip  Ough- 
ton  and  his  sister,  Elsbeth.  Uno  had  gone  to  her 
father's  cottage  that  she  might  better  cultivate  a  happier 
state  of  feeling  with  her  sisters.  She  was  devoted  to 
Ola,  and,  accompanied  by  their  father,  they  became 
noted  horseback  riders;  in  this  they  were  often  joined 
by  Don  Alfonso  and  Philip  Oughton.  At  a  ball  given 
at  one  of  the  large  hotels,  Garita  and  Ola  were  dancing 
with  their  respective  fathers.  On  the  sides  were  Uno 
and  Don  Alfonso,  her  consin  Mercedita  and  Philip 
Oughton.  Dona  sat  looking  intently  at  the  dancing. 
Suddenly  her  eyes  became  riveted  on  Garita  and  Ola; 
they  were  the  center  of  attraction  to  all  around  them, 
so  beautiful  and  so  unlike;  Garita,  gentle  and  cling- 
ing, her  very  clothes  seemed  trying  to  keep  her  from 
contact  with  others  as  they  fell  in  soft,  beautiful  folds 
about  her  tall,  slight  figure.  Ola's  bristled  with  inde-^ 
pendence ;  her  large,  black  eyes  were  ever  on  the  alert ; 
her  proud  and  imperious  manner  as  she  took  Garita's 
hand  in  the  dance  caused  the  anxious  look  of  Dona. 

That  evening  Don  Pamphilo  met  an  old  friend  from 
Boston.  He  was  accompanied  by  his  wife  and  daugh- 
ter; the  former  was  not  well,  and  they  had  come  to 
the  land  of  many  waters  on  her  account.  Dona  was 
pleased  to  see  Mrs.  Ayling,  with  whom  she  had  a  slight 
acquaintance,  and  before  the  season  was  over  their 


42  Uno  Who. 

daughters  had  become  friends.  Osceola  had  given  his 
consent  that  Ola  should  go  to  Paris  and  study  for  the 
stage;  she  must  go  to  Madrid  and  get  the  consent  of 
her  brother,  which,  he  told  her,  she  must  use  a  great 
deal  of  tact  in  obtaining;  that  she  would  meet  with 
opposition  from  her  sisters;  that  the  Marquis  of 
Floraine  was  a  great  admirer  of  Mercedes,  and  he  had 
no  doubt  but  that  she  would  be  made  Mother  Superior 
of  the  convent  in  Cuba  towards  which  he  was  con- 
tributing so  generously,  and  he  did  not  wish  her  to 
carry  her  feeling  of  resentment  of  the  de  Gomoras 
into  Spain.  She  might  need  their  influence  at  some 
future  time.  "  Don  Alfonso  is  your  brother's  friend, 
and  as  such  he  has  shown  you  marked  attention.  Be 
discreet,  and  do  not  talk  of  the  stage  to  him,  or  to  any 
one." 

"  I  think,  father,"  said  Marie,  "  that  before  we  reach 
Madrid  there  will  be  a  great  deal  of  acting  over  a  game 
of  hearts." 

"  My  daughter,  we  are  not  titled  people,  and  Ola 
would  lose  the  game." 

After  the  party  had  sailed  for  England,  Uno  ac- 
cepted Dona's  invitation  to  accompany  them  to  Boston, 
where,  at  Mrs.  Ayling's .  urgent  request,  they  would 
spend  the  remainder  of  the  lovely  October  days,  which 
the  middle  of  November  found  them  still  enjoying. 

Maud  Ayling  was  a  charming  girl.  She  had  a 
brother  younger  than  herself,  which  they  supposed  con- 
stituted the  members  of  the  family  until,  at  an  evening 


Uno  Who.  43 

reception,  they  were  introduced  to  Mr.  Ross,  an 
adopted  son.  He  was  tall  and  handsome,  with  black 
eyes  and  hair,  and  of  very  pleasing  manners.  Garita 
looked  very  beautiful  in  her  evening  dress,  and  he  was 
devoted  to  her;  from  that  time  on  he  was  always  pres- 
ent. They  were  receiving  so  much  attention  that  it 
was  not  observed  by  any  one  but  Uno,  to  whom  the 
alarm  was  sounded  the  first  evening. 

Garita  could  not  understand  why  Uno  did  not  appear 
pleased  when  she  informed  her  that  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Ayling  and  Maud  were  coming  South  in  January,  and 
she  wondered  why  she  did  not  enter  into  the  spirit  of 
the  arrangement  made  to  entertain  them.  Uno  wisely 
kept  her  own  counsel,  and  was  not  surprised  when  they 
came  accompanied  by  their  son  Walter  and  Mr.  Ross, 
who  was  to  assist  Mr.  Ayling  in  some  investments  he 
wished  to  make. 

Mercedita  de  Felipe  was  visiting  her  cousin,  Semi- 
nole,  at  "  The  Shadows/'  When  inviting  the  party  of 
young  people  to  join  her  upon  her  return  to  Havana, 
she  quietly  remarked  to  Mr.  Ross  that  she  feared  they 
would  be  deprived  of  his  company  as  he  was  a  man  of 
affairs.  He  quickly  replied :  "  They  are  not  so  pressing 
that  I  will  deprive  myself  of  this  great  pleasure." 

Maud  Ayling,  who  was  very  demonstrative  upon  this 
occasion,  for  a  Boston  girl,  said  :  "  Oh  !  We  could 
not  get  along  without  Mr.  Ross/' 

Uno,  who  had  been  a  quiet  listener,  then  said  with 
a  bit  of  irony  in  her  tone:  "Perhaps,  Mr.  Ross,  you 


44  Uno  Who. 

think  this  might  be  a  tide  in  your  affairs  that  will  lead 
on  to  fortune." 

His  eyes  flashed  as  he  replied :  "  It  would  not  be 
difficult  for  a  hunter  to  choose  even  among  so  many/' 
and  with  his  sweetest  •  smile  he  looked  at  Garita,  in 
whose  big  brown  eyes  he  only  saw  that  far-away  look. 

In  Havana,  Mr.  Ross  made  a  favorable  impression. 
Cobre  and  Diego  thought  him  a  fine  fellow,  but  Alberto 
looked  with  jealous  eyes  upon  his  attention  to  his  sister. 

The  enervating  effect  of  the  early  spring  upon  Mrs. 
Ayling  caused  them  to  leave  for  home  sooner  than  they 
had  intended.  Maud  gave  Garita  a  pressing  invitation 
to  spend  a  portion  of  the  summer  at.  their  Newport 
cottage. 

Osceola's  letters  from  Ola  were  very  satisfactory. 
She  and  Marie  were  so  happy  with  Paulo  and  their 
sisters  that  they  had  not  talked  business  until  after 
the  holidays;  then  Marie  wrote  that  the  first  scene  in 
the  stage  war  had  been  acted;  it  was  a  feast  of  reason, 
Ola  being  very  cautious  not  to  offend  her  stern,  dig- 
nified brother,  the  first  person  she  had  seen  her  stand 
in  awe  of.  In  the  second  scene  he  held  out  every  in- 
ducement of  society  and  travel  that  he  could  give  her; 
she  should  see  the  finest  acting  the  world  produced, 
but  he  did  not  wish  his  sister  to  take  part.  It  ended 
in  her  saying  she  would  consider.  In  the  third  scene 
she  asked  him  to  go  to  Paris  with  her,  and  give  her  the 
protection  his  position  would  command.  He  did  not 
speak  at  first,  then  he  said:  "My  dear  sister,  I  have 


Uno  Who.  45 

offered  you  my  protection,  but  you  think  you  will  love 
ft  public  life  better  than  you  do  me;  you  do  not  know 
the  snares  and  temptations  that  surround  a  young  and 
beautiful  woman  in  gay  Paris." 

"  But,  Paulo,  I.  will  have  Marie  and  our  maids,  and 
you  will  come  to  see  me  sometimes." 

He  said:  "  Oh,  Ola,  why  will  you  be  so  persistent?" 
and  he  left  the  house  looking  very  troubled. 

She  did  not  see  him  again  for  a  week.  Then  the 
fourth  scene  was  a  stormy  one.  She  told  him  she  would 
go  on  the  stage  if  every  friend  she  had  deserted  her, 
and  she  would  make  her  family  a's  proud  of  her  as  they 
were  of  him  and  Mercedes.  What  would  her  tact  and 
executive  ability  amount  to  in  the  position  she  occupies 
if  she  were  not  an  actress?  She  knows  how  to  use  her 
beautiful  eye,  and  every  motion  has  been  studied  as 
well  as  my  soldier  brother  has  been  taught  to  act  his 
part.  "  To  me,  Mercedes'  religion  seems  like  mockery," 
she  concluded. 

"  Ola,  it  was  our  mother's  religion." 

"Yes,  Paulo,  but  I  worship  the  Great  Spirit  of  our 
fatliers;  I  have  a  guardian  angel  that  will  keep  me  in 
all  my  ways,  and  it  has  promised  me  my  brother's  pro- 
tection." 

They  were  standing,  and  she  proved  herself  a  trage- 
dienne when  she  said:  "Paulo,  Paulo,  you  cannot  re- 
fuse me,"  and  putting  her  arm  about  his  neck  with 
her  head  upon  his  shoulder,  shed  real  tears. 

He  kissed  her  as  he  said:  "Mv  sister  has  won  her 


46  Uno  Who. 

case,  and  I  will  give  the  dusky  beauty  my  protec- 
tion." 

"Paulo,  that  will  be  my  stage  name,  'The  Dusky 
Beauty/  " 

Osceola  was  not  surprised  when  he  heard  that  Paulo 
had  gone  to  Paris  with  them  and  arranged  for  Ola's 
instruction;  that  Marie  was  going  to  the  convent  for 
her  painting  lessons  that  she  might  devote  a  portion 
of  her  time  to  the  religious  life  she  preferred  to  the 
one  in  which  she  lived  at  their  apartments,  where  Ola 
was  learning  among  other  things  that  knowledge  and 
experience  were  excellent  ingredients  for  a  public  char- 
acter. 


Uno  Who.  47 


CHAPTER  III. 

"  A  little*  bitter  mingled  in  our  cup 
Leaves  no  relish  of  the  sweet." 

QUIET  reigned  once  more  at  "  Sunnyside  " ;  the  fam- 
ily had  entered  upon  their  church  work  for  the  lenten 
season  with  more  than  ordinary  interest.  Garita's  fine 
voice  was  in  great  demand;  Uno  accompanied  her  upon 
the  harp  when  they  were  called  upon  to  give  enter- 
tainments for  charity.  They  went  to  Georgia  to  visit 
Pamphilo,  and  all  attended  the  wedding  of  Alberto, 
who  had  settled  in  Alabama.  With  Uno  there  was  a 
marked  indifference  to  everything;  she  went  about  the 
work  the  Eev.  Father  gave  her  to  do,  but  her  heart 
seemed  not  in  it.  She  often  took  long  horseback  rides 
with  her  father,  to  whom  she  was  devotedly  attached, 
and  they  often  stopped  at  Col.  Sebastian's,  who  was 
now  confined  to  his  house.  Uno  took  a  great  interest 
in  his  daughter,  Isla,  who  seemed  very  helpless  in  the 
management  of  their  home.  She  had  a  son  about  five 
years  of  age,  a  bright  and  handsome  boy.  but  disagree- 
able from  want  of  discipline.  Her  husband  pretended 
to  look  after  their  affairs,  but  it  did  not  take  a  very 
close  observer  to  see  a  great  change  since  the  mother's 
death.  Upon  one  occasion  he  requested  that  Uno 
should  come  and  remain  a  few  days;  he  wished  to  talk 


48  Uno  Who. 

to  her  about  his  granddaughter,  Isla  Manrique,  who 
was  with  Mercedes  at  the  convent  in  Madrid. 

There  were  few  attractions  now  at  the  beautiful 
home  of  Col.  Sebastian  where  the  gay  and  fashionable 
world  had  so  often  been  entertained. 

Upon  her  return  Uno  told  Don  Pamphilo  that  the 
Colonel  was  not  so  well.  The  next  day,  at  -the  close 
of  a  lovely  afternoon,  he  drove  on  the  shell  road  with 
Dona  and  Garita  to  pay  the  family  a  visit  and  leave 
Uno  with  them.  She  found  the  Colonel  suffering  from 
insomnia.  They  talked  until  after  midnight;  he  gave 
her  Mercedes'  letters  to  read  ;  she  wrote  that  his  grand- 
daughter had  a  decided  talent  for  painting,  but  that 
the  child  was  very  unhappy  in  the  convent.  He  told 
her  of  his  boyhood  home  in  Spain,  and  many  things 
he  wished  her  to  remember  to  tell  the  child  when  she 
was  old  enough. 

After  Uno  had  retired  to  her  room,  she  heard  the 
Colonel  walking  up  and  down  the  piazza  for  some  time ; 
then  the  servants  closed  the  blinds  and  all  was  quiet. 

She  sat  thinking  over  the  letters  and  conversation, 
when  there  was  a  crash  down-stairs ;  she  found  that  the 
Colonel  in  his  restless  wandering  had  overturned  a 
lamp;  the  servants  were  putting  out  the  fire,  and  Isla 
giving  her  father  a  lecture. 

Uno  upon  lying  down  felt  something  pricking  in 
her  bed;  she  got  up  to  investigate,  and  found,  upon 
pressing  on  the  mattress,  two  or  three  needles.  She 
again  tried  to  rest  her  weary  head,  but  when  she  laid 


Uno  Who.  49 

it  upon  the  pillow  she  was  again  pricked,  and  again  in- 
vestigating, she  found  the  needles  so  numerous  that  she 
folded  some  of  her  garments  for  a  pillow,  fearing  the 
point  of  one  might  break  off  while  she  was  asleep;  she 
found  the  floor  strewn  with  pins.  She  got  in  bed  once 
more,  and  when  she  put  her  feet  down  she  started  up, 
thankful  that  she  had  not  put  out  the  light ;  what  were 
those  cold,  hard  things?  She  was  afraid  to  look.  The 
maid  had  informed  her  that  Senora  thought  she  had 
better  occupy  this  room,  as  the  ones  over  the  drawing- 
room  and  across  the  hall  were  thought  to  be  haunted. 
She  did  not  pay  any  attention  to  the  girl's  talk,  for  if 
a  ghost  should  appear  to  her  she  would  think  that  it 
was  on  business,  and  why  be  afraid? 

After  this  experience,  she  remembered  hearing  about 
the  rooms  being  haunted  since  Senora  Sebastian  died. 
She  sat  down  in  an  arm-chair,  thinking,  "Where  shall 
I  lay  my  weary  head  ? "  Again  it  came  to  her  that 
guests  who  had  visited  there  had  heard  and  seen  strange 
things.  She  thought,  "  How  foolish ;  I  will  go  in  these 
rooms;  ghosts  don't  have  needles  and  pins  anyway, 
but  before  I  go  I  will  see  what  those  cold  hard  things 
were,  they  may  get  away."  To  her  great  surprise,  she 
found  three  bottles  of  whiskey,  and  thought  this  a  new 
way  of  treating  one's  friends,  feet  first.  She  was  not 
afraid  of  the  whiskey,  so  long  as  the  corks  kept  in,  but 
she  could  not  trust  her  feet,  and  thinking  that,  perhaps, 
there  were  only  whiskey  ghosts  after  all,  she  would  try 
the  other  rooms. 
4 


50  Uno  Who. 

She  opened  the  first  door  and  looked  in;  it  smelled 
like  a'deadhouse.  She  walked  in,  lamp  in  hand;  the 
windows  were  open,  the  rooms  beautifully  furnished. 
In  a  room  beyond,  the  moonlight  was  streaming  in, 
but  somehow  she  felt  cold;  everything  looked  so  weird. 
She  went  down  to  where  Isla  was  sleeping,  and  told  her 
she  could  not  sleep  up-stairs  alone,  so  a  maid  was  sent 
to  sleep  on  a  couch  near  her  in  one  of  the  haunted 
rooms.  The  next  morning  Isla  said  she  had  put  the 
whiskey  there  to  keep  it  away  from  her  father;  it  had 
been  brought  to  him  by  friends,  that  she  had  used  that 
room  for  sewing  and  the  pillows  for  needles,  when 
nothing  better  presented  itself. 

The  next  day  Col.  Sebastian  talked  about  his  grand- 
daughter; she  was  a  source  of  great  anxiety  to  him; 
should  she  remain  in  the  convent,  or  where  should  she 
go  upon  leaving  there  ?  He  was  going  to  make  Don 
Pamphilo  her  guardian,  and  he  wished  Dona  would 
take  her  to  her  home. 

Isla  said :  "  Father,  why  don't  you  leave  her  to  me  ?  " 
to  which  he  replied :  "  I  don't  think  you  are  the  proper 
person;  Dona  had  a  loving  care  for  Uno  and  her  sis- 
ters. I  hope  she  will  be  a  mother  to  my  grandchild, 
and  that  you,  Uno,  will  always  be  interested  in  her 
welfare.  For  some  unaccountable  reason,  her  father's 
only  sister  has  never  taken  an  interest  in  her.  His 
mother,  who  was  an  invalid  at  the  time  he  was  lost, 
never  recovered  from  the  shock,  and  was  not  living 
when  I  took  Isla  to  Madrid.  At  least,  I  was  told  so. 


Uno  Who.  51 

I  did  not  see  any  of  the  family,  but  Mercedes  writes  me 
that  her  aunt  has  been  to  see  Isla  and  invited  her  to 
her  house,  and  asked  my  consent  in  regard  to  the  visit. 
I  have  written  to  let  her  go,  but  only  to  spend  the  day. 
The  grandmother  was  very  fond  of  Isla,  her  only  son's 
child,  but  she  never  wrote  or  made  inquiry  in  regard 
to  her  except  through  this  daughter,  as  she  was  unable 
to  write  letters." 

Don  and  Dona  were  considering  what  Uno  told  them 
the  Colonel  said,  when  a  message  came  that  he  wished 
to  see  them.  They  relieved  his  mind  of  all  anxiety, 
and  with  Osceola  did  what  they  could  to  comfort  and 
cheer  his  last  days.  He  had  not  long  to  wait  for  the 
sleep  he  so  coveted. 

After  consulting  with  Osceola,  Don  Pamphilo  de- 
cided to  leave  Isla  in  the  convent,  trusting  to  Mercedes' 
judgment  in  regard  to  her  removal. 

Garita  was  anxious  to  have  her  come  to  them,  for  a 
young  girl  would  help  to  cheer  their  now  almost  de- 
serted home ;  "  And  there  will  still  be  a  young  lady  in 
the  family  when  you  marry,"  said  Uno;  "but  my 
mother  will  still  have  you  if  I  should  be  so  unwise  as 
to  leave  my  happy  home." 

a  Garita,  I  have  no  home.  My  work  -will  take  me 
every  place  that  duty  calls ;  I  am  to  follow  the  example 
of  the  Great  Master." 

"  Uno,  you  will  not  be  a  nun,  but  you  will  belong  to 
some  religious  order." 

"  Never,  never ;  I  must  have  my  freedom ;  yes,  glorjh 


52  Uno  Who. 

ous  freedom;  there  is  too  much  Indian  blood  in  me  to 
bear  restraint;  our  race  have  had  already  too  much  of 
being  told  where  they  must  go  and  what  they  must  do, 
of  being  driven  back  and  told  they  are  in  the  way  of 
civilization  and  progress.  I  cannot  see  my  way  clear  as 
yet;  I  am  waiting  developments.  Garita,  our  path  in 
life  has  been  very  smooth,  all  sunshine;  we  have  al- 
most arrived  where  the  brook  and  river  meet;  you  will 
follow  the  brook,  but  I  shall  take  the  river's  broad  ex- 
panse. For  many  years  you  will  follow  that  gliding 
stream  ere  you  reach  the  quicksands  of  life,  when  you 
find  that  each  step  sinks  deeper  and  deeper,  and  you  can 
see  no  way  out  and  are  in  danger  of  a  living  death; 
then  you  will  be  thankful  that  Uno  is  free,  can  cross 
that  river's  broad  expanse  and  come  to  thee." 

"Uno,  why  do  you  talk  thus?  Your  words  seem 
prophetic." 

"  Garita,  are  not  our  lives  prophetic  ?  " 

"Yes,  and  I  had  forgotten  to  tell  you  about  my  let- 
ter from  Maud  Ayling;  they  are  coming  to  Saratoga 
this  summer;  her  mother  needs  a  climatic  change,  so 
they  will  not  go  to  Newport,  and  father  has  given  up 
his  trip  abroad.  Now,  if  Paulo  would  come  and  bring 
Ola  and  Marie,  I  suppose  your  happiness  would  be 
complete.  I  am  sorry  you  don't  like  Maud,  as  I  am  so 
fond  of  her." 

"Garita,  I  like  Maud  as  well  as  I  would  like  any 
society  girl;  she  is  really  a  very  charming  girl,  but  how 


Uno  Who.  53 

well  she  tries  to  keep  you  from  meeting  this  Mr. 
Estaugh  she  is  so  in  love  with." 

Garita  laughed  as  she  said :  "  I  thought  that  was  my 
imagination;  we  will  see  if  he  comes  to  Saratoga  this 
summer  on  her  account.  His  family  has  a  beautiful 
cottage  at  Newport." 

"  Garita,  she  will  see  that  you  are  well  out  of  the  way 
before  she  lets  you  meet  Mr.  Estaugh." 

"  Uno,  what  do  you  mean  by  that  ?  " 

"Time  only  can  tell,  Garita,  but  I  will  not  choose 
the  longest  way  to  fate." 

The  first  of  June  found  Don  Pamphilo  and  his  fam- 
ily at  their  cottage  in  Saratoga;  there  were  Senor  de 
Felipe  and  Osceola,  with  their  families,  and,  with  Mr. 
Ayling,  they  were  prepared  for  a  gay  season. 

Seminole  had  taken  Meno  with  her,  as  she  had  now 
become  indispensable  to  her;  she  was  no  longer  the 
governess,  but  the  invited  friend,  and  as  such  she  took 
her  position.  Garita  was  surprised  when  she  saw  her 
on  familiar  terms  with  Maud,  but  she  still  treated  her 
with  the  polite  dignity  she  had  been  accustomed  to. 

When  Mr.  Ross  came,  she  seemed  undecided  what 
course  to  take;  this  did  not  escape  the  ever  watchful 
eye  of  Uno,  she  having  seen  undeveloped  traits  of  char- 
acter in  her  old  governess,  and  she  wondered  what  ob- 
ject she  could  have  in  wanting  Garita  to  marry  Mr. 
Ross,  or  in  helping  Maud.  That  she  did  not  like  the 
proud  de  Gomoras  was  nothing  new.  She  had  heard 
Maud  laugh  about  Mr.  Ross  being  so  madly  in  love, 


54  Uno  Who. 

and  heard  Uno  reply  that  Garita  was  accustomed  to 
that  sort  of  malady  in  men,  but  that  she  had  never 
known  hut  one  man  that  she  considered  good  enough 
for  Garita,  and  that  was  her  brother.  Maud  very 
sweetly  replied  that  she  hoped  some  time  to  have  the 
pleasure  of  meeting  him,  as  none  named  him  but  to 
praise. 

Uno  knew  that  Maud  was  working  in  the  interest  of 
Mr.  Boss,  but  what  could  she  say  or  do;  she  could  not 
suggest  such  a  thing  to  Dona,  and  she  went  to  her 
never-failing  source  of  comfort,  her  father.  He  saw  it 
all,  but  said  it  was  no  use  to  interfere;  Garita  had  her 
father,  mother  and  brothers;  the  less  she  said,  the 
happier  she  would  be  in  the  end,  and  the  more  confi- 
dence Garita  would  give  her.  She  quietly  submitted 
to  the  inevitable,  but  to  see  her  dearly  loved  friend  be- 
ing made  the  victim  of  a  fortune  hunter  was  almost 
more  than  she  could  bear. 

Don  Pamphilo  and  Dona  had  greeted  him  cordially, 
and  he  seemed  a  welcome  guest  at  the  cottage  where 
Uno  spent  very  little  of  her  time,  preferring  the  so- 
ciety of  her  aunt  and  cousins,  and  enjoying  her  horse- 
back rides  with  her  father,  and  then  she  kept  Meno 
from  meeting  Maud  at  the  de  Gomora  cottage,  where 
her  excuse  for  going  was  to  see  Uno,  for  whom  she  ex- 
pressed the  greatest  affection.  She  never  lost  an  oppor- 
tunity to  express  her  admiration  of  Mr.  Ross  to 
Mercedita,  knowing  that  it  would  be  repeated  to  Garita 
and  Maud;  she  pretended  not  to  know  of  Uno's  dis- 


Uno  Who.  55 

like  of  him,  not  thinking  that  the  day  might  come 
when  her  deception  would  appear  in  glaring  colors. 
Uno  was  quiet  and  thoughtful;  she  was  not  disturbed 
by  Meno's  attention  to  Seminole,  or  of  her  being 
thoughtful  of  her  father's  comfort;  it  was  gratifying 
to  her  that  she  had  cultivated  a  very  charming  manner, 
and  was  using  every  means  in  her  power  to  improve 
herself.  Dona  felt  more  than  an  ordinary  interest  in 
her,  and  never  lost  an  6pportunity  to  assist  one  who  had 
lived  in  her  family  so  long,  but  it  was  always  so  far 
shalt  thou  go. 

The  season  was  drawing  to  a  close;  Don  Pamphilo 
always  remained  until  the  first  of  October,  and  Mr. 
Ayling  remained,  that  his  wife  might  receive  the  full 
benefit  of  the  water.  Maud  and  Garita  were  insepar- 
able ;  Mr.  Eoss's  magnetism  had  acted  like  a  charm,  and 
Mr.  Ayling  seemed  very  proud  of  his  man  from  Maine ; 
so  thought  Uno,  who  was  a  welcome  guest  at  her  aunt's 
cottage.  She  told  her  father  that  Mr.  Eoss's  magnet- 
ism gave  her  chills,  but  he  told  her  she  could  prevent 
them  becoming  chronic  by  avoiding  him.  Her  cousin, 
Mercedita,  of  whom  she  was  very  fond,  wished  her  to 
spend  the  winter  in  Havana,  but  Uno  said:  "My  time 
is  not  my  own,  I  am  only  waiting." 

Upon  her  return  to  Florida,,  there  were  numerous 
complaints  entered  about  Eveline,  a  young  and  friend- 
less girl  that  she  had  taken  to  "  The  Shadows,"  think- 
ing she  might  assist  in  the  care  of  Seminole's  children. 
She  had  a  beautiful  face  and  figure,  kind  and  loving 


56  Uno  Who. 

manners,  but  she  would  not  apply  herself  to  any  kind 
of  work.  Padre  Narcisso  was  ahout  to  send  her  to  the 
convent,  when  she  pleaded  with  Uno  to  let  her  live  with 
her.  Each  day  her  work  was  laid  out  for  her,  but  it 
was:  "Oh,  pardon  me,  Senorita,  but  I  forgot  it.  I 
will  do  better  next  time;  don't  send  me  away,"  and 
Uno  let  her  remain,  much  to  Seminole's  disgust.  She 
never  got  angry.  Uno  sometimes  wished  she  could 
arouse  a  spirit  of  anger  in  her.  She  tried  writing  on  a 
card  the  work  for  next  day,  but  it  was  the  same  story : 
"  I  forgot  to  look  at  it."  She  then  tied  the  card  to  her 
rosary,  to  see  if  she  forgot  to  say  her  prayers,  and  felt 
encouraged  when  she  found  it  was  having  the  desired 
effect. 

Garita  looked  upon  Uno's  efforts  with  this  girl  as  a 
hopeless  task,  and  so  informed  her,  but  Uno  was  patient 
and  persevering.  She  said  there  was  good  in  the  girl, 
and  she  hoped  to  make  her  useful. 

Garita  was  devoted  to  her  mother,  her  church  and 
society ;  Uno  to  her  church  and  charities,  to  which  Gar- 
ita thought  she  devoted  too  much  of  her  time.  She 
said:  "Uno,  you  are  neglecting  your  friends  and  so- 
ciety, who  are  entitled  to  a  little  consideration  from 
you.  I  know  you  have  a  tear  for  pity,  and  a  hand  open 
as  day  for  melting  charity." 

"  Garita,  if  you  were  to  choose  your  path  in  life,  what 
would  it  be?" 

"  To  follow  in  the  footsteps  of  my  mother,  and  yours, 
Uno,  I  expect,  would  be  something  weird." 


Uno  Who.  57 

"  What  path  of  life  would  be  my  choice  ?    Ah  me, 
Tis  but  a  choice  of  misery  ;  at  home  are  cares  ; 
Abroad,  incessant  toils  ;  the  sea  is  vex'd  with  storms  ; 
A  traveler  wouldst  thou  roam  ? 
If  rich,  thou'st  much  to  fear  ;  if  poor,  to  bear  : 
Wouldst  seek  to  wed?     Believe  me,  marriage  brings  its 

care  ; 

Nor  think  unwed  thou'st  better  fare. 
A  single  life's  the  dreariest  of  things  ; 
Children  are  plagues  ;  a  childless  life  accurst ; 
Follies  in  youth  ;  iu  age  fresh  infancy  ; 
Never  to  have  been  born,  this  wise  man  first  would  wish, 
And  next,  as  soon  as  born  to  die." 

"  The  Greek  who  wrote  this  epigram  says :  '  If  rich, 
thou'st  much  to  fear.'  My  only  wish  is  to  have  money 
for  the  work  I  would  like  to  do/' 

Their  conversation  was  interrupted  by  Garita's  maid, 
Xannette,  bringing  the  mail.  There  was  a  letter  from 
Spain  for  Uno,  and  Miss  Ayling  had  written  Garita 
saying  that  they  would  come  South  in  the  winter,  if 
they  would  be  home;  but  what  would  the  South  be 
without  you?  Like  a  magic  lantern  without  its  light." 
And  she  hoped  Uno  had  not  been  induced  to  spend  the 
winter  in  Havana. 

"Garita,  if  there  is  anything  that  would  make  me 
spend  the  winter  in  Havana,  it  would  be  that  I  would 
not  have  to  meet  Miss  Ayling." 

"  Uno,  I  am  very  sorry  that  you  do  not  like  my 
friend,  and  I  don't  wish  you  to  make  any  arrange- 
ments for  the  winter  that  will  take  you  from  me.  My 
brother,  Pamphilo,  will  open  his  house  in  Savannah, 


58  Uno  Who. 

and  they  are  anticipating  a  gay  winter.  Your  absence 
would  be  a  great  disappointment  to  them.  But  tell 
me,  why  do  you  dislike  Miss  Ay  ling  ?  " 

"  Garita,  I  hate  her." 

"Uno,  do  you  not  think  it  makes  one  unhappy  to 
have  such  feelings  of  hatred  ?  " 

"No,  it  is  not  half  so  dangerous  as  love;  what  else 
is  love  but  sorrow?  If  I  did  not  love  you,  what  would 
I  care  for  Miss  Ayling's  deceit?  She  dislikes  me,  but 
is  too  polite  and  politic  to  let  you  know  it.  Garita,  this 
is  the  last  winter  we  will  spend  together;  I  will  not 
leave  you." 

"  I  have  a  letter  from  Mercedes ;  she  writes  that 
Senora  de  Vega,  an  army  officer's  wife,  who  was  sup- 
posed to  have  committed  suicide  some  time  ago,  has 
come  to  the  convent.  He  says  she  left  him  in  a  fit  of 
jealousy,  and  he  will  not  see  her  nor  allow  her  to  see 
her  boys.  Her  family  wishes  her  to  come  to  America, 
as  she  will  not  remain  in  the  convent,  and  they  wish  my 
father's  care  in  her  interest.  Mercedes  hopes  I  will  be- 
friend her." 

"There,  Uno,  is  a  charity  that  does  not  require 
money;  some  of  these  army  officers  are  terrors;  man 
would  condemn,  but  the  eternal  God  would  pity  and 
forgive.  Uno,  you  are  always  searching  for  the  truth; 
that  you  will  never  abandon  the  personal  search  for 
truth,  I  have  heard  you  say.  There  was,  undoubtedly, 
serious  cause  for  so  rash  an  act  in  her  case." 


Uno  Who.  59 


CHAPTEE  IV. 

STRONGER    IX    PROPHECY    THAN    IX    CRITICISM. 

IT  was  Christmas  eve;  "Sunnyside"  and  "The 
Shadows  "  were  brilliantly  lighted ;  the  mansions  were 
connected  by  a  canopied  walk.  Garita  and  Uno  re- 
ceived with  Don  Pamphilo,  Dona  and  Osceola  at 
"  Sunnyside  "  their  many  relatives  and  friends  who  had 
been  invited  to  celebrate  their  birth  of  twenty  years  ago. 

Garita  was  the  personification  of  all  that  was  lovely  in 
woman;  Uno,  stately  and  dignified,  was  handsome,  the 
likeness  to  her  father  was  striking. 

The  Aylings  surprised  the  family  by  bringing  with 
them  Mr,  Ross  and  Mr.  Estaugh,  whom,  they  expected, 
would  come  later  in  the  season.  Uno  was  pleased  with 
Mr.  Estaugh;  she  thought  him  one  of  the  most  elegant 
men  she  had  ever  met,  and  it  did  not  need  words  to 
tell  her  he  was  engaged  to  Maud  Ayling,  or  he  would 
not  be  there. 

It  was  early  dawn,  and  again  Osceola  stepped  upon 
the  piazza  to  hail  the  new-born  day;  he  clasped  his 
hands  as  he  gazed  at  the  beautiful  clouds,  saying: 
"  Sweet  spirit,  in  thy  far-away  home,  I  know  thou  hast 
visions  of  mine,  for  my  heart  has  revealings  of  thine 


60  Uno  Who. 

and  of  thee  in  many  a  token  and  sign;  yes,  they  are 
gone,  all  gone;  this  is  the  worst  of  woes  that  waits  on 
age,  to  be  alone  on  earth  as  I  am  now." 

There  was  one  clad  in  snowy  white  that  had  followed 
him  (on  the  way  to  her  boudoir)  as  he  stepped  out  on 
the  piazza;  she  quietly  stood  in  the  doorway  \\nob- 
served,  and  heard  what  her  father  said.  Gliding  to  his 
side,  she  put  her  arm  about  his  neck,  saying:  "Dear 
father,  you  have  me." 

He  put  his  arm  about  her,  and  the  fountain  of  tears 
that  in  age  lie  so  deep  burst  forth,  as  he  said :  "  My 
dear  child,  you  left  all  for  the  stranger." 

They  then  talked  of  her  mother,  and  how  happy 
she  was  when  the  seventh  daughter  was  born.  Seminole 
told  Uno  she  feared  they  had  been  guilty  of  the  sin  of 
omission;  their  father's  life  was  a  lonely  one,  although 
he  had  so  many  about  him. 

Maud  Ayling  was  proud  and  happy,  as  well  as  her 
family.  "  Mr.  Estaugh's  family  are  among  the  intel- 
lectual lights  of  the  city,  and  he  has  lived  in  a  purely 
intellectual  atmosphere,"  said  Maud.  "My  dear  Uno, 
when  a  branch  of  the  family  found  it  necessary,  through 
reverses,  to  have  their  sons  engage  in  business,  it  was 
really  sad  to  see  how  helpless  they  were." 

"Miss  Ayling,  a  little  knowledge  is  very  dangerous, 
also  too  much  when  not  well  directed;  men  should  be 
educated  with  a  general  knowledge  of  business,  then  they 
would  not  be  made  to  feel  the  bitterest  curse  of  noble 
natures,  humiliation,  and  as  to  their  association  with 


Uno  Who.  61 

uncultured  people,  there  will  be  an  opportunity  for  mis- 
sionary work  by  giving  them  the  benefit  of  their  su- 
perior education." 

"  Uno,  you  are  very  practical ;  I  fear  I  am  not  enough 
so,  but  Mr.  Estaugh  is  satisfied,  for  he  says  all  that  was 
best  and  brightest  in  his  soul  awoke  at  once  when  he 
knew  me ;  but,  Uno,  you  have  not  given  me  your  answer 
about  being  one  of  my  bridesmaids.  Garita  has  ac- 
cepted." 

"  Miss  Ayling,  I  fully  appreciate  the  honor,  which 
I  decline,  thanking  you  very  much;  but  that  is  out  of 
my  sphere  in  life." 

"Uno,  I  am  disappointed,  but  when  Garita  is  mar- 
ried, I  think  you  will  change  your  mind." 

"  Xo,  Maud,  I  hope  she  will  walk  alone  by  the  torch 
of  her  own  unflickering  purity.  I  would  not  mar  the 
picture." 

"And  you  would  mold  custom  to  your  own  will 
without  outraging  it,"  said  Maud  Ayling. 

The  party  went  to  Georgia.  Pamphilo  de  Gomora 
opened  the  season  with  a  ball  on  Xew  Year's  eve.  Maud 
Ayling  was  beautiful.  Her  happiness  seemed  to  be 
contagious,  for  even  Uno  seemed  to  forget  herself  and 
become  the  victim  of  Mr.  Eoss's  fascinating  manners. 
Was  Uno  playing  a  part?  Or  was  it  accident  that 
threw  Mi*.  Estaugh  and  Garita  so  often  together  ?  She 
enjoyed  the  remark  made  in  Maud's  presence :  "  They 
are  a  handsome  couple,"  and  she  enjoyed  the  bitterness 
in  Maud's  smile,  which  had  lost  its  sweetness;  when 


62  Uno  Who. 

he  returned  to  her  after  dancing  with  Garita,  Uno 
thought  one  arrow  had  done  its  work. 

Mr.  Estaugh  was  charmed  with  Garita's  fine  voice, 
and  often  accompanied  her.  Maud  Ayling  had  herself 
under  wonderful  control;  she  had  evidently  counted 
the  cost  of  bringing  Mr.  Estaugh  South,  but  would  the 
expense  to  her  feelings  bear  the  strain?  She  wanted 
his  assistance  in  capturing  the  prize;  in  fact,  Uno  be- 
lieved he  thought  Garita  and  Mr.  Eoss  already  engaged. 

N"ear  the  close  of  the  season  Maud  began  to  grow 
weary  of  well-doing.  Uno  saw  Maud  in  a  promenade 
with  Garita's  brother  watching  Mr.  Estaugh  as  he,  in 
a  most  lover-like  manner,  was  bending  over  Garita; 
she  saw  in  Mr.  Ross's  looks  something  of  the  intensity  of 
hate  that  is  born  of  love  when  they  formed  for  the  dance 
in  which  Maud  meets  her  lover.  She  has  ceased  to  be 
tender;  there  were  lines  about  her  mouth  that,  with  all 
her  culture,  she  was  unable  to  control.  Uno  was  watch- 
ing her,  and  she  knew  Maud  felt  Garita  her  superior, 
and  in  days  to  come  she  would  not  always  be  a  welcome 
guest  at  the  Estaugh  mansion. 

Maud  was  growing  restless;  she  longed  for  her  na- 
tive air;  the  foreign  element  had  become  distasteful. 
Mr.  Ross  no  longer  concealed  his  mission  to  the  South. 
Mr.  Ayling  talked  with  Don  Pamphilo;  he  told  him 
how  Mr.  Ross's  mother  and  his  wife  were  friends,  and 
at  her  death  she  left  her  boy  and  his  fortune  to  his 
care.  H,e  took  the  orphan  into  his  family  and  busi- 


Uno  Who.  63 

ness.  He  made  a  favorable  impression,  for  Don  Pam- 
philo  told  Mr.  Eoss  he  would  consider. 

Maud  was  to  be  married  the  first  week  in  June;  she 
said :  "  My  dear  Uno,  you  will  certainly  come  to  the 
wedding.  I  fear  Garita  would  not  come  without  you, 
she  depends  so  entirely  upon  you ;  she  is  very  beautiful, 
but  she  has  not  the  dignity  and  character  you  pos- 
sess." 

This  was  said  in  the  hearing  of  Mr.  Estaugh. 

"  Miss  Ayling,  you  are  mistaken ;  Garita  is  a  girl  of 
fine  mind  and  depth  of  character.  If  you  carry  out 
your  design  in  having  her  marry  Mr.  Ross,  you  will 
find  that  you  have  been  a  very  poor  judge  of  human 
nature,  and  regret  the  weakness  that  has  made  you  take 
any  part  in  this  affair." 

"  Then,  Miss  Who,  you  don't  approve  of  Mr.  Ross 
as  Garita's  husband?" 

"  No,  it  will  end  in  misery.  She  is  his  superior  in 
every  respect." 

"  Uno,  he  will  never  do  wrong,  but  her  beauty  might 
lead  her  into  some  flirtation  that  would  arouse  his 
jealousy." 

"  Miss  Ayling,  a  remark  like  that  is  unworthy  of 
you."  '-•- 

Could  she  have  seen,  as  Uno  did,  Mr.  Estaugh's  face, 
she  would  have  known  she  had  fallen  from  grace.  This 
conversation  was  on  a  side  piazza. 

That  evening  Garita  and  Uno  were  talking  over  the 
events  of  the  day,  and  she  told  Uno  she  had  been  an 


64  Uno  Who. 

unwilling  listener  to  all  that  was  said.  She  was  in  the 
library  reading  a  letter  from  her  sister  Elaine;  it  was 
warm,  and  the  windows  on  the  piazza  were  open. 

"  Surely,  Uno,  friendship  is  an  affection  of  earth.  I 
am  very  thankful  I  heard  this,  for  you  would  not  have 
told  me;  but  I  was  sorry  to  have  the  feelings  of  my 
other  self  so  hurt.  If  I  accept  this  invitation,  it  will 
be  on  condition  that  you  go  with  me.  I  know  my 
mother  will  not  consent  to  any  other  arrangement." 

The  sad  "  Good  night,  TJno,"  together  with  the  events 
of  the  day,  caused  sleep  to  play  hide-and-go-seek  until 
near  morning;  when  she  thought  she  had  sleep  tucked 
snugly  away,  "  go-seek  "  would  rout  it  from  its  hiding- 
place,  and  she  wished  she  could  introduce  the  Aylings 
and  Mr.  Eoss  to  a  Bengal  tiger. 

The  next  morning  Garita  told  her  mother  what  had 
occurred.  She  decided,  as  Uno  knew  she  would,  that 
Maud  was  a  little  piqued  at  the  compliments  her  fiance 
had  paid  Garita,  and  she  unwisely  tried  to  depreciate 
her  in  his  estimation ;  "  I  hope,  Uno,  you  were  not  too 
severe." 

"  Dear  mother,  I  would  have  done  the  same  for  Uno," 
exclaimed  Garita. 

"  I  know  you  would,  but  if  you  do  not  attend  tho 
wedding,  she  will  think  this  talk  had  something  to  do 
with  it.  Uno,  you  will  go  and  act  as  your  noble  nature 
prompts  you." 

How  she  longed  to  open  her  heart  and  tell  her  of 
the  maneuvers  of  the  Aylings  and  Mr.  Ross,  but  her 


Uno  Who.  65 

noble  nature  would  then  have  vanished  into  air.  Dona 
would  have  wondered  how  she  became  so  demoralized 
as  to  be  suspicious  of  those  lovely  people.  Garita  was 
like  her  mother  in  seeing  nothing  but  the  good.  The 
atmosphere  in  which  she  lived  was  not  only  intellectual, 
but  was  pure  and  free  from  guile.  It  was  difficult  to 
make  her  understand  that  people  were  bad,  and  Uno 
had  learned  to  say  very  little  to  them  about  the  work 
she  was  engaged  in.  They  gave  freely  of  their  money, 
but  did  not  like  to  come  in  contact  with  the  poor. 

Uno  felt  it  an  unpleasant  duty  to  attend  Maud's 
wedding,  but  she  could  not  refuse  Dona  who  had  done 
so  much  for  her. 

As  Garita's  husband,  it  would  be  necessary  they 
should  be  on  friendly  terms,  and  she  might  as  well  be- 
gin by  bidding  Mr.  Ross  a  cordial  good-by.  Peace  had 
been  declared,  and  the  insurgents  had  returned  to  their 
respective  homes.  The  family  was  enjoying  the  rest 
and  quiet  so  much  needed,  but  they  were  not  satisfied, 
and  must  accept  an  invitation  to  the  enemy's  camp  and 
be  captured.  Uno  felt  it  would  take  her  years  to 
reclaim  Garita.  Uno  avoided  speaking  Mr.  Ross's 
name;  she  felt  that  whatever  had  been  said  in  the 
family  was  in  his  favor,  or  they  would  not  so  willingly 
have  consented  to  her  going  where  she  would  meet  him. 

The  day  before  the  wedding,  Garita  informed  her 
that  she  had  accepted  Mr.  Ross.  Uno  could  not  speak 
and  Garita  said:  "Do  love  me,  my  more  than  sister; 
5 


66  Uno  Who. 

I  cannot  endure  to  see  you  unhappy;  I  know  you  will 
learn  to  like  him  for  my  sake." 

"  Garita,  if  he  makes  you  happy,  it  is  all  I  ask." 

Just  then  Maud  came  into  the  room;  Mr.  Eoss  had 
told  her,  and  she  was  gushing  in  her  congratulations. 
"  I  am  so  pleased  to  have  it  settled  before  I  am  mar- 
ried; everything  has  transpired  to  make  me  happy." 

Uno  thought :  "  0,  dear,  will  I  ever  get  out  of  this 
Ross  atmosphere  ?  I  will  be  glad  when  my  aunt  gets 
to  Saratoga,  and  I  can  go  into  retreat."  She  had  not 
long  to  wait,  for  when  she  and  Garita  arrived  there 
the  families  were  ready  to  welcome  them. 

Soon  after  the  engagement  was  announced,  Garita's 
maid,  Nannette,  went  to  Uno,  saying :  "  Pardon  me, 
Senorita,  but  I  must  talk  with  you."  She  then  buried 
her  face  in  her  hands  and  sobbed  saying :  "  I  am  heart- 
broken; I  would  sooner  bury  my  lamb.  Oh,  Senorita, 
she  does  not  appear  like  herself  when  he  is  around; 
do  you  remember  the  prophecy?" 

"Yes,  Nannette,  but  don't  mention  it;  Dona  would 
be  very  much  displeased." 

"Senorita,  please  tell  me,  do  you  like  him?" 

"  No,  Nanny,  I  feel  as  badly  as  you  do,  but  we  must 
always  have  a  care  for  her;  never  let  anything  drive 
you  from  her;  she  will  need  us  in  days  to  come." 

"  Senorita,  nothing  but  death  will  separate  me  from 
that  child;  was  she  not  put  in  my  arms  by  my  mother, 
who  was  her  mother's  nurse,  when  she  was  born?  I 
was  only  fifteen  years  old,  and  I  have  not  been  sep- 


Uno  Who.  67 

arated  from  that  child  one  day  since.  I  wanted  to  talk 
to  you  when  we  were  in  Boston,  but  thought  you  would 
not  approve  of  it." 

"Xannette,  I  could  not  interfere;  she  has  her  own 
family,  and  .her  faithful  Nannette.  There  is  really 
nothing  we  can  say  about  the  man,  and  we  will  not 
cross  the  bridge  until  we  get  to  it." 

The  next  day  Dona  requested  Uno  to  come  to  her 
boudoir.  She  then  told  her  that  Maud  Estaugh  was 
writing  to  Garita  urging  her  to  be  married  in  the  fall ; 
she  was  anxious  to  have  her  in  Boston  the  coming 
winter.  "  It  seems  as  though  I  could  not  give  her  up ; 
I  was  in  hopes  she  would  live  at  home  when  she  mar- 
ried." 

Uno  ventured  to  say  that  perhaps  Mr.  Eoss  could  be 
induced  to  come  South. 

"We  have  urged  that,  but  he  says  his  interests  are 
all  at  the  North,  and  he  could  not  without  loss  make 
a  change." 

"  Her  brothers  are  not  pleased ;  they  think  Mr.  Eoss 
too  much  of  a  stranger  to  come  in  the  family,  and 
Garita  says  you  are  not  pleased,  but  attributes  it  to 
your  not  wishing  her  to  marry  and  go  away.  I  think 
it  would  be  difficult  to  find  any  one  good  enough  for 
her." 

As  Garita  entered  the  room  she  said :  "  I  know  you 
are  talking  about  me;  is  it  of  the  past,  the  present  or 
the  future?" 

"  My  dear  child,  your  future  lies  nearest  my  heart ; 


68  Uno  Who. 

when  you  leave  your  father's  home  and  protection  to 
place  your  life's  happiness  in  the  hands  of  a  stranger, 
you  are  taking  a  step  that  should  be  well  considered  by 
both  yourself  and  friends." 

"  Mother,  I  have  not  known  any  real  unhappy  lives ; 
you  and  my  father  have  been  all  that  could  be  desired ; 
my  brothers'  wives  are  happy,  and  so  are  my  sisters, 
and  why  should  I  fear?  I  never  expect  to  have  a 
home  like  the  one  I  leave  unless  my  father  provides  it. 
Mr.  Boss  certainly  loves  me,  and  I  could  not  help  lov- 
ing any  one  so  devoted  as  he  is.  He  wishes  to  be 
married  in  November." 

"  So  soon,  my  child ! "  was  the  almost  pathetic  reply 
of  her  mother. 

Garita  had  a  way  of  sitting  or  kneeling  at  her 
mother's  feet  on  a  cushion  when  she  wished  to  talk 
with  her.  In  this  position  she  now  sat,  her  hands 
clasped  in  her  mother's  lap,  and  looking  up  in  her 
mother's  face,  her  large  dreamy  eyes  filling  with  tears, 
she  said :  "  Dear  mother,  how  can  I  leave  you  ?  "  Dona 
kissed  her,  not  trusting  herself  to  speak,  while  Uno 
looked  as  if  anticipating  the  day  when  Mr.  Ross  would 
be  at  her  mercy. 

It  was  a  sad  wedding;  a  gloom  seemed  to  pervade 
the  very  atmosphere;  even  the  flowers  had  a  funereal 
look,  and  the  rector's  voice  was  that  of  an  undertaker. 
Uno's  aunt  urged  her  to  go  to  Havana,  but  she  would 
not  leave  Dona;  this  was  the  opportunity  for  showing 
her  desire  to  return  some  of  the  loving  kindness  she 


Uno  Who.  69 

had  received  at  her  hands.  There  was  a  peculiarly 
plaintive  tone  in  her  voice  when  she  spoke  her  name 
or  addressed  her.  It  was  like  the  pleading  of  Othello 
when  he  says:  "I  loved  her  that  she  did  pity  me." 

Uno  sat  down  in  the  twilight,  that  wondrous  magic 
hour,  and  for  the  first  time  in  her  life  felt  that  she 
was  alone.  Yes,  Garita  has  gone.  This  one  short  word 
was  a  legacy  of  memory  to  her;  it  simply  expressed 
resignation;  they  had  gone  out  of  the  happy  past,  and 
she  would  keep  out  of  the  inhospitable  future.  A  new 
life  seemed  opening  up  to  her;  she  must  grasp  it 
firmly,  asking  strength  from  the  Master,  who  giveth 
freely  and  upbraideth  not. 

While  she  was  thus  musing  Dona  came  to  her  room 
adjoining  the  one  Garita  had  just  left.  Putting  her 
arm  about  her  she  said :  "  My  dear  child,  why  are  you 
sitting  here  in  the  dark?  I  thought  I  might  find  you 
here,  so  came  myself.  Here  are  letters  for  you  as  well 
as  me." 

While  lights  were  being  brought  in,  she  thought  of 
her  own  selfishness,  and  wondered  if  a  more  angelic 
being  ever  lived  than  Garita's  mother.  After  reading 
their  letters,  they  joined  the  family  in  the  library 
where  the  news  from  abroad  became  the  topic  of  con- 
versation. 

On  the  last  of  the  month  Mercedes  came  bringing 
with  her  several  nuns,  Senora  de  Vega  and  Isla  Se- 
bastian Manrique,  whom  she  left  with  her  guardian,  and 
at  her  request  Seminole  took  Senora  de  Vega  into  her 


70  Uno  Who. 

home.  Two  of  the  nuns  were  left  at  the  convent 
nearby,  where  Senora  often  remained  for  days  in  seclu- 
sion. 

Mercedes  then  went  to  Cuba,  where  she  was  made 
Mother  Superior  of  a  convent. 

Garita's  letters  were  devoted  to  descriptions  of  the 
happy  life  she  was  living  in  the  gay  and  fashionable 
world  of  her  adopted  home.  Pictures  of  the  beautiful 
Mrs.  Eoss  were  in  the  papers;  her  fine  voice  and  fam- 
ily of  high  degree,  her  English  education,  and  above 
all  the  large,  dreamy  brown  eyes  of  her  Spanish  an- 
cestors together  with  a  charm  of  manner  made  her  a 
center  of  attraction  wherever  she  went,  and  her  fam- 
ilies both  in  England  and  Spain  were  possessed  of 
great  wealth. 

Isla  Manrique  had  not  been  in  the  home  of  her 
guardian  a  week  when  she  knew  every  negro  by  name 
and  every  nook  and  cranny  of  the  house.  She  had  in- 
formed her  guardian  that  she  did  not  know  whether 
she  would  like  him  or  not,  but  if  he  would  sit  for  her 
she  would  paint  a  likeness  of  him.  She  played  snatches 
of  operas,  and  ran  up  and  down  stairs  singing;  finally 
she  asked  Dona  if  she  thought  her  a  very  bad  child. 
"Senora  de  Yega  says  you  will  think  me  very  rude 
because  I  run  around  so.  I  am  so  happy  to  be  out  of 
the  convent  where  everything  was  so  still  and  gloomy; 
I  feel  like  screaming.  Last  evening  before  dark  I 
went  down  to  the  negro  quarters  in  the  cart  with  some 
of  the  children,  and  I  heard  Uncle  Jake  ask  a  man  if 


Uno  Who.  71 

he  had  counted  the  pigs;  he  said  he  had  counted  all  but 
the  little  black  pig,  and  it  ran  around  so  he  couldn't 
count  it.  I  thought  to  myself  Dona  will  think  me  as 
bad  as  the  little  black  pig  if  I  am  not  more  quiet.  I 
will  try  and  be  good  if  you  will  love  me.  When  I  went 
to  my  aunt  in  Madrid,  she  found  fault  with  me  all  the 
time;  she  did  not  like  it  because  I  talked  that  horrid 
English;  that  was  what  she  called  it;  Sister  Rafael 
wished  me  to,  as  I  was  coming  to  America  to  live. 
Mercedes  was  Sister  Eafaet  in  the  convent.  My  aunt 
said  I  was  a  little  mongrel,  very  plain  looking  and 
very  small  for  my  age,  my  music  a  mixture,  and  she  did 
not  think  me  capable  of  applying  myself  to  my  paint- 
ing. I  told  her  I  thought  she  would  be  glad  if  she 
had  a  child  as  nice  as  I,  but  I  guess  it  is  best  you 
haven't  any;  she  asked  me  why,  and  I  told  her  because 
it  would  be  always  winter  in  their  hearts,  and  children 
love  the  sunshine  and  flowers.  I  told  her  if  my  father 
was  like  her  it  was  best  he  was  drowned.  Sister  Rafael 
said  it  was  not  nice  for  me  to  talk  that  way;  if  I  did 
not  enjoy  my  visits,  I  had  best  not  go  often.  The  only 
thing  I  cared  for  in  her  stately  house  was  the  picture 
gallery.  Some  of  my  ancestors  are  fine.  Oh,  such 
beautiful  paintings;  I  staid  in  there  most  of  the  time; 
my  aunt  said  I  was  dreaming;  Sister  Rafael  said  I 
would  love  you.  Just  think,  Dona,  I  have  neither 
father,  mother,  brother  or  sister;  you  loved  Uno,  per- 
haps you  will  love  me." 

"  Yes,  my  child,"  said  Dona,  as  she  drew  her  on  her 


72  Uno  Who. 

lap  and  kissed  her.  This  girl  proved  a  godsend;  her 
merry  laugh  and  snatches  of  music  brightened  many 
a  dark  day;  she  would  stand  beside  Don  Pamphilo's 
chair  with  her  arm  across  his  shoulders,  reading,  or 
on  her  knees  looking  at  some  picture  she  had  brought 
him.  He  had  a  studio  fitted  up  for  her  in  the  house 
where  she  would  remain  hours  at  a  time.  The  girl 
needed  a  home  where  she  would  have  perfect  freedom, 
and  a  guiding  hand  to  develop  the  better  part  of  her 
nature,  and  she  had  found  it. 

Senora  de  Vega  was  very  reserved  and  dignified,  she 
was  not  a  handsome  woman;  a  kind  and  thoughtful 
face  which  lighted  up  when  engaged  in  conversation, 
and  a  very  pleasing  smile,  nice  manners  and  a  fine 
figure.  Don  Pamphilo  knew  her  husband  and  some  of 
her  family;  Mercedes  did  not  tell  anything  in  regard 
to  the  troubles,  and  they  asked  no  questions. 

Garita  was  very  strict  in  her  observance  of  Lent,  much 
to  the  disgust  of  Mrs.  Estaugh  and  Mr.  Eoss,  who  were 
Unitarians.  She  thought  Garita  should  accept  her  in- 
vitations, and  when  she  found  her  firm  in  her  decision 
said :  "  This  will  be  very  stupid  for  Eoss.  You  cannot 
expect  him  to  remain  at  home.  I  shall  always  go  with 
Mr.  Estaugh,  my  first  duty  is  to  him.  You  will  find 
some  day  you  have  made  a  mistake;  men  don't  like 
women  with  such  strict  ideas  of  religion." 

"  Maud,  I  was  not  brought  up  in  the  society  of  that 
kind  of  men." 

"  Garita,  I  see  you  will  not  make  a  society  woman, 


Uno  Who.  73 

and  I  will  have  to  wander  amid  the  graves  of  my 

buried  hopes.    I  may  as  well  ask  you  where  you  intend 

to  spend  the  summer  ?  "    , 

"  Maud,  I  will  go  where  my  father  and  mother  are." 
"  Garita,  Eoss  is  heartily  sick  of  that  place,  Saratoga, 

and  I  want  you  in  Newport;  I  hope  you  are  not  going 

to  be  disagreeable  about  it." 

Garita  wrote  to  Uno  of  this  conversation  and  ended 

by  saying :  "  I  often  wish  my  lips  could  utter  to  you 

the  thoughts  that  arise  in  me." 


Uno  Who. 


CHAPTER  V. 

"  A  tale  of  romance  and  lies, 
False  tears,  and  real  perjuries." 

IT  was  a  cheerless  day,  cloudy  and  cold;  the  open 
fire  in  Dona's  boudoir  was  very  grateful ;  the  crackling 
wood  sounded  like  echoes  to  the  conversation.  Dona 
was  knitting  while  Uno  had  heen  reading  the  latest 
novel  to  her.  They  were  talking  of  Senora  de  Vega 
when  she  was  announced,  and  the  conversation  very 
naturally  drifted  upon  the  subject  of  the  novel,  and 
how  many  quotations  which  were  never  given  as  such 
were  taken  from  the  Bible.  Those  familiar  with  the 
Bible  could  trace  at  once  some  of  the  most  beautiful 
expressions  of  thought  to  that  source.  They  had  come 
to  the  conclusion  that  it  was  a  part  of  the  early  educa- 
tion of  the  writer  of  the  story  they  had  been  reading. 

Senora  de  Vega  then  told  them  she  was  writing  a 
story  as  well  as  articles  for  a  magazine  in  her  own 
home.  "  Perhaps  you  are  not  aware  that  I  was  not 
born  or  educated  in  Spain.  I  was  born  in  Berne, 
Switzerland,  of  Protestant  parents.  I  met  my  husband 
while  visiting  friends  in  Seville,  Spain.  He  was  then 
a  captain  in  the  army,  and  since  then  he  has  been  pro- 
moted to  colonel.  He  is  a  relative  of  the  friends  I 


Uno  Who.  75 

had  been  visiting.  My  family  were  opposed  to  my 
marrying  a  Catholic,  but  what  girl  in  love  ever  let  a 
difference  in  religion  come  between  her  and  the  object 
of  her  affection?  My  father  was  an  active  member  of 
the  Lutheran  Church,  for  which  my  husband  and  his 
family  have  a  great  contempt.  We  were  married  in 
my  father's  house,  then  went  to  a  Catholic  church  and 
were  married  by  a  priest.  When  I  became  a  Catholic, 
my  parents  felt  they  were  disgraced.  I  wished  to  please 
my  husband,  and  thought  a  happy  home  the  first  thing 
to  be  considered. 

"  I  have  a  sister  living  in  Madrid ;  they  are  wealthy 
and  influential;  our  families  are  friends,  or  were." 
This  was  said  with  a  deep  sigh,  then  she  exclaimed: 
"  My  boys,  my  darlings,  could  I  but  see  them." 

After  going  on  with  her  embroidery  for  a  few  min- 
utes as  if  to  gain  control  of  herself,  she  asked  Dona  if 
she  could  tell  them  of  her  sad  life. 

"  Certainly,  Senora,  we  may  be  a  comfort  to  you  ia 
the  lonely  life  you  are  leading." 

"It  was  the  Mother  Superior's  advice  that  I  confide 
in  you  and  her  sister  Uno.  We  had  a  very  happy, 
though  unpretentious  home  and  enjoyed  the  society  of 
literary'  people.  Among  those  who  frequented  our  home 
was  one  who  entered  into  all  my  thoughts  and  feelings; 
I  loved  her;  she  enjoyed  life  in  Madrid,  and  I  often 
invited  her  to  visit  me;  she  was  near  my  own  age  and 
unmarried.  She  had  a  love  affair,  the  particulars  of 
which  I  never  knew.  Her  uncle  is  a  friend  of  my; 


76  Uno  Who. 

husband,  but  she  did  not  like  his  wife,  consequently 
her  visits  there  were  of  short  duration;  she  had  the 
freedom  of  my  home.  I  had  often  noticed  a  vein  of 
bitterness,  which  I  attributed  to  some  sorrow  in  her 
life  which,  instead  of  softening,  she  had  allowed  to  cor- 
rode and  destroy  her.  When  I  saw  the  look  of  envy 
at  the  caresses  of  my  husband  and  children,  I. pitied 
her,  and  avoided  any  demonstrations  in  her  presence. 
She  knew  I  adored  my  husband,  and  often  said  it  was 
foolish  of  a  woman  to  make  a  slave  of  herself  for  her 
affections.  In  time,  I  was  almost  glad  when  her  visits 
were  over;  there  was  a  sense  of  relief  and  no  restraint 
in  my  husband's  good-by  kiss;  somehow  I  was  happier, 
*ind  he  said  it  was  nice  to  be  alone. 

"After  going  to  her  father's  home,  she  would  grow 
weary  of  the  quiet,  and  again  go  to  her  uncle's  in 
Madrid,  but  managed  to  spend  most  of  her  time  with 
me. 

"It  was  always  a  wonder  to  her  that  I  could  leave 
my  own  church,  and  to  gratify  her  I  often  went  to  the 
Protestant  church  with  her.  Yes,  it  is  not  an  open 
enemy  that  has  done  me  this  dishonor,  for  we  walked 
in  the  house  of  God  as  friends.  I  noticed  her  famil- 
iarity, but  drove  it  from  my  mind  as  unworthy  of 
me,  until  she  began  bringing  up  my  faults  and  dic- 
tating to  me  in  the  presence  of  my  husband.  When  I 
could  not  go  out  of  an  evening  and  leave  a  sick  child, 
she  would  say:  'Colonel,  we  can  go/  When  he  had 
been  away  from  home,  she  greeted  him  with  a  kiss 


Uno  Who.  77 

upon  his  return.  When  I  talked  to  my  husband  about 
it,  he  was  irritable.  Then  I  suggested  taking  the  boys 
and  going  away  for  a  change,  and  we  closed  the  house. 
I  had  my  sister  invite  the  Colonel  to  stay  with  them 
during  my  absence  and  he  did  so ;  then  she  remained 
at  her  uncle's  and  visited  among  my  circle  of  friends. 

"  When  I  came  home  my  husband's  reception  was  not 
as  of  old;  after  nearly  two  years  of  this  anxiety  (trying 
to  have  my  friends  think  me  happy  in  her  society  and 
concealing  my  feelings  from  my  husband)  who  I  knew 
would  not  bear  one  word  that  reflected  on  him  if  he 
was  ever  so  much  at  fault,  the  crisis  came. 

"I  had  put  my  darlings  in  bed  and  quietly  went 
down-stairs;  I  was  about  to  enter  the  library  when  I 
heard  her  say,  '  Tell  me  again  you  love  me.'  They 
stood  opposite  the  mirror;  I  saw  him  put  his  arm 
around  her,  kiss  her,  and  heard  him  say,  'Yes,  better 
than  any  one  on  earth;  you  have  nothing  to  fear;  you 
will  never  be  driven  from  this  home,  my  darling,'  and 
again  he  kissed  her. 

"  I  walked  into  the  room  and  confronted  them.  Oh, 
pardon  me,  Dona,  I  cannot  sit  still  and  tell  this." 

She  arose  and  walked  the  floor. 

"  Why  could  not  God  have  seen  fit  to  take  me  then 
and  there  ?  How  much  better  for  me  and  my  darlings. 
We  had  a  stormy  scene;  he  stood  an  instant  looking  at 
me;  I  was  trembling  so  I  could  not  speak.  She  very 
coolly,  and  with  a  smile  on  her  lips,  said,  '  Listeners  do 
not  often  hear  any  good  of  themselves.'  I  turned  to 


78  Uno  Who. 

her  saying,  '  You  are  going  too  far,  you  must  not  add 
insult  to  injury.'  I  then  went  to  my  husband,  who 
had  treated  me  so  indifferently  of  late,  and  putting  my 
arms  about  his  neck  said,  'Tell  me  it  is  not  so.' 
Is  it  not  all  a  dream  ?  Oh,  Dona,  Dona,  I  cannot  tell 
it." 

She  walked  the  floor;  her  hands  clasped  as  if  in 
agony. 

"  Oh,  if  I  could  only  weep,  but  in  my  heart  are 
rank,  polluting  weeds  kept  green  by  my  crimson  heart 
tides.  Yes,  he,  my  husband,  unclasped  my  hands  and 
threw  me  from  him  saying :  '  How  dare  you  question 
my  actions?  Henceforth  you  are  nothing  to  me/  and 
with  a  curse  he  bade  me  leave  the  room;  that  when  he 
wished  to  see  me,  he  would  let  me  know. 

"  I  knew  his  temper,  but  now  I  seemed  dazed  and 
stood  looking  at  him  when  he  said :  '  You  understand 
I  am  not  to  be  disobeyed.'  I  took  one  long,  agonizing 
look  and  left  him. 

"  That  night  I  quietly  packed  all  my  valuables ;  I 
told  my  maid  to  have  a  cab  ordered  for  the  five  o'clock 
train  next  morning;  as  Senorita  often  took  that  train, 
they  thought  nothing  of  it.  My  trunk  had  not  been 
all  unpacked  since  my  return. 

"After  taking  a  farewell  look  at  my  darlings,  I 
drove  to  my  sister's  house,  left  the  trunk  and  a  note 
for  her,  saying  it  was  useless  to  look  for  me. 

"1  outlined  what  had  occurred,  and  knowing  that 
my  husband  would  vent  his  wrath  on  me  now  that  I 


Uno  Who.  79 

had  proof  of  his  infidelity,  what  was  I  to  do?  He 
would  never  acknowledge  his  wrong,  and  to  save  him- 
self he  would  defend  the  woman.  I  had  but  one 
thought,  to  leave  them  forever  and  save  my  darlings 
from  disgrace. 

"I  went  to  Switzerland;  there  in  the  mountains  I 
knew  so  well,  I  was  about  to  end  all.  I  stood  upon 
a  precipice  below  which  the  water  was  dashing  with  the 
roar  of  a  cataract.  It  would  be  useless  to  search  for 
me  there.  I  tied  my  bonnet  and  wrap  to  a  tree  nearby. 
What  was  it  that  saved  me?  It  was  the  voices  of  my 
darlings;  at  this  hour,  I  imprinted  that  farewell  kiss. 
I  felt  they  were  dreaming  and  calling  for  their  mother. 
I  knelt  down  and  prayed,  but  my  heart  was  so  full  of 
bitterness,  I  felt  God  had  forsaken  me. 

"I  put  on  the  peasant  cap  and  clothes  I  took  the 
precaution  to  bring  with  me  in  case  I  needed  a  disguise. 
I  left  my  bonnet  and  wrap  and  went  to  the  mountain 
home  of  an  aunt,  my  mother's  eldest  sister.  She  lived 
alone  with  her  son  and  his  little  girl,  his  wife  having 
died  at  her  birth.  I  did  not  meet  any  one  I  knew. 
Although  they  had  not  seen  me  for  a  long  time  they 
recognized  me.  I  was  tired  and  sick;  I  did  not  know 
what  to  say  to  them,  and  I  told  them  not  to  tell  any 
one  I  was  there  until  they  heard  my  story;  then  we 
would  decide  what  to  do. 

"  In  a  few  days  I  was  strong  enough  to  tell  them 
all.  Dear  old  auntie;  she  so  calmly  said:  'That  was 
because  he  was  not  meeting  folks,  dear;  I  knew  when 


80  Uno  Who. 

you  married  that  Catholic  there  would  no  good  come 
of  it.' 

"My  cousin  went  to  my  father's  house  and  heard 
all  the  talk  and  excitement  in  regard  to  me,  and 
brought  me  the  Madrid  papers.  My  bonnet  and  wrap 
had  been  found,  and  I  was  supposed  to  be  dead;  I  was 
dead  to  all  but  the  two  humble  beings  with  whom  I 
found  a  home. 

"  What  was  I  to  do  ?  To  sit  by  the  hour  and  think 
was  maddening.  No,  they  shall  not  drive  me  mad;  it 
would  be  the  most  gratifying  to  them  of  anything  I 
could  do.  I  went  to  the  one  upon  whose  promises  I 
could  rely;  morning,  noon  and  night  found  that  dear 
old  soul  on  her  knees,  her  arm  around  me,  asking  God 
to  take  care  of  her  ewe  lamb,  to  help  and  direct  us, 
and  restore  to  me  my  darlings. 

"  There  is  nothing  like  work  for  a  troubled  mind.  I 
had  a  little  money  which  my  cousin  invested  in  pen, 
ink  and  paper.  I  went  to  work  with  the  determination 
that  I  would  prove  to  my  husband  that  the  pen  is 
mightier  than  the  sword.  I  wrote  an  article  that  was 
published  in  a  magazine  and  I  was  paid  for  it.  My 
cousin  attended  to  my  affairs. 

"  I  kept  on  writing,  meeting  with  so  much  success 
that  I  attempted  a  book  which  has  been  published. 
Yes,  Dona,  '  Out  of  the  Depths '  placed  me  on  my  feet. 

"  My  aunt  went  to  my  mother  and  told  her  all ;  they 
sent  for  my  sister  and  brother.  I  went  home,  and  they 
wept  tears  of  joy  over  the  long  lost  one. 


Uno  Who.  81 

"  I  then  learned  of  my  husband's  anger  at  the  course 
I  had  taken;  he  said  nothing  in  regard  to  me,  but  al- 
lowed that  woman  to  insinuate  that  he  discovered  I 
was  deceiving  him,  and  in  my  desperation  had  com- 
mitted suicide.  He  must  not  let  this  scandal  in  regard 
to  himself  reach  the  army,  so  he  had  hushed  it  up, 
sacrificing  the  reputation  of  the  mother  of  his  children. 

"  Oh,  God,  had  a  dagger  pierced  my  heart,  the  agony 
could  not  have  been  greater. 

"  To  think  that  my  darlings  may  grow  up,  perhaps 
taught  not  to  speak  their  mother's  name,  is  almost 
more  than  I  can  bear.  Think  of  the  long  years  I  must 
be  deprived  of  their  society,  those  precious  childhood 
years  so  dear  to  a  mother.  He  says  I  shall  not  see 
them,  so  I  must  bide  my  time,  for  they  shall  yet  be 
proud  of  their  mother's  name. 

"  My  sister  went  to  him,  and  he  was  terribly  excited 
when  he  heard  I  was  in  Madrid ;  said  I  had  undoubtedly 
come  to  try  and  destroy  him.  My  sister  told  him  if 
I  wished  to  destroy  him,  I  would  not  have  gone  away; 
that  I  would  not  blacken  the  name  of  the  father  of  my 
children  as  he  had  done  me.  '  She  could  have  for- 
given your  infatuation  and  temper,  but  the  mask  has 
fallen;  she  loathes  the  weak  and  cringing  nature  that 
would  stab  a  helpless  woman  in  the  back;  that  her 
darlings  will  yet  be  proud  of  their  mother's  name  and 
fame,  and  she  warns  you  to  beware  of  the  pen  of  a 
ready  writer  who  may  yet  cause  you  to  lay  down  your 
sword  and  flee  as  she  did  to  the  mountains  for  refuge. 


82  Uno  Who. 

"He  grew  pale  as  death  and  walked  the  floor;  finally 
he  said,  speaking  my  name  for  the  first  time :  '  No  one 
ever  heard  me  say  anything  that  would  reflect  upon 
Jeanie.'  '  No/  said  my  sister,  '  but  you  allowed  that 
woman  to  do  so.'  He  excitedly  turned  upon  her  saying : 
'Don't  you  mention  that  name  to  me.' 

"The  rest  you  know.  I  went  to  the  convent  and 
there  met  Mercedes,  now  Mother  Superior.  It  was  not 
pleasant  for  me  to  live  in  Madrid;  the  convent  was 
gloomy  and  my  writings  would  become  morbid.  I 
wished  to  see  something  of  the  world,  and  I  improved 
this  opportunity  of  coming  to  America.  I  am  out  of 
the  night  of  dark  despair,  and  look  forward  to  happier 
days.  My  faith  in  man  I  have  forsaken,  but  faith  in 
God  most  surely  I  have  found." 

They  were  very  much  affected  by  the  sad  story  of 
Senora  de  Vega's  life.  Uno  said:  "Why  are  the  in- 
nocent made  to  suffer  for  the  wrong  of  others?  Had 
she  committed  suicide,  the  world  would  have  thought 
her  guilty;  her  husband  would  have  gone  on  accepting 
the  sympathy  of  his  friends,  and  the  woman  bewailing 
the  manifold  sins  and  transgressions  of  one  she  had 
loved.  Dona,  I  am  greatly  exercised  over  Senora's 
fate.  I  suppose  her  family  feels  she  might  better 
have  remained  at  home.  I  would  and  have  used  the 
tomahawk  and  scalping  knife.  I  feel  now  that  I 
would  like  to  make  war  on  that  woman.  I  will  write 
to  Garita  to  never  have  a  bosom  friend,  and  I  will 
follow  a  traitor  to  the  end  of  time/' 


Uno  Who.  83 

"  My  dear  child,  Senora  has  gone  through  trials  that 
would  have  deprived  many  a  woman  of  her  reason.  It 
was  the  voice  of  God  through  her  child  that  saved  her, 
and  she  went  to  the  source  from  whence  cometh  her 
strength.  She  did  not  seek  any  of  her  worldly  friends; 
they  were  like  those  our  Lord  loved  to  dwell  with. 
When  she  became  calm  and  wanted  work  she  was  im- 
pressed with  the  idea  of  writing.  She  has  succeeded 
beyond  her  expectations.  Her  trials  have  developed  a 
talent  she  did  not  know  she  possessed.  She  has  been 
purified  by  the  fires  of  affliction  which  she  has  accepted 
in  a  right  spirit,  and  her  writings  may  benefit  many 
who  read  them. 

"  Her  husband,  were  he  brave  enough  to  tell  the 
truth,  would  say  that  he  despised  himself;  that  he 
constantly  sees  that  pure  woman  with  outstretched 
arms  imploring  him  to  say  he  loved  her;  that  it  was 
all  a  dream.  What  would  he  not  give  to  recall  the 
curse  that  drove  her  from  home  and  children?  Think 
you  he  is  a  happy  man  trying  to  conceal  his  guilt,  and 
feeling  he  is  looked  upon  with  suspicion?  She  has 
lost  her  friend  and  pleasant  home,  and  is  despised  by 
the  man  she  has,  in  one  sense,  ruined;  she  has  found 
that  '  conscience  does  make  cowards  of  us  all/  for  it 
appears  she  does  not  visit  her  old  friends.  What  could 
she  say?  People  are  not  blind  to  the  excuses  of  the 
guilty.  There  is  no  future  for  her  except  in  seeking 
new  victims. 

"  Uno,  whoever  has  a  great  sorrow  should  turn  it 


84  Uno  Who. 

to  good  account.  Make  those  who  have  wronged  us 
feel  our  superiority  by  cultivating  the  resources  within 
ourselves  that  will  place  us  beyond  their  reach  as 
Senora  has  done.  Of  course,  all  are  not  gifted  as  she 
found  herself  to  be,  but  there  a  door  will  be  opened 
for  the  pure  in  heart. 

"  Mercedes  has  shown  great  tact  in  bringing  her  here 
to  us.  We  will  try  and  prove  ourselves  worthy  of  her 
confidence.  Your  father  is  very  much  pleased  that 
Mercedes  has  been  made  a  Mother  Superior,  and  it  cer- 
tainly is  gratifying  to  us  all. 

"  I  quite  agree  with  you  that  it  is  best  to  take  your 
father  and  go  and  see  his  old  uncle,  and  I  hope  you  may 
succeed  in  finding  out  all  you  wish  to  know  in  regard  to 
his  family  and  affairs.  He  must  be  very  old,  as  your 
grandfather  was  the  youngest  son,  and  he  is  next  to  the 
oldest.  Yes,  I  remember  your  great-great-grandfather. 
He  was  not  inclined  to  like  me  at  first  because  I  am 
English.  He  looked  with  suspicion  upon  all  the  Eng- 
lish. There  were  not  many  girls  in  the  family,  I  am 
told.  They  were  all  boys  or  there  would  not  have  bee  a 
those  famous  seventh  sons.  I  have  known  four  of  them 
and  a  daughter,  yourself.  There  were  three  girls  in 
that  generation.  Your  aunt,  Thetis,  has  rather  en- 
joyed telling  me  about  the  family  and  wars.  I  have 
been  a  good  listener  to  her  stories  of  the  early  days  of 
my  adopted  country,  and  my  love  of  romance  has  often 
been  gratified.  We  have  passed  a  good  many  rainy  days 
together,  knitting  and  talking  in  her  quiet  way.  She 


Uno  Who.  85 

always  took  that  straight-backed  rocking  chair.  She 
would  rock  and  knit,  looking  out  the  window  all  the 
time,  as  if  addressing  the  rain  and  trees.  I  never  in- 
terrupted her  by  asking  questions,  as  that  seemed  to 
break  the  spell.  Once  I  asked  her  about  her  mother. 
She  was  silent  as  the  grave  and  dropped  her  eyes  on 
her  work.  The  clicking  of  the  needles  seemed  to  keep 
pace  with  her  thoughts  and  the  nervous  rocking  of  the 
chair. 

"Your  father  had  three  aunts.  The  youngest  kept 
house  for  your  uncle  in  Cuba.  This  story  I  think  ac- 
counts for  your  grandfather  not  liking  me  at  first  ac- 
quaintance. During  the  war  they  were  sometimes 
visited  by  Englishmen  who  came  from  Georgia.  They 
were  on  friendly  terms  with  some  of  the  Indians,  and 
the  girls  used  to  meet  them.  Finally  the  Chief  was 
wild  with  rage  when  he  found  his  daughter  was  going 
to  marry  one  of  that  tribe,  as  he  called  them.  The 
man  had  been  engaged  to  the  two  sisters  at  the  same 
time.  Each  went  on  preparing  to  be  married  without 
telling  anything  about  it.  They  had  secretly  had  their 
dresses  made,  and  when  he  married  one  of  them  the 
other  committed  suicide  after  telling  of  the  deception, 
and  she  was  buried  in  her  wedding  dress.  The  man 
disappeared,  and  no  one  could  tell  what  became  of  him. 
His  name  was  never  spoken.  His  wife  died  not  long 
after  him.  She  said  she  mourned  for  her  sister,  not 
him.  She  was  buried  in  her  wedding  gown  and  finery. 
They  lie,  side  by  side,  in  the  old  Indian  burying 
ground. 


86  Uno  Who. 

"  The  other  sister  was  ready  to  be  married  and  the 
guests  assembled,  but  she  changed  her  mind.  She  was 
afraid  some  evil  would  come  to  her.  She  loved  the 
man,  but  they  could  not  persuade  her  to  be  married. 
He  went  away,  saying  he  would  never  see  her  again. 
She  went  to  see  him,  and  they  were  married  in  his  wig- 
wam, then  went  to  her  father's  home  and  had  the 
wedding. 

"  Her  sister's  fate  was  always  before  her,  and  she  had 
in  this  way  broken  the  spell,  but  her  husband  was  soon 
killed  in  the  war.  She  was  very  young,  and  went  to 
live  with  her  brother  in  Cuba.  His  home  has  always 
been  a  sort  of  refuge  for  the  family.  He  is  supposed 
to  be  very  rich,  and  has  great  respect  for  the  seventh 
sons.  Why  not  for  the  seventh  daughter  ?  " 

Uno  was  in  hopes  Dona  would  refer  to  the  prophecy 
in  regard  to  her  and  Garita  in  some  of  their  conversa- 
tions, but  it  seemed  forbidden  ground  upon  which  Uno 
never  ventured.  Now  she  said :  "  I  wonder  why  Medi- 
cine-Man, as  my  uncle  is  called,  has  never  told  my 
father  anything  about  his  mother  ?  Dona,  I  believe  the 
prophecy  of  the  old  oracle  when  he  said  that  '  Truth, 
which  had  been  crushed  to  earth,  would  throw  off  the 
dust  of  ages,  and  honor  the  descendants  of  old  You- 
Know  Who,'  had  reference  to  my  father's  mother,  and 
that  his  branch  of  the  family  will,  in  the  near  future, 
receive  the  honors  due  them." 

There  was  no  reply;  she,  like  Thetis,  was  silent  as 
the  grave. 


Uno  Who.  87 


CHAPTEE  VI. 

"  Oh !  happiness,  our  being's  end  and  aim." 

UNO  and  her  father  went  to  Cuba,  where  they  found 
their  uncle  very  feeble.  Thetis  said  it  was  well  they 
had  come,  as  he  wished  to  talk  in  regard  to  his  affairs, 
and  he  felt  himself  neglected  by  Uno,  of  whom  he  often 
talked.  She  had  not  been  there  long  before  he  found 
himself  in  "  willing  chains  and  sweet  captivity."  His 
fancy  saddle  was  brought  out,  he  mounted  his  pet  horse, 
and  with  her  father,  she  rode  over  the  plantation, 
taking  great  interest  in  everything,  which  gratified  him 
very  much.  He  told  his  men  that  she  would  some  day 
be  their  mistress;  he  patted  her  cheek  and  smoothed 
her  black  hair  which,  he  said,  was  very  much  Indian.  He 
showed  her  his  mother's  blankets  and  some  of  her  dress 
and  bead  work.  "  I  took  her  here  to  live,"  he  said, 
"  for  the  poor  squaws  had  a  hard  time,  always  moving, 
taking  care  of  their  children,  cooking,  and  often  going 
into  the  fight.  Sometimes  their  ponies  were  stolen,  and 
they  would  walk  miles,  carrying  heavy  burdens,  often 
dying  of  fatigue  and  the  want  of  care.  Your  mother 
was  very  kind  to  the  old  men,  and  they  talked  very 
much  about  you  and  the  little  pale-face."  He  was 
called  "Medicine-Man,"  from  his  great  knowledge  of 


88  Uno  Who. 

roots  and  herbs,  of  which  he  told  her  a  great  deal.  He 
said  it  would  be  useful  to  her  in  going  about  among 
the  poor. 

His  house  was  full  of  Indian  trophies,  and  he  was 
never  tired  of  telling  stories  of  his  boyhood  days,  to  all 
of  which  she  listened  with  the  greatest  interest.  One 
day  he  dressed  up  like  a  Chief,  near  as  he  could  with 
his  stock  on  hand.  After  he  had  flourished  his  toma- 
hawk, and  showed  her  how  fierce  an  Indian  could  look, 
he  stepped  up  to  an  old  table  and  took  from  an  old 
box  (that  looked  as  if  it  had  been  through  more  than 
one  Indian  war)  a  paper,  and  handed  it  to  her.  He 
watched  her  while  she  read  it.  It  was  a  check  on  a 
bank  in  Havana  for  a  large  amount  of  money;  she 
rushed  up  to  him,  put  her  arms  about  his  neck  and 
kissed  him,  saying :  "  You  dear  old  Indian,  how  I  love 
you/'  He  took  hold  of  her  hands,  holding  her  at  arm's 
length,  and  gave  a  war-whoop  which  brought  several 
negroes  to  the  room.  Her  father  and  Thetis  stood  by 
laughing. 

After  looking  at  her  a  moment,  he  said :  "  Osceola, 
I  have  become  the  victim  of  a  woman  in  my  old  age ; " 
then  he  drew  her  to  him,  saying :  "  Do  that  again," 
and  she  kissed  the  other  cheek.  He  gave  another  war- 
whoop  and  walked  off,  flourishing  his  tomahawk,  to 
the  great  delight  of  the  negroes. 

He  told  her  he  had  made  his  will,  leaving  everything 
to  her  upon  condition  that  she  did  not  become  a  nun, 
or  get  married.  In  either  case,  the  property  must  be 


Uno  Who.  89 

equally  divided  with  his  relatives,  except  the  nuns, 
who  did  not  need  anything.  She  was  to  pay  annuities 
to  some  members  of  his  family  mentioned  in  the  will. 
She  was  to  give  to  the  deserving  poor,  regardless  of 
church.  He  worshiped  the  Great  Spirit,  and  he 
wished  to  be  buried  like  an  Indian. 

He  began  to  show  fatigue  from  the  excitement  of  the 
visit,  and  Uno  asked  him  to  take  some  of  his  medicine, 
but  he  replied :  "  No  use ;  old  tree  ready  to  fall  most  any 
day/'  Thetis  told  them  that  when  they  were  gone  he 
would  sit  in  his  big  chair  on  the  piazza  and  sleep  most 
of  the  time. 

He  said :  "  Our  next  meeting  will  be  in  the  Happy 
Hunting  Grounds,  to  which  the  wind  and  the  clouds 
tell  me  I  will  soon  go." 

Uno  and  her  father  went  to  the  convent  to  see  the 
Mother  Superior.  She  was  as  pleased  to  see  them  as 
any  one  could  be  whose  earthly  affections  are  buried. 
She  showed  them  about  the  convent,  telling  them  of 
the  beautiful  country  and  its  resources,  of  the  financial 
condition  and  what  she  hoped  to  do.  They  were  then 
left  to  themselves. 

The  next  day,  about  nine  o'clock,  she  sent  for  Uno. 
They  were  as  strangers,  and  she  felt  the  chill  of  dis- 
appointment and  frankly  told  her  so,  and  that  they 
must  meet  heart  to  heart  or  not  at  all.  She  looked  at 
Uno  for  a  moment,  and  then  taking  her  hand  in  both 
of  hers,  paid :  "  It  is  heart  to  heart,  dear  sister."  They 
then  talked  over  family  affairs,  of  the  old  uncle  and  his 


9o  Uno  Who. 

will,  and  the  subject  that  lay  nearest  lino's  heart, 
Garita's  marriage.  She  told  her  of  the  prophecy  and 
her  own  feelings,  and  that  the  time  would  come  when 
she  would  need  her  assistance.  After  going  over  all  in 
Uno's  impressive  manner,  she  promised  not  to  lay  away 
in  memory's  storehouse,  where  it  would  take  days  to 
unpack,  what  she  had  told  her  in  case  she  needed  her 
advice.  Also,  that  she  would  use  her  influence  in  hav- 
ing Burnedita  defer  taking  the  veil  as  long  as  possible, 
as  she  might  need  her  assistance.  She  quietly  said, 
with  almost  measured  words:  "Uno,  I  believe  in  you, 
and  will  render  you  all  the  assistance  I  can." 

She  sent  for  Uno  to  come  and  spend  the  twilight 
hour  with  her.  She  said :  "  This  is  my  hour  for  think- 
ing; let  us  enjoy  it  together."  She  clasped  her  hand?, 
saying:  "  Your  coming  has  opened  up  a  new  life  to  me. 
In  it  I  see  a  large  field  for  work  in  which  we  can  both 
take  part.  I  know  your  course  will  be  onward  and  up- 
ward, and  I  extend  to  you  the  freedom  of  this  con- 
vent." 

It  was  a  lovely  moonlight  night.  She  said :  "  Let  us 
commune  with  nature  and  the  Great  Spirit."  As  they 
passed  out  into  the  death-like  stillness,  they  involun- 
tarily clasped  their  rosary  and  knelt  in  prayer.  The 
moon  had  just  risen,  casting  its  silvery  sheen  over  the 
water.  The  sun's  last  golden  rays,  kissing  mountain 
and  forest,  had  not  entirely  died  away.  No  sound  but 
that  of  the  lonely  whip-poor-will,  as  in  a  song  of  praise 
to  the  Giver  of  this  glorious  sunset.  As  they  arose  from 


Uno  Who.  91 

their  knees  the  Mother  Superior  said:  "Is  not  this 
heavenly  vision  soul-inspiring?  Goethe  says  the  works 
of  nature  are  always  a  freshly  uttered  word  of  God." 

"  Yes,"  said  Uno,  "  and  to  me  the  words  are :  '  Do 
good  unto  all  men.'  We  will  be  workers  together.  I  need 
your  calm  judgment  to  guide  my  impetuous  spirit  when 
it  is  stirred  to  its  depths  by  the  knowledge  of  some 
great  wrong.  We  must  part,  but  these  precious  hours 
are  locked  in  my  memory,  and  I  will  leave  the  key 
with  the  Mother  Superior." 

Uno  and  her  father  went  to  Havana,  where  the  usual 
preparations  for  the  family's  departure  North  were  go- 
ing on.  The  first  question  was :  "  Uno,  where  are  you 
going  this  summer  ?  " 

"  I  am  sure,"  said  Mercedita,  "  Garita  will  go  to 
Newport  and,  perhaps,  take  a  cottage,  and  you  will  go 
there,  but  you  will  certainly  spend  a  part  of  the 
summer  with  your  father,  if  not  with  us  ?  " 

"  Cousin,  do  not  worry,  I  am  not  ready  to  forsake 
my  father  yet,"  said  Uno,  but  she  found  upon  her  ar- 
rival at  "Sunnyside"  that  the  Newport  cottage  had 
been  taken. 

From  the  tone  of  Garita's  letters,  she  was  in  fine 
spirits.  She  had  told  Maud  about  the  uncle's  will,  and 
Uno  received  a  letter  from  Maud,  congratulating  her. 
She  said :  "  Of  course  you  will  spend  the  summer  in 
Newport,  and  I  would  be  so  pleased  to  have  you  meet 
Mr.  Estaugh's  friends." 

The  family  went  to  Saratoga  for  the  month  of  June ; 


92  Uno  Who. 

they  wished  Senor  de  Vega  to  accompany  them.  "  Not 
yet,"  she  said,  "  I  have  no  time  nor  heart  for  anything 
but  work,  and  but  one  thought  which  I  must  work  out 
or  my  life  will  be  a  faded  dream." 

It  was  a  merry  party  that  took  possession  of  a  beauti- 
ful cottage  in  Newport.  Mr.  Eoss  was  like  a  devoted 
lover  to  his  wife  and  her  family,  even  Uno  came  in  for 
a  share  of  his  attention,  and  she  said  she  never  spent 
a  pleasanter  six  weeks  in  her  life.  Garita  was  made 
happy  by  Uno's  not  allowing  Mr.  Ross  or  Mrs.  Estaugh 
to  outdo  her  in  politeness.  Her  Indian  ancestry  was 
talked  of.  No  one  ever  played  the  harp  so  well,  and 
Garita  liked  to  have  her  play  her  accompaniments  on 
the  piano. 

"  I  did  not  know  you  were  so  fine  a  musician/'  said 
Mrs.  Estaugh. 

"Shall  I  tell  you  the  reason  you  have  been  so  long 
finding  out  my  good  points  ?  "  asked  Uno. 

"My  dear,  they  are  so  numerous,  one  has  to  know 
you  a  long  time  to  fully  appreciate  you." 

"  I  see,  Mrs.  Estaugh,  I  cannot  get  the  better  of 
your  flattery,  but  when  one  is  in  love  and  matchmaking 
at  the  same  time,  it  is  not  surprising  that  they  should 
be  oblivious  to  all  else." 

"  Really,  Uno,  you  should  be  pleased  with  my  match- 
making ;  did  you  ever  see  a  more  devoted  couple  ?  " 

"  I  cannot  answer  your  question,  Mrs.  Estaugh,  as 
this  is  the  first  couple  I  was  ever  interested  in,  and  the 
honeymoon  is  not  over  yet." 


Uno  Who.  93 

"  Nonsense,  Uno,  you  talk  like  a  schoolgirl.  So- 
ciety people  do  not  have  honeymoons." 

"  I  think  you  are  right,  Mrs.  Estaugh,  for  custom 
seems  to  have  made  them  all  moneymoons.  He  that's 
wise  should  live  alone." 

"  Uno,  you're  an  odd  chicken." 

"  And  my  uncle  called  me  an  Indian,"  said  Uno. 

Mrs.  Estaugh  patted  her  cheek,  and  with  a  sweet 
smile,  said :  "  Uno,  you  have  been  well  grafted." 

"  I  am  pleased  it  is  to  your  relish,"  said  Uno. 

"Garita  tells  me  you  are  going  to  leave  us  soon;  T 
very  much  wish  I  could  hold  out  some  inducement  for 
you  to  remain,  but  you  will  not  leave 'until  you  have 
seen  Lady  Margaret  Oughton,  and  Garita's  sister  and 
her  husband  ?  " 

"I  have  arranged  to  meet  them  in  New  York,  but 
they  will  all  go  to  Saratoga  this  fall." 

"By  the  way,  Uno,  has  your  charming  cousin, 
Mercedita,  any  lover  ?  " 

"  Mrs.  Estaugh,  are  you  looking  for  new  victims  ? 
if  so,  beware;  you  will  be  trespassing;  that  is  my 
field." 

As  Garita  entered  the  room  Mrs.  Estaugh  said:  "I 
am  glad  you  have  come.  Uno  is  accusing  me  of  match- 
making and  seeking  new  victims,  and  everything  that 
an  old  lady  with  two  or  three  marriageable  daughters 
could  be  guilty  of;  all  because  I  inquired  about  her 
pretty  cousin." 


94  Uno  Who. 

"Well,  Maud,  you  have  not  succeeded  in  making  a 
match  for  Uno  ?  " 

"No,  hers  is  a  hopeless  case.  She  has  a  heart  of 
adamant.  Just  think  of  a  young  woman,  rich  and 
fine  looking,  with  every  advantage  socially,  being  here 
so  long  and  nothing  approaching  a  flirtation;  the  world 
would  be  full  of  old  maids  if  she  had  her  way." 

"  You  are  both  very  happy  now.  You  have  yet  to 
become  acquainted  with  your  husbands.  If  at  the  end 
of  five  years  you  both  advise  me  to  sacrifice  my  free- 
dom upon  the  altar  of  matrimony,  I  will  consider  it. 
Some  of  my  friends  wish  me  to  wear  a  nun's  veil, 
others  a  bridal  veil.  I  fear  if  I  were  to  take  the  latter 
I  would  go  to  the  cloister  door  telling  them  there  were 
never  thorns  so  sharp  as  those  within  its  lace." 

"Really,  Uno,  this  conversation  has  taken  a  serious 
turn;  I  admire  your  independence.  If  all  women  were 
as  thoughtful  upon  that  subject  as  you,  we  would  not 
see  so  many  young  hearts  grown  gray,  that  it  makes 
us  almost  marvel  that  we  dare  to  love;  but  hope  is 
strong  within  us  all,  and  we  go  on  loving  until  we  find 
our  idols  are  but  clay,  then  we  say  thus  are  we  ever 
slaves  to  fate.  I  hope  at  the  end  of  five  years  we  may 
be  able  to  tell  you  there  had  been  no  thorns  in  our 
path,  and  you  are  very  foolish  to  live  alone.  I  sin- 
cerely wish  there  may  be  many  happy  returns  of  this 
visit  that  we  have  all  enjoyed  su  much." 

That  evening  Garita  went  to  Uno's  room  to  talk  over 
the  events  of  the  day.  She  expressed  herself  as  being 


Uno  Who.  95 

very  pleased  that  she  and  Mrs.  Estaugh  were  on  such 
friendly  terms.  Uno  said  she  was  one  of  the  most 
charming  women  she  had  ever  met,  and  possessed  of 
wonderful  tact,  and  that  she  would  rule  her  husband 
without  his  knowing  it. 

"  Yes,"  said  Garita,  "  and  every  one  else ;  even  Mr. 
Eoss  goes  at  her  bidding,  hut  what  "can  I  do  here  among 
strangers.  It  is  not  nice  to  be  placed  in  the  back- 
ground, and  not  even  consulted  by  my  husband.  He 
says  it  is  no  use  to  say  anything;  we  cannot  afford  to 
offend  her.  She  rules  her  father  through  her  mother, 
She  now  wishes  me  to  purchase  a  handsome  house  in 
Boston.  I  prefer  the  hotel,  and  told  my  father  so. 
She  is  a  thorough  woman  of  the  world,  and  would  sac- 
rifice her  dearest  friend  if  it  was  for  her  interest  to  do 
so.  Aunt  Margaret  will  spend  the  winter  in  the  South, 
and  I  hope  to  be  there  a  portion  of  the  time." 

After  Garita  had  gone  to  her  room  TJno  began  read- 
ing between  the  lines  of  what  she  had  told  her.  She 
said  to  herself  as  she  walked  the  room :  "  Mr.  Eoss, 
you  do  not  know  Don  Pamphilo  de  Gomora  as  well  as 
I  do,  or  you  would  deal  gently  with  him  on  the  money 
question.  He  is  not  an  American,  and  will  not  sup- 
port a  son-in-law,  even  if  he  had  a  title.  Mr.  Eoss,  I 
advise  you  to  attend  to  business  and  let  Mrs.  Estaugh 
paddle  her  own  canoe.  Mr.  Eoss  goes  at  her  beck  and 
nod,  does  he  ?  I  must  set  this  down  as  weakness  No.  1 ; 
been  married  less  than  a  year;  I  will  draw  a  black 
line  under  each  number  in  my  diary.  I  know  there 


96  Uno  Who. 

well  be  plenty  of  them  attached  to  his  name.  I  think 
that  man  is  going  to  prove  a  choice  specimen.  Well, 
here  I  am  walking  around,  talking  to  myself,  an  In- 
dian trait  I  had  not  developed  until  I  met  him.  I 
hope  his  career  will  be  short,  or  I  will  be  a  Ross  mono- 
maniac." 

Uno  was  anticipating  a  sort  of  dream  life  during  .the 
lovely  autumn  days,  to  steal  away  and  listen  to  the 
gentle  sighing  of  the  leaves  as  they  took  their  de- 
parture from  this  world,  so  bright,  so  beautiful,  so  fair. 
She  very  soon  found  there  was  no  dream  life  for  her, 
surrounded,  as  she  was,  by  young  people. 

Mr.  and  Mrs.  Pay  and  two  daughters  had  come  from 
Alabama.  They  were  friends  of  the  family  and  noted 
horseback  riders.  Elaine  and  her  husband,  Lord  Ay- 
liffe,  were  fine  riders,  also  her  brothers,  and  Uno's 
cousins,  Cobre  and  Diego.  Osceola  had  his  fine  horse, 
and  the  party  often  took  long  rides.  Garita  was 
timid  and  never  joined  them.  She  was  very  much 
interested  in  Isla  Manrique,  who  had  made  herself 
necessary  to  her  father's  comfort.  He  was  not  in  his 
usual  good  health,  but  insisted  upon  taking  his  walk 
to  the  spring  in  the  morning.  Isla  was  always  ready 
to  accompany  him.  His  black  hair  was  now  almost 
white,  and  the  large  brown  eyes  seemed  larger  and 
more  thoughtful.  His  face  had  a  worn  look.  The 
elastic  step  was  gone;  the  tall  form  not  so  erect.  The 
plain-looking  child  at  his  side  was  short,  thickset, 
straight  black  hair  and  black  eyes,  dark  skin,  and  a 


Uno  Who.  97 

mouth  that  had  a  severe  expression,  cultivated  through 
want  of  affection,  for  it  disappeared  when  she  looked 
up  in  her  guardian's  face  and  laughed,  showing  a 
beautiful  set  of  teeth. 

Dona  called  her  the  "  sunbeam  "  that  had  been  sent 
to  brighten  their  declining  years.  She  read  to  them  the 
magazines  and  papers  in  both  Spanish  and  English, 
and  often  attended  to  the  correspondence.  She  was 
very  sensitive  about  her  figure.  She  had  often  been 
called  chunky,  and  went  to  grandfather  with  her  griev- 
ance, and  he  told  her  there  was  a  bright  future  for  her. 
that  some  time  he  and  Dona  would  take  her  to  Italy, 
and  that  she  must  not  let  such  foolish  talk  take  pos- 
session of  her  mind,  which  was  better  than  most  girls 
of  her  age,  and  that  he  would  not  exchange  her  talents 
for  their  good  looks. 

The  lovely  October  days  were  drawing  to  a  close, 
restful,  happy  days  to  all,  only  for  the  undercurrent  of 
anxiety  in  regard  to  Don  Pamphilo's  health.  With  the 
exception  of  Flora,  his  children  and  grandchildren 
were  with  him.  They  were  expecting  Garita  to  go 
South  and  remain  until  after  the  holidays,  when  a 
dispatch  came  from  Mr.  Boss  that  he  wished  her  to 
return  to  Boston,  and  he  would  go  South  with  her 
later.  They  were  all  disappointed,  and  none  more  so 
than  Xannette,  who  improved  the  first  opportunity  to 
tell  Uno  it  was  Mrs.  Estaugh's  doings. 

It  was  a  lovely  morning  in  the  first  of  November 
that  the  party  of  horseback  riders  started  out.  The 
7 


98  Uno  Who. 

cool  bracing  air  made  the  horses  restless  in  their  anx- 
iety to  be  on  the  run.  Cobre  de  Felipe  was  engaged  to 
Miss  Fay,  who  was  a  fine  rider.  They  had  prevailed 
upon  their  friends  to  remain  that  they  might  take  a 
few  more  rides.  Pamphilo's  horse  was  said  to  be  the 
fastest  in  the  South,  and  there  was  no  accounting  for 
the  terrible  accident  that  occurred.  Miss  Fay's  pet 
horse  took  fright  and  ran.  Cobre  was  beside  her  with 
Pamphilo  only  a  short  distance  behind.  Her  horse 
went  like  the  wind.  Her  father  said :  "  She  can  con- 
trol her,"  and  at  the  same  time  was  putting  spurs  to  his 
horse.  Her  friends  could  see  her  patting  the  horse's 
neck  to  quiet  her.  There  was  a  wild  plunge  as  if  some- 
thing was  in  the  way.  "  Oh,  she  will  be  thrown,"  they 
exclaimed.  "No,  she  is  still  holding  on;  there,  Pam- 
philo will  save  her.  No,  with  another  bound  into  the 
air  she  has  gone  on ;  unless  she  can  retain  her  hold  upon 
the  horse  until  it  is  exhausted,  she  will  be  thrown. 
Oh,  Pamphilo  is  losing-  ground,  her  fate  is  sealed." 
Such  were  the  exclamations  of  her  half-crazed  mother 
and  friends.  They  saw  the  horse  give  a  jump,  as  if 
something  was  in  the  way,  and  Miss  Fay  was  thrown  to 
the  ground.  She  had  freed  herself  from  the  saddle, 
and  the  horse  went  madly  on.  Her  father  was  soon 
upon  the  scene.  Cobre  and  Pamphilo  had  taken  her 
up,  but  her  neck  was  broken.  They  placed  her  in  her 
father's  arms,  and  with  one  on  either  side,  they  led 
his  horse,  taking  her  to  Cobre's  home.  Her  mother  did 
not  learn  the  sad  truth  until  they  arrived  there. 


Uno  Who.  99 

Elaine  and  her  husband  accompanied  them  to  their 
home  in  the  South.  The  cottages  were  closed.  It 
seemed  in  a  moment,  in  the  twinkling  of  an  eye,  all 
was  changed.  Yes,  they  were  closed  forever  to  several 
who  had  passed  many  happy  days  there. 

Cobre,  the  hand  of  fate  has  torn  her  from  you,  and 
you  must  forget. 


ioo  Uno  Who. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

"  Tropic  eyes  too  full  of  light  and  languor  ; 
Northern  soul  too  gray  with  Northern  frost." 

THOSE  were  busy  days  at  "  Sunnyside "  and  "  The 
Shadows."  Christmas  gifts  for  home  and  abroad. 
The  poor  to  be  looked  after.  Negroes  on  the  planta- 
tion must  have  their  clothes  and  Christmas.  Dona 
said :  "  I  am  very  glad  you  are  here,  sister  Margaret ; 
you  and  Elaine  can  assist  me  and  relieve  Uno,  who 
often  tries  to  help  me,  as  I  have  two  churches  to  work 
for;  Uno  and  I  have  tried  to  have  things  go  har- 
moniously, and  we  have  succeeded  admirably.  Since 
my  daughters  married,  I  am  alone  in  the  Episcopal 
church.  Elaine,  I  wish  you  would  take  your  work  and 
go  to  the  library,  as  your  father  is  usually  there  at  this 
hour,  and  I  do  not  like  to  have  him  left  alone.  We 
will  join  you  very  soon." 

They  were  a  happy  family.  Isla  was  making  a  ball 
of  yarn  from  the  skein  which  Don  Pamphilo  held  for 
her  on  his  hands,  and  laughing  because  he  could  not 
let  off  the  yarn  as  fast  as  she  could  wind. 

"  Isla,"  said  Dona,  "  I  think  you  can  dress  the  dolls." 

"  Oh,  grandmother,  won't  that  be  lovely.    Just  think, 


Uno  Who.  101 

I  never  had  a  dolly  in  my  life  that  I  know  of.  I  never 
had  anything  to  play  with." 

"  Well,  Isla,"  said  Don  Pamphilo,  "  your  dollies  have 
all  come  at  once.  They  are  in  a  box  that  has  been  sent 
here." 

She  glided  to  his  chair,  and  putting  her  arm  across 
the  back,  said :  "  As  well  as  my  other  pleasures,  grand- 
father. Sister  Eafael  used  to  take  me  in  her  arms  and 
talk  to  me  when  I  prayed  for  my  father  and  mother  to 
come  and  take  me  to  Heaven.  I  think  now  they  sent 
an  angel  to  her  that  said  to  bring  me  here.  When  I 
am  older  and  can  paint  better  I  am  going  to  make  a 
picture  of  a  homely  little  child  with  a  nun  talking  to 
her.  In  the  clouds  will  be  the  father  and  mother 
watching  the  angel  and  whispering  to  the  nun  what  to 
do  with  their  little  girl.  I  pray  every  night  that  I  may 
be  able  to  paint  pictures  you  will  be  proud  of;  then  it 
will  be  forgotten  that  I  am  a  dwarf/' 

"  Isla,  you  are  not  a  dwarf,"  said  Don  Pamphilo, 
earnestly.  "  By  the  time  you  are  fifteen  I  think  you 
will  wish  to  stop  growing.  You  must  be  proud; be  strong; 
do  not  let  such  ideas  take  possession  of  you;  they  will 
dwarf  your  mind.  What  is  the  body  compared  to  the 
mind?  You  are  allowing  yourself  to  become  morbid 
on  this  subject.  You  say  you  are  happy  here,  and  we 
all  love  you,  and  God  has  given  you  talents  to  be  proud 
of." 

"  Grandfather,  pride  is  a  sin." 

"Then,  my  child,  why  do  you  wish  to  be  tall  and 


io2  Uno  Who. 

handsome  ?  Are  we  not  proud  of  our  friends  when  they 
do  right,  and  will  we  not  be  proud  of  you  when  you 
become  a  celebrated  artist?  We  all  need  a  certain 
amount  of  self-esteem,  which  you  do  not  possess.  You 
are  constantly  wishing  to  be  something  you  are  not. 
If  you  were  tall  and  handsome  you  might  be  so  carried 
away  by  flattery  that  you  would  not  cultivate  the  talent 
God  has  given  you.  You  have  another  talent.  You 
will  make  a  fine  linguist,  which  will  be  a  great  ad- 
vantage to  you  in  studio  life.  If  you  wish  to  please 
us  all,  do  not  borrow  any  more  trouble  about  your  looks, 
for  your  life  will  be  spent  in  the  workhouse  of 
thought." 

She  put  her  little  white  hand  on  his  cheek  as  she 
kissed  him,  then  went  to  Dona  and  kissed  her,  saying: 
"  Pray  for  me,  grandmother,  that  I  may  be  strong." 

If  time  is  the  stuff  that  life's  made  of,  the  family 
used  plenty  of  it.  It  was  the  week  before  Christmas, 
and  they  felt  they  could  take  enough  of  the  material 
for  thinking. 

The  family  had  gathered  in  the  library,  near  the 
close  of  a  lovely  day.  They  were  watching  the  sunset 
as  it  was  about  to  bid  their  little  world  good  night, 
and  discussing  the  subject  of  their  going  to  Alabama 
for  Christmas.  Lady  Margaret  did  not  think  it  the 
proper  thing  to  do.  It  would  be  a  disappointment  to 
the  rector.  They  should  remain  and  assist  in  the 
church  work,  and  have  him  and  his  family  to  their 
Christmas  dinner.  "  Our  boys  must  come  to  us,  but 


Uno  Who.  103 

Uno,  who  is  that  coming  across  the  lawn  ?  "  Through 
the  conservatory  windows  she  could  see  Osceola  and 
three  men.  They  were  Don  Alfonso,  eldest  son  of  the 
Marquis  of  Floraine,  and  Captain  Francisco  de  Aldana. 
But  who  was  the  tall  handsome  man  standing  in  the 
shadow  while  the  others  were  being  greeted  as  they 
entered  the  room?  As  he  stepped  forward  and  ex- 
tended his  hand  to  Don  Pamphilo,  there  was  a  chorus 
of  voices  saying  :  "  Paulo,  Paulo." 

"We  have  brought  the  wanderer  home,"  said  the 
Captain,  "and  it  is  gratifying  to  see  the  pleasure  it 
has  given  you." 

"  I  fear  our  boys  would  be  jealous  if  they  were  to 
see  their  mother/'  said  Lady  Margaret. 

"My  friends,  it  pleases  me  more  than  anything  to 
have  my  adopted  mother  so  glad  to  see  her  boy."  He 
put  his  arm  about  her  and  smoothed  her  gray  hair  as 
he  said :  "  I  have  tried  to  keep  my  promise  and  live  so 
that  you  would  not  be  ashamed  of  me." 

"  Colonel,  you  are  a  brave  man  to  say  that  in  my  pres- 
ence," said  the  Captain.  All  laughed  at  this  remark, 
as  they  were  in  the  same  regiment. 

"Captain,  for  the  first  time  in  my  life  I  feel  like 
laying  down  my  arms,  and  being  a  prisoner  of  war." 

The  news  spread  like  wild  fire  that  Paulo  had  come 
home.  Bonfires  were  started  and  he  had  to  go  out  and 
make  a  speech.  They  were  preparing  for  their  Christ- 
mas, and  feeling  in  good  spirits,  which  turned  into  a 
regular  jubilee. 


104  Uno  Who. 

In  a  few  days  Garita  and  Mr.  Ross  came,  but  they 
left  soon  after  New  Year's.  Mrs.  Estaugh  was  an- 
ticipating a  very  gay  season,  and  would  not  listen  to 
their  remaining  at  the  South. 

At  Garita's  urgent  request,  Elaine  and  her  husband 
accompanied  her  to  Boston.  She  had  not  told  Mr. 
Ross  or  Mrs.  Estaugh,  but  she  intended  giving  a  ball 
in  her  hotel,  and  wished  her  sister  and  husband  to  as- 
sist her.  She  wished  to  act  independently  of  Mrs. 
Estaugh,  who  was  becoming  so  dictatorial  that  it  was 
almost  unbearable.  She  was  elated  with  her  success  of 
the  last  winter,  and  would  not  allow  anything  to  stand 
in  her  way  now. 

It  had  been  announced  that  Mrs.  Ross's  cousins,  Don 
Alfonso  and  Captain  de  Aldana,  of  the  Spanish  army, 
also  Col.  Who  and  his  sister  were  to  be  the  guests  of 
Mrs.  Ross;  that  her  sister  and  husband,  Lord  and  Lady 
Ayliffe  of  England,  had  been  her  guests  for  some  time. 

The  ball  was  a  success.  Mrs.  Ross  was  the  most 
beautiful  woman  there.  Lady  Ayliffe's  exquisite  taste 
had  done  for  Mrs.  Ross  what  she  would  never  do  for 
herself.  She  was  so  modest  in  everything  she  said  and 
did  that  her  dress  partook  of  her  nature.  That  night 
her  dress  and  beauty  were  simply  bewildering. 

Mrs.  Estaugh  for  once  was  baffled.  She  could  not 
conceal  her  feelings  at  her  husband's  devotion  to  Mrs. 
Ross,  who  had  always  avoided  him,  knowing  his  wife's 
jealous  disposition.  To-night  she  was  surrounded  by 
loving  friends,  and  there  was  no  restraint  in  her  man- 


Uno  Who.  105 

ner;  no  one  to  give  her  to  understand  that  she  was  a 
stranger  in  a  strange  land,  and  they  were  the  first  con- 
sideration, even  with  her  own  husband. 

Col.  Who  was  a  beautiful  dancer;  he  and  Mrs.  Ross 
were  dancing  together.  Uno  was  watching  them  when 
Lord  Ayliffe  came  up  and  said :  "  What  a  pity  she  did 
not  wait.  It  might  have  been.  They  are  the  hand- 
somest couple  I  ever  met.  Elaine  was  considered  a 
beautiful  girl,  and  is  a  handsome  woman,  but  there  is 
a  charm  about  Garita  that  it  is  difficult  to  define. 
She  has  the  loveliest  manner,  and  is  so  gentle  and  con- 
fiding that  one  feels  a  desire  to  shield  her  from  contact 
with  the  world.  A  weak  and  selfish  nature  cannot 
appreciate  a  woman  like  her,  but  would  cause  her  to 
suffer  intensely.  I  have  become  very  much  interested 
in  Garita,  who  has  been  almost  a  stranger  to  me." 

This  conversation  was  a  great  relief  to  Uno,  as  she 
felt  that  Lord  Ayliffe  was  not  blind  to  the  state  of  af- 
fairs, and  that  the  ball  would  be  a  marked  period  in 
Garita's  life.  So  many  of  her  friends  were  there,  and 
all  so  charmed  with  her,  it  would  not  be  easily  effaced 
from  their  memory. 

Early  in  the  spring,  Lord  Ayliffe  and  his  wife  re- 
turned to  England.  Uno  intended  to  remain  with 
Garita  until  the  families  came  North,  but  the  death  of 
her  uncle  made  it  necessary  for  her  to  go  to  Cuba. 

Garita  was  now  very  happy,  having  spent  a  pleasant 
winter,  and  Mrs.  Estaugh  was  like  a  loving  sister.  She 
invited  Uno  for  a  month  to  her  cottage  in  Newport. 


io6  Uno  Who. 

"  My  mother  is  so  lonely  since  I  left  home.  She  is 
going  to  have  a  daughter  of  a  sister  live  with  her. 
The  girl  graduates  this  summer.  Then  my  mother 
will  take  her  to  some  of  the  fashionable  watering  places, 
and  will  he  my  guest  for  only  a  short  time  and  then 
late  in  the  season.  I  do  not  care  to  have  Caroline  here 
at  present.  She  has  been  educated  in  Maine,  and 
really  you  know  they  are  very  different  from  our  Bos- 
ton people." 

"Mrs.  Estaugh,  I  thought  Mr.  Eoss  was  from 
Maine,  and  you  seem  to  think  him  a  paragon  of  perfec- 
tion, and  he  certainly  has  lived  in  your  family  long 
enough  to  have  outgrown  the  Maine  part  of  his  educa- 
tion. I  presume  this  girl  will  in  time,  if  you  take  the 
same  interest  in  her  that  you  have  in  Mr.  Eoss." 

She  was  piqued  at  this  remark,  and  with  a  good  deal 
of  spirit  replied:  "Uno,  I  have  never  thought  Eoss  a 
paragon  of  perfection.  He  is  a  good  fellow,  but  not  a 
man  I  consider  my  equal.  I  found  it  very  convenient 
when  a  young  lady  to  have  him  dance  attendance  upon 
me,  and  I  often  forget  when  calling  upon  him  that  he 
is  another  woman's  husband,  but  he  is  the  last  man  I 
would  have  married,  for  I  must  have  a  husband  I  can 
look  up  to." 

"  Yes,  Mrs.  Estaugh,  you  certainly  have  outmarried 
yourself  in  birth  and  education;  there  are  few  who 
can  outgeneral  you  in  maneuvering.  I  think  people 
should  be  very  thankful  who  have  a  high  social  position 
and  wealth  so  that  while  they  are  seeking  position  for 


Uno  Who.  107 

themselves  they  do  not  have  to  assist  other  members  of 
their  family  in  fortune-Inmting." 

"  Uno,  that  is  rather  broad." 

"I  intended  it  to  be,  Mrs.  Estaugh.  Most  people 
have  two  sides;  I  use  one  of  mine  for  the  poor  and 
afflicted,  which  is,  'Do  unto  others  as  you  would  have 
them  do  unto  you/  and  the  other  is  for  society;  with 
it,  I  do  to  others  as  they  do  to  me." 

"  Uno,  I  think  you  a  very  strange  woman." 

"  Is  it  because  I  do  not  smile  and  wet  my  cheek  with 
artificial  tears?  I  love  my  friends,  would  almost  lay 
down  my  life  for  them,  but  I  do  love  to  cross 
swords  with  an  enemy.  Mrs.  Estaugh,  you  and  I  ought 
to  understand  each  other  by  this  time." 

"  Dear  Uno,  I  have  never  misunderstood  you ;  to 
me  you  are  the  dearest  and  noblest  woman  I  ever 
knew."  She  then  lovingly  patted  her  cheek,  and  Uno 
was  glad  when  a  servant  entered  saying  that  Mrs. 
Ross's  carriage  was  at  the  door.  She  was  glad  to  leave 
the  depressing  atmosphere  of  that  palatial  home.  She 
entered  the  carriage  with  flushed  cheeks  that  had  fol- 
lowed the  chilly  sensation  that  always  came  when  the 
subject  that  laid  nearest  her  heart  was  brought  up. 

When  she  entered  Garita's  rooms  she  threw  herself 
into  a  chair  with  an  air  of  abandon  that  called  forth 
from  Garita  the  remark  that  she  seemed  utterly  de- 
moralized. "You  sometimes  think  Maud  such  a 
charming  woman.  This  must  have  been  one  of  her  off 
days." 


io8  Uno  Who. 

"  Garita,  she  keeps  cool  and  calm  when  she  says  dis- 
agreeable things.  With  me  it  is  difficult  to  control 
the  brain's  fireworks  of  indignation,  contempt  and 
scorn.  Then  the  nervous  strain  of  thinking  which  ball 
to  fire  first  sends  the  heart  into  the  battle,  and  when 
she  patted  my  cheek,  I  felt  very  much  like  the  sailor 
who  had  been  shipwrecked,  when  questioned  by  a 
woman  who  delighted  in  analyzing  feelings  and  emo- 
tions, she  asked  him  compassionately,  '  How  did  you 
feel,  my  poor  man,  when  the  cold  waves  broke  over 
you  ? '  '  Wet,  ma'am,  very  wet.'  Garita,  how  do  you 
manage  to  keep  on  such  friendly  terms  with  her  ?  " 

"  I  simply  do  not  say  anything.  When  she  is  in  one 
of  her  disagreeable  moods  I  quietly  look  at  her  just  as 
sorry  as  I  can.  Mr.  Boss  says  I  manage  her  better  than 
any  of  her  friends,  and  it  is  because  I  do  not  manage 
her  at  all.  I  have  learned  to  treat  her  with  indiffer- 
ence." 

Mr.  and  Mrs.  Ross  went  to  New  York  with  Uno, 
where  she  met  her  brother,  the  Captain  and  Don  Al- 
fonso; the  journey  was  uneventful;  her  father  was 
already  in  Cuba,  and  when  she  suggested  taking  Aunt 
Wauka,  Seminole  thought  she  could  not  get  along  with- 
out her,  but  Uno  knew  she  would  be  happier  with 
Thetis,  and  now  that  her  husband  and  his  mother  had 
died  there  was  nothing  to  keep  her  at  the  old  planta- 
tion home.  Her  uncle  would  not  have  her  bring  her 
intemperate  husband  there  or  she  would  have  gone  long 
ago,  for  she  was  not  happy  away  from  her  sister  Thetis. 


Uno  Who.  109 

She  had  been  like  a  mother  to  Seminole  and  her  chil- 
dren, and  they  felt  they  could  not  get  along  without 
her.  Seminole  said  that  Lady  Margaret  had  lectured 
her  because  she  was  not  a  more  devoted  mother;  that 
she  went  out  and  had  too  much  company,  leaving  her 
children  to  the  care  of  servants.  "I  thought  to  get 
Aunt  Wauka  to  come  here  and  live,  and  now  what  will 
I  do  if  you  take  her  away  ?  " 

"  Get  Meno  to  look  after  them  for  you,"  said  Uno. 

"  She  would  feel  that  she  was  out  of  her  sphere  in 
life;  perhaps  you  do  not  see  that  she  is  not  the  same 
Meno  who  taught  you." 

Before  Uno  and  her  brother  left  for  Cuba  it  was 
settled  that  Don  and  Dona  would  go  to  England,  taking 
Isla  with  them.  Lady  Margaret  was  sure  it  would  be 
a  benefit  to  Don  Pamphilo,  who  was  not  well.  They 
hoped  Uno  would  return  and  go  to  New  York  with 
them,  so  as  to  be  with  Garita  when  they  left  her. 

Uno  and  her  friends  went  to  see  the  Mother  Superior 
before  going  to  the  plantation.  The  Marquis  of  Flor- 
aine  had  been  very  liberal  in  his  donations  to  the  con- 
vent, and  as  his  son  was  interested  he  wished  to  be  able 
to  inform  his  father  as  to  the  condition  of  things  there. 

They  stopped  in  Havana.  Cobre  de  Filipe  had  not 
recovered  from  the  shock  of  Miss  Fay's  tragic  death, 
and  his  father  wished  Col.  Who  to  take  him  to  Spain 
upon  his  return,  and  he  would  spend  some  time  in 
Paris  with  his  cousins,  Ola  and  Marie.  Paulo  said 
there  was  no  doubt  of  Ola's  success,  both  as  an  actress 


no  Uno  Who. 

and  singer,  and  she  expected  to  make  her  debut  the 
coming  winter.  His  sisters  were  very  happy  in  Paris, 
and  he  improved  every  opportunity  to  visiting  them. 

At  the  plantation  the  party  found  more  to  interest 
them  than  they  anticipated.  To  begin  with,  it  was  a 
storehouse  of  Indian  relics  that  different  members  of 
the  family  had  brought  there  for  safe-keeping.  Wauka 
said  she  was  afraid  Uno  would  be  disgusted  with  her 
rubbish,  but  it  proved  a  very  valuable  collection. 
Osceola,  with  the  young  men,  set  to  work  with  a  will 
to  have  a  room  gotten  ready  for  its  reception. 

"  Uno,  you  can  connect  this  room  with  the  museum," 
said  her  brother,  Paulo ;  "  the  light  is  fine  as  well  as 
the  view  of  the  water;  this  is  the  room  for  a  library." 

"  Really,  this  is  going  to  be  a  high-toned  institution," 
said  Captain  de  Aldana. 

"And  I  see  an  opportunity  for  a  contribution  of 
books,"  said  Don  Alfonso,  "  which  I  will  remember." 

They  went  to  the  boathouse  to  see  the  curiosities 
there,  and  found  relics  of  long  ago.  There  were  fine 
boats  in  which  they  took  a  sail  and  did  not  return  until 
nightfall,  causing  Uno  anxiety. 

The  party  went  for  a  horseback  ride,  piloted  by  an 
old  overseer ;  they  galloped  on  over  mountain  and  moor, 
enjoying  the  fine  scenery  and  balmy  air. 

Captain  de  Aldana,  who  was  riding  beside  Uno,  said : 
"  Senorita,  you  have  a  great  work  to  accomplish  here 
if  you  carry  out  your  plans  to  make  this  a  charitable 
institution.  By-the-way,  what  name  shall  you  give  it, 
or  have  you  not  had  time  to  consider  that  ?  " 


Uno  Who.  in 

"  I  shall  leave  that  to  my  brother." 

"  Senorita,  it  could  not  be  in  better  hands.  He  is 
a  most  just  man.  The  humblest  man  in  our  regiment 
can  go  to  him  with  a  grievance  and  be  treated  with  the 
greatest  kindness  and  consideration." 

The  rest  of  the  party  had  arrived  at  the  house  a  little 
in  advance  of  Uno  and  the  Captain.  As  she  rode  into 
the  yard  Don  Alfonso  said :  "  Here  comes  our  genus 
loci." '  She  thanked  him,  saying :  "  The  presiding 
spirit  of  a  nameless  place."  She  then  turned  to  her 
brother  and  said :  "  Colonel,  will  you  do  me  the  honor 
of  giving  this  place  its  name  ?  " 

The  men  had  all  dismounted  and  were  standing  be- 
side their  horses.  As  Uno  sat  in  her  saddle  she  waved 
her  hand  to  the  servants  to  wait.  On  the  broad  piazza 
were  her  aunts,  Thetis  and  Wauka.  At  one  end  of  the 
piazza  stood  the  servants  with  their  daintily  laid  table 
spread  with  viands  for  an  open  air  lunch.  It  was  a  pic- 
turesque scene.  All  was  silence  for  a  few  moments  ex- 
cept the  restless  tramping  of  the  horses.  All  bared 
their  heads  as  the  Colonel  turned  to  his  sister  and  said : 
'•'  I  call  it,  Uno,  Deo  non  fortuna  "  (from  God,  not 
from  fortune). 

Uno  said :  "  In  God's  name,  it  shall  be  used  for  his 
deserving  poor." 

Then  her  father  offered  up  a  prayer.  The  evening 
was  passed  in  talking  over  what  had  best  be  done,  and 
in  the  morning  they  departed  for  Florida,  leaving 
Osceola  and  his  sisters  to  carry  out  the  plans. 


H2  Uno  Who. 


CHAPTER  VIIL 
"  The  air  was  full  of  farewells." 

THE  parting  with  BO  many  of  her  friends  had  a 
very  depressing  effect  upon  Garita,  and  caused  Mr.  Ross 
to  give  his  consent  that  she  should  spend  a  portion  of 
the  summer  with  her  brothers  in  Saratoga.  She  re- 
mained there  until  August,  when,  in  order  to  keep 
peace,  she  went  to  Xewport,  and  TJno  with  Senora  de 
Vega  went  traveling,  as  this  seemed  the  opportunity  of 
her  seeing  something  of  America. 

While  in  Xew  York,  Uno  received  a  letter  from 
Garita,  asking  her  to  come  to  Boston  without  delay,  as 
she  was  intending  to  leave  there  as  early  in  the  fall  as 
possible.  Senora  de  Yega  wished  to  visit  that  city, 
but  to  live  in  a  retired  place,  as  she  did  not  care  to 
meet  strangers. 

Garita's  visit  to  Xewport  had  been  far  from  pleasant. 
Mrs.  Estaugh's  jealousy  knew  no  bounds.  She  frankly 
told  Mrs.  Ross  that  her  beauty  was  simply  maddening, 
and  that  men  did  not  take  their  eyes  off  her. 

"Uno,  I  did  not  know  what  to  say.  I  only  looked 
at  her.  Then  she  said :  '  Garita,  you  need  not  put  on 
that  pathetic  look  with  me.  It  may  work  with  my  hus- 


Uno  Who.  113 

band  and  other  men,  but  I  do  not  wish  you  to  infer 
from  this  remark  he  cares  for  you  or  that  I  think  so, 
but  you  draw  the  attention  of  men  by  your  eyes/  I 
laughed,  and  said,  'Maud,  get  me  some  blue  glasses.' 
Then  she  was  angry.  I  said,  'Maud,  have  I  ever  in 
word,  thought  or  deed  given  you  reason  to  talk  like  this 
to  me  ? '  She  said,  '  No,  Garita,  but  you  will  be  one 
woman  in  a  thousand  if  your  head  is  not  turned  by  the 
flattery  and  homage  you  receive;  if  you  were  poor,  you 
would  have  a  fortune  in  your  beauty.' 

'"  I  said,  '  Mrs.  Estaugh,  beware ;  you  are  going  too 
far.  This  talk  is  unworthy  of  you,  there  is  no  telling 
how  high  up  the  ladder  of  fame  a  woman  of  your  at- 
tainments will  climb.  You  are  surprising  your  friends 
by  your  elocutionary  powers.  I  am  called  a  fine  elo- 
cutionist, and  have  given  many  recitations  for  my 
friends  towards  charity.'  At  this  she  colored,  saying: 
'  There  seems  to  be  no  end  to  your  accomplishments, 
but,  Garita,  are  you  aware  that  the  business  connections 
between  my  father  and  Eoss  will  end  the  first  of  Jan- 
uary, when  he  will  have  the  humiliating  position  of 
looking  for  something  to  do  ? ' 

"  I  said,  '  Oh,  no,  Mrs.  Estaugh,  please  reverse  that. 
He  will  be  leaving  the  humiliating  position  for  one 
that  is  fitted  to  his  wife's  station  in  life.'  'Then, 
Garita,  you  have  been  preparing  for  this  change?' 

"I  said  my  father's  and  mother's  wealth  does  not 
make  it  necessary  for  their  children  to  prepare  for 
anything  but  death.  She  said  I  hope  you  will  not 
8 


ii4  Uno  Who. 

leave  Boston.  I  told  her  I  would  not  have  to  leave 
any  place  I  chose  to  live  in.  We  have  been  here  now 
nearly  two  years,  and  I  feel  quite  at  home.  She  was 
baffled,  but  I  have  not  come  to  the  end  of  my  story. 

"  She  had  arranged  for  a  musicale  that  evening,  and 
I  felt  that  she  had  been  trying  to  disturb  my  mind  so 
that  I  would  not  sing  well.  I  told  Mr.  Ross  I  wished 
to  give  Maud  a  surprise,  and  just  before  it  was  time 
for  her  recitation  to  call  upon  me.  I  did  not  tell  him 
of  our  disagreeable  talk,  and  am  not  going  to.  Uno,  I 
do  not  think  I  ever  sang  so  well  as  I  did  that  evening, 
nor  recited  better.  Mr.  Ross  behaved  beautifully,  help- 
ing me  in  every  way.  I  went  to  Maud  and  put  my 
hand  in  hers.  She  was  cold,  and  her  face  would  have 
chilled  a  summer's  day.  Her  morning's  work  had  re- 
coiled upon  herself,  as  I  intended  it  should,  for  her 
recitation  was  almost  a  failure. 

"Mr.  Ross  was  delighted  with  the  attention  I  re- 
ceived. Now,  TJno,  I  am  ready  to  leave  Boston.  There 
is  no  reason  why  I  should  live  this  kind  of  life.  Strife 
corrodes  the  purest  mind.  I  find  myself  worried  and 
irritated  at  I  do  not  know  what,  and  I  want  your  as- 
sistance in  perfecting  my  plans  to  leave  here." 

"Garita,  you  are  like  your  mother,  long  suffering, 
but  when  you  have  borne  enough  you  know  how  to  act. 
There  is  no  telling  what  sort  of  unexplainable  position 
that  woman  might  place  you  in.  What  does  Mr.  Ross 
say  to  this?" 

"  He  now  admits  that  Mr.  Ayling  has  acted  strangely 


Uno  Who.  115 

in  regard  to  their  affairs,  and  he  has  consented  to  close 
up  their  connections  and  go  abroad  with  me.  He  says 
there  is  no  doubt  but  Maud  is  at  the  bottom  of  all  the 
trouble.  She  has  been  here  and  asked  me  about  our  in- 
tentions. I  only  looked  my  answer." 

"  Uno,  she  fears  you,  and  Mr.  Eoss  says  he  is  glad 
she  has  found  her  equal.  You  understand  in  what 
sense  he  means  that.  He  thinks  her  sincere  in  being 
sorry  to  part  with  us,  but  it  is  her  jealousy.  She  tries 
to  conceal  it,  but  it  is  devouring  her.  She  has  not  been 
pleased  with  the  attention  Mr.  Estaugh's  family  has 
shown  me,  nor  even  the  fond  manner  in  which  her 
mother  treats  me." 

Garita  had  sent  Nannette  to  bring  Senora  de  Vega  to 
her  hotel,  and  she  was  sitting  in  a  remote  part  of  the 
room  when  Mrs.  Estaugh  came  to  make  her  morning 
call. 

"  My  dear  Uno,  this  is  a  very  great  and  unexpected 
pleasure,"  and  she  affectionately  kissed  her  and  Garita. 
"  I  hope  you  have  not  come  to  hasten  Garita's  departure. 
You  cannot  imagine  how  lonely  I  will  be  without  her. 
My  friends  say  they  will  have  hopes  of  seeing  me  now 
that  you  are  going  away." 

"  Maud,  how  did  they  know  we  were  going?  Neither 
Mr.  Ross  or  I  have  told  it.  Have  you  told  where  we  are 
going  ?  " 

She  colored  at  this  spirited  remark  from  Garita. 

"Uno,  my  brother  is  home  from  college,  and  he  can 
assist  my  father.  Of  course  he  will  not  do  all  that 


n6  Uno  Who. 

Eoss  has  done,  but  he  wishes  his  son  to  know  about 
his  estate,  that  he  can  manage  it  if  he  should  be  taken 
from  us.  You  see,  Uno,  we  are  an  old  Boston  family; 
my  father  inherited  his  estates." 

"  Mrs.  Estaugh,  I  have  often  heard  you  speak  of 
your  father's  family.  They  must  be  very  exclusive, 
for  I  have  never  seen  any  of  them.  I  hear  your  mother 
was  a  school  teacher  from  way  down  in  Maine.  As  far 
as  Mr.  Eoss  is  concerned,  it  may  be  for  your  father's 
interest  to  have  him  leave  Boston.  Business  men  do 
that  sometimes  when  an  employe  knows  more  than  they 
care  to  have  him." 

"  Uno,  I  see  you  are  on  the  war-path  again." 

"  Yes,  Mrs.  Estaugh,  I  think  I  have  told  you  I  en- 
joyed crossing  swords  with  you.  Mr.  Eoss  has  made 
a  very  favorable  impression  upon  his  wife's  family, 
and  they  desire  them  to  live  in  England,  so  in  the 
future  he  will  be  a  gentleman  of  leisure.  He  has  much 
to  thank  you  for." 

"  Then,  Garita,  you  really  intend  to  leave  Boston  for 
good  ?  "  She  only  looked  her  reply.  "  If  you  are  going 
to  England  to  live,  I  shall  give  a  reception  for  you. 
I  never  expect  to  see  Uno  after  you  have  gone,  much  as 
I  would  like  to.  It  really  makes  me  feel  sad  to  think 
of  your  going,  and  what  will  I  do  without  Eoss?  He 
has  been  like  a  brother  to  me." 

"  Use  your  brother  as  you  have  him,"  said  Uno. 

"  He  would  not  let  me." 

"Mrs.   Estaugh,  if  Garita  were  to  remain  here  I 


Uno  Who.  117 

think  she  would  take  the  advice  of  friends  and  call 
upon  your  husband  for  attention  that  would  give  you 
cause  for  jealousy.  One  thing  has  always  surprised 
me  in  regard  to  you.  You  boast  of  your  culture,  but 
I  have  never  met  a  more  uncultivated  heart  than  yours. 
You  have  lovely  manners,  and  in  society  you  are  a 
charming  woman,  but  you  will  say  the  most  cutting 
and  unkind  things  I  ever  heard  come  from  a  woman's 
lips.  All  our  conversations  of  an  unpleasant  nature 
have  come  from  remarks  of  a  disagreeable  and  cutting 
sarcasm  in  regard  to  Garita  and  Mr.  Ross.  You  know 
she  came  from  a  home  of  cultivated  hearts  from  which 
true  politeness  springs." 

"  Uno,  I  think  this  our  parting  battle.  I  will  see  you 
again,  Garita,  in  regard  to  the  reception,"  and  with 
the  air  of  one  who  felt  they  had  no  defense  to  offer, 
she  took  her  departure. 

Mr.  and  Mrs.  Estaugh  accompanied  them  to  New 
York,  and  they  at  once  sailed  for  England. 

Uno  experienced  a  sense  of  relief  in  knowing  that 
Garita  was  with  her  family,  and  that  she  would  not  be 
called  upon,  for  a  time  at  least,  to  perform  any  more 
disagreeable  duties. 

After  several  weeks  of  travel,  she  and  Senora  de 
Vega  reached  "  Sunnyside,"  that  haven  of  rest,  tired 
and  travel  worn. 

They  found  Meno  there  to  greet  them.  She  had 
been  installed  as  housekeeper  upon  Dona's  departure. 
They  did  not  remain  there  very  long,  as  Uno  wished 


n8  Uno  Who. 

to  spend  the  holidays  with  her  father  on  the  plantation. 
She,  therefore,  took  Senora  de  Vega  and  her  no-account 
Evelyn,  for  whom  she  now  felt  she  had  a  home,  and 
went  to  Cuba. 

Her  father  had  set  every  one  to  work,  and  it  was  re- 
marked that  things  were  beginning  to  look  up  at 
"  Medicine-Man's  "  home. 

Senora  was  delighted.  She  sat  down  by  the  window 
of  the  room  selected  by  Col.  Who  as  a  library,  and 
looked  out  upon  the  sea,  saying:  "Here  will  I  rest, 
with  your  permission,  until  I  go  to  my  darlings.  From 
my  room  there  is  a  fine  view  of  the  mountains;  the 
whole  place  is  soul-inspiring.  I  feel  that  my  best  work 
will  be  done  here." 

"  Senora,  I  am  happy  in  being  able  to  give  you  this 
pleasure;  I  will  remain  with  my  aunt  this  winter,  and 
can  see  you  often.  She  is  very  happy,  now  that  Cobre 
is  regaining  his  health,  and  they  write  that  Mrs.  Fay 
is  slowly  recovering  from  the  terrible  shock.  Cobre 
will  be  with  them  in  London  this  winter,  and  I  would 
not  be  surprised  if  he  consoled  himself  with  the  sister 
of  his  lost  one ;  stranger  things  have  happened/' 

"Uno,  I  am  prepared  to  believe  anything  your  im- 
agination suggests,  and  in  order  to  prove  to  you  that 
it  is  not  my  imagination,  I  wish  you  to  look  out  of 
the  window  and  see  Seminole  and  her  family  driving 
into  the  yard." 

They  had  a  merry  time.  Thetis  wondered  if  she 
was  going  to  be  persecuted  by  those  Arabs  very  often. 


Uno  Who.  119 

Wauka  said:  "Now,  don't  worry,  sister;  I  will  look 
after  them." 

"  But,  Wauka,  you  will  have  to  help  me.  What  am 
I  to  do  with  these  green  negroes?  I  told  Osceola  the 
other  day  I  hoped  all  the  relations  would  not  honor 
us  at  one  time,  for  there  were  not  dishes  enough  to  go 
around.  You  will  have  to  go  to  that  museum  and  get 
some  of  Uno's  pottery;  then  I  guess  they  will  remember 
to  buy  dishes  and  chairs.  This  dining-room  will  speak 
for  itself.  Take  your  choice  of  curiosities.  I  could 
have  gotten  along  if  Senora  de  Felipe  and  her  airy 
daughters  were  not  coming.  I  do  not  like  this  kind  of 
charity  work.  I  am  the  hardest  worked  slave  on  the 
place,  and  think  I  will  have  one  of  the  cabins  cleaned 
up  so  it  won't  smell  of  color,  and  live  there  by  myself. 
I  don't  like  this  Fourth  of  July  all  the  time." 

"  Oh,  Aunt  Thetis,"  laughed  Seminole's  oldest  boy, 
"they  don't  have  Fourth  of  July  in  Cuba.  Come  on, 
brother,  your  aunt  is  wound  up,  and  we  had  better  git." 

The  dinner  was  fine,  and  the  dishes  afforded  the 
greatest  amusement.  Uno  said:  "I  must  confess  1 
felt  a  little  anxious,  knowing  the  dishes  had  been  for- 
gotten, but  I  knew  Thetis  was  a  wonderful  manager, 
and  she  has  made  the  table  look  odd  and  pretty." 

They  showered  so  many  compliments  upon  Thetis 
that  she  came  near  forgetting  she  was  sitting  on  a 
stool  instead  of  her  straight-backed  chair. 

In  Havana,  Uno  found  a  letter  awaiting  her  from 
Garita.  They  were  at  the  ancestral  home  of  Dona  in 


I2O  Uno  Who. 

England.  She  had  been  shocked  at  the  change  in  her 
father,  and  they  would  soon  go  to  Spain,  where  she 
would  write  at  greater  length. 

Uno  was  in  the  whirl  of  fashionable  life  at  Havana. 
Her  aunt  was  a  bright  woman,  who  lived  for  her  hus- 
band and  children,  and  she  made  their  home  a  center 
of  attraction.  Mercedita  was  a  general  favorite,  and 
her  cousin  Uno  was  devoted  to  her.  She  had  often 
wished  that  Lord  Galvin,  who  had  once  been  her  ad- 
mirer, could  see  Mercedita,  but  he  lived  in  England, 
and  there  was  no  prospect  of  their  ever  meeting. 

Uno  had  many  letters  from  abroad,  urging  her  to 
get  her  father  to  live  with  her  in  Spain,  and  not  con- 
fine herself  to  the  work  she  had  laid  out,  but  she  went 
quietly  about  perfecting  her  plans  for  the  new  institu- 
tion, asking  advice  only  of  her  father.  She  had  re- 
ceived letters  from  Garita  during  the  winter.  They 
had  gone  to  Seville,  where,  at  the  castle  of  the  Marquis 
of  Floraine,  who  was  also  very  feeble,  they  would  re- 
main during  the  winter. 

While  in  England  Lord  Galvin  had  called  upon  her. 
"  He  inquired  about  you,  and  said  he  had  no  doubt  but 
that  you  would  give  most  of  your  fortune  to  the  church. 
I  told  him  that  you  would  not,  and  explained  why.  He 
and  your  brother  were  invited  to  dine  at  Aunt  Mar- 
garet's. He  said  had  he  known  that  your  brother  was 
going  to  America  he  would  have  accompanied  him,  and 
said,  '  Let  me  know,  Colonel,  the  next  time  you  go/  " 


Uno  Who.  121 

Uno  dropped  the  letter  as  she  thought,  then  will  be 
my  time  for  matchmaking. 

Garita  wrote  that  Isla's  devotion  to  her  father  was 
very  beautiful.  The  bitterness  that  was  grafted  in  the 
child's  rature  was  fast  being  rooted  out,  giving,  in  its 
place,  a  soft  sweet  expression. 

Her  aunt  came  to  see  her  while  we  were  in  Madrid. 
She  said  to  Isla  that  she  was  very  much  improved,  to 
which  she  replied  with  a  great  deal  of  dignity :  "  That 
it  was  the  sweet  and  gentle  atmosphere  in  which  she 
lived,  and  the  help  she  received  from  loving  friends." 

She  hoped  Uno  would  not  become  so  infatuated  with 
her  work  that  she  would  neglect  writing  to  her  friends. 
"  Always  remember  that  a  timely  written  letter  is  a 
link  in  the  chain  of  affection." 

As  TJno  folded  the  letter,  she  thought  there  was  not 
much  danger  of  her  neglecting  her  friends.  She 
wanted  them  all  to  know  how  bright  and  complete  her 
life  was,  and  that  she  would  not  exchange  it  for  a 
throne. 

She  went  to  the  convent  to  have  a  talk  with  the 
Mother  Superior,  and  take  time  to  think.  It  was  five 
o'clock  in  the  morning  that  she  sat  down  in  that  little 
world  of  sweet  sounds.  The  sisters  were  in  the  chapel 
at  mass ;  their  voices  with  the  organ  came  in  waves  with 
the  soft  morning  air.  As  she  sat  enjoying  the  peace, 
sweet  peace;  peace  holy  and  divine,  and  the  birds,  it 
seemed,  of  all  nations  had  gathered  there,  their  beauty 
and  their  chivalry ;  each  one's  song  seemed  sweeter  than 


122  Unq  Who. 

its  predecessor ;  then  such  a  chorus ;  for  a  time  she  gave 
herself  up  to  all  this  sweetness ;  then  arose  and  entered 
the  chapel,  where  it  seemed  like  entering  into  spirit 
life,  and  being  in  the  glorious  company  of  Heaven. 


Uno  Who.  123 


CHAPTER  IX. 

"Facts  and  crimes  are  concealed, 
Truths  and  treasures  are  hidden." 

WHEN  at  the  plantation  Uno  was  constantly  looking, 
expecting  to  find  something,  she  hardly  knew  what,  but 
she  inspected  every  place  it  would  be  possible  to  secrete 
anything  in.  Her  grandfather  had  said  the  marriage 
certificate  was  in  Cuba  at  her  uncle's.  Thetis  had 
found  the  books  and  music  which  had  been  sent  to  her 
mother  in  Florida.  Her  father  had  every  little  trinket 
packed,  and  she  found  them  in  the  attic,  but  she  could 
not  find  the  marriage  certificate  nor  any  clew  to  her 
mother's  maiden  name. 

Uno  talked  with  her  father  in  regard  to  her  feelings. 
He  said  he  was  in  the  came  state  of  mind,  and  was 
sure  he  would  succeed  in  finding  that  "truth  which 
had  been  crushed  to  earth,"  and  together,  my  daughter, 
we  will  "  shake  off  the  dust  of  ages." 

"  While  you  are  away  I  will  concentrate  my  thoughts 
on  this  subject,  and  am  sure  I  will  be  drawn  to  it;  the 
magnet  may  not  be  strong  enough  for  us  both." 

Soon  after  her  return  from  the  convent  she  received 
a  message  from  her  father  to  come  to  the  plantation. 
He  met  her  at  the  station,  and  together  they  drove 
about  that  he  might  talk  with  her.  He  said  that  in 


124  Uno  Who. 

the  room  where  his  father  slept  was  a  sort  of  closet 
built  on  the  wall.  It  went  up  to  the  ceiling,  but  the 
doors  did  not  go  up  to  the  top  of  this  closet.  Just 
above  the  top  of  the  doors,  inside,  was  a  board  very 
firmly  put  in.  It  had  hooks  all  over  it  for  hanging 
clothes  as  well  as  on  the  wall.  This  left  a  space  over 
the  doors  firmly  enclosed.  He  took  off  tne  boards  and 
found  there  two  boxes,  one  of  which  was  nailed  up  and 
the  other  locked.  The  key  was  in  one  corner  on  the 
shelf.  He  found  his  mother's  marriage  certificate,  also 
a  deed  and  tax  receipts  to  the  property  of  the  Castle  by 
the  sea.  There  were  many  letters  from  members  of 
the  family  in  Spain  which  he  did  not  take  time  to  read, 
but  his  mother's  maiden  name  was  Madeline  Estabanez. 

They  drove  down  to  the  Castle  by  the  sea  and  up  the 
road  which  circled  around  the  house,  and  which  had  been 
kept  in  good  condition,  although  the  house  had  not 
been  inhabited  for  years.  He  had  often  driven  around 
there  when  a  boy,  and  it  was  called  the  haunted  house. 
He  was  told  that  the  people  who  owned  it  lived  in 
Spain,  and  his  uncle  had  the  care  of  the  estate. 

He  remembered  having  said  to  his  father  that  it  was 
a  pity  there  was  no  one  living  in  that  beautiful  house, 
and  he  wondered  that  his  uncle  did  not  rent  it  as  it 
would  be  beter  for  the  property.  He  replied  that  peo- 
ple did  not  like  to  live  where  a  family  had  died  of 
yellow  fever.  He  felt  sure  Thetis  knew  all  about  their 
mother,  but  was  very  peculiar  about  telling  anything 
that  she  thought  a  person  wished  to  know.  She  having 


Uno  Who.  125 

lived  at  their  uncle's  when  Wauka  was  born,  it  was 
quite  natural  they  should  talk  about  it,  as  she  hacl 
lived  with  him  of  late  years. 

When  Uno  and  her  father  arrived  at  the  house  it  was 
quite  dark,  and  the  family  had  been  to  dinner.  Thetis 
was  sleeping  in  her  high,  straight-back  chair.  It  was 
her  habit  to  retire  early,  but  when  Osceola  and  Uno  were 
out,  she  always  waited  until  they  were  safely  housed, 
then  made  some  excuse  for  being  about,  fearing  they 
would  think  she  was  anxious  on  their  account. 

She  started  up  as  they  entered  the  dining-room,  say- 
ing :  "  I  expect  your  dinner  is  all  spoiled,"  while  at  the 
same  time  she  had  taken  good  care  that  it  should  not 
be. 

Uno  was  delighted  to  find  that  she  had  taken  a  nap 
and  was  in  a  talkative  mood.  She  said :  "  Come,  Aunt 
Thetis,  sit  down  here  and  I  will  tell  you  about  my  visit." 

She  sat  down  on  the  lounge,  Uno  on  one  side  of  her 
and  Wauka  on  the  other.  The  dining-room  was  very 
large,  and  Thetis  most  always  had  a  fire  in  the  large 
fireplace  to  keep  out  the  dampness,  and  in  the  country,  to 
her,  a  fireplace  without  a  fire  was  like  a  home  without  a 
mother,  and  she  would  have  everything  cheerful  and 
pleasant,  even  if  she  had  to  scold  for  it. 

So  they  sat  down  with  the  firelight  dancing  and 
flickering  as  if  enjoying  the  fun  of  Uno's  plot  to  unseal 
Thetis'  lips.  She  had  little  to  say  about  the  family  in 
Havana,  for  she  knew  Thetis  did  not  care  for  them. 
She  also  cared  very  little  about  women  who  shut  them- 


126  Uno  Who. 

selves  up  in  a  nunnery  and  put  on  such  airs.  She 
was  afraid  to  speak  to  them,  and  she  did  not  think  she 
would  ever  visit  her  "  Superior  "  niece,  but  she  would 
give  all  the  information  she  could  about  any  of  the 
family  so  far  as  that  was  concerned,  as  she  was  about  the 
only  one  left  now  who  knew  anything,  and  she  would  not 
last  long  if  they  did  not  get  the  new  institution  done 
soon,  and  have  a  place  for  some  of  Uno's  proteges,  as 
they  called  themselves. 

Uno's  heart  sank  when  she  brought  up  that  subject, 
but  she  rallied,  and  slipping  her  hand  in  Thetis',  said : 
"  My  aunt  in  Havana  is  looking  up  the  ancestry  of  her 
family.  I  expect  we  shall  find  we  are  quite  somebody. 
I  always  avoid  saying  anything  about  ours,  as  I  know 
the  remark  that  will  be  made." 

"What  is  the  remark,  Uno?"  said  Thetis  with  a 
great  deal  of  spirit. 

"  Why,  auntie,  nothing,  only  that  we  are  heirs  to  the 
throne  of  a  tribe  of  played  out  Indians." 

"Uno,  you  have  never  thought  there  was  any  one 
worth  speaking  of,  but  your  mother's  family." 

"  I  have  been  trying  to  get  an  opportunity  to  tell  you 
something  I  have  learned  from  uncle,  but  there  are 
always  literary  women  and  these  proteges  around  for  the 
negroes  to  stop  work  and  look  at,  and  it  is  enough  for 
the  head  of  a  family  like  this  to  keep  everyone  at  work, 
and  see  that  things  do  not  go  to  rack  and  ruin  without 
being  expected  to  unearth  secrets,  opening  wounds  that 
have  been  healed  for  years." 


Uno  Who.  127 

'All  was  silent  for  a  few  minutes,  then  Uno  said: 
"  I  think  we  had  better  retire,  as  the  owl  will  soon  be 
chanting  his  midnight  mass." 

Osceola  sat  looking  at  the  fire  as  it  flickered  and 
crackled  and  snapped  as  if  throwing  out  sparks  of  en- 
couragement. Uno  again  rallied  and  renewed  the 
fight  for  knowledge  by  saying:  "What  a  pity 
'  Medicine-Man'  did  not  think  to  leave  information  in 
regard  to  his  ancestors  as  well  as  roots  and  herbs.  If 
I  had  been  here  I  would  have  found  the  ancestral  room 
of  his  brain,  and  he  would  have  left  me  something  be- 
side land  and  relics." 

"  Uno,  when  you  get  to  talking  you  know  not  when 
to  stop." 

"  I  am  aware  of  that,  auntie,  and  I  often  wish  I  was 
like  you,  but  I  find  out  a  good  many  things  that  you 
don't." 

"I  am  not  so  sure  of  that,  Uno,  your  uncle  knew 
more  than  you  gave  him  credit  for.  I  have  a  paper 
given  him  by  his  oldest  brother,  the  Chief.  It  is  a  his- 
tory of  all  the  tribe." 

"Dear  auntie,"  said  Uno,  as  she  fondly  pressed  her 
hand  and  turned  so  as  to  look  her  in  the  face.  "  Did 
he  say  anything  about  your  mother's  illustrious 
family?" 

"Yes." 

"Does  my  father  and  Wauka  look  like  her?" 

"Yes." 

"Will  you  tell  me  about  her.?." 


128  Uno  Who. 

"Yes." 

"Where  was  she  born?" 

"In  the  Castle  by  the  sea/' 

"Were  they  Cubans?" 

"No,"  came  short  and  quick. 

Uno  dared  not  stop  and  give  her  time  to  think,  so 
she  said:  "I  suppose  they  were  of  the  sort  of  people 
who  hardly  know  what  they  are." 

"  They  were  Spaniards,  and  came  here  in  their  early 
married  life.  The  Castle  was  built  for  them.  Their 
three  children  were  born  there,  two  boys  and  a  girl, 
My  mother's  name  was  Madeline  Estabanez.  Uncle's 
youngest  sister  was  here  living  with  him.  She  had 
been  married  but  a  short  time  when  her  husband  was 
killed  in  the  war,  then  she  came  here.  She  and  mother 
became  friends ;  father  came  often  to  Cuba. 

"As  a  seventh  son  he  was  not  allowed  to  do  any  of 
the  fighting.  Those  sevenths  were  all  well  cared  for, 
and  were  spoiled,  except  your  father  whom  I  brought  up. 

"Father  was  tall  and  handsome.  His  sister  was 
younger  than  he  and  near  the  age  of  mother.  Her 
brothers  were  older,  and  they  were  all  friends  until 
they  found  he  wanted  to  marry  mother.  He  got  her 
to  deceive  her  family,  and  the  friendship  continued  to 
all  appearance.  All  the  time  she  was  having  her  clothes 
and  valuables  brought  here  by  slaves  they  had  bribed. 
Uncle  knew  nothing  of  it. 

"  She  went  from  this  house  with  his  sister  and  met 
father  in  Havana.  They  were  married.  His  sister,  and 


Uno  Who.  129 

the  man  who  drove  the  horse  were  witnesses.  The  man 
is  living  on  this  place  now.  He  and  his  wife  know  all 
the  family  secrets.  They  have  been  true  to  uncle,  and 
he  has  rewarded  them.  I  think  he  is  a  Cuban. 

"  When  the  Estabanez  family  died  of  yellow  fever, 
he  told  the  slaves  that  Senor  had  recovered  and  gone 
to  Spain,  leaving  everything  in  uncle's  care  for  his 
daughter. 

"  This  man  helped  uncle  and  his  brothers,  the  Chief 
and  father,  to  bury  the.  family.  They  opened  the  wall 
toward  the  Sea  in  the  cellar,  and  after  excavating, 
shoved  the  coffins  which  they  had  made  in  the  aper- 
ture, and  walled  up  the  place,  marking  each  grave. 

"He  told  of  the  house  being  haunted  and  the  family 
not  buried  to  protect  the  property.  They  took  from 
the  house  all  the  valuables  and  brought  them  here, 
uncle  did  not  know  what  father  did  with  them,  but 
said  they  were  in  this  house. 

"  I  have  now  come  >  the  saddest  part  of  my  story," 
continued  Thetis.  "  Mother  often  asked  my  father  to 
let  her  come  here,  but  he  would  not.  At  first  she 
grieved  so  much  that  he  thought  she  would  die,  and 
he  had  his  sister  come  home. 

"  When  you  was  born  there  was  great  rejoicing  "  (ad- 
dressing Osceola).  "You  were  not  called  Osceola  un- 
til your  brother,  the  Chief,  died.  Then  you  were  the 
first  seventh  son  to  take  that  name.  Before  Wauka  was 
born  mother  wished  to  come  here,  and  I  now  think 
9 


130  Uno  Who. 

father  foretold  her  death,  he  seemed  so  anxious  to 
gratify  her  every  wish. 

"We  took  the  baby  (your  father,  who  has  been 
watching  the  fire  light  so  intently),  and  came  here. 
Mother  sent  word  to  the  Castle  she  was  here. 

"In  a  few  days  her  mother  came,  and  such  a  meet- 
ing I  never  want  to  witness  again.  Mother  asked  if 
she  was  sure  she  had  been  forgiven,  and  if  her  father 
would  only  let  her  come  home  to  die.  Her  mother 
assured  her  it  was  not  her  fault  that  she  had  not  been 
home  long  ago,  but  my  child,  you  know  the  Estabanez 
family  pride.  '  He  does  not  know  that  I  am  here. 
Do  my  brothers  ever  speak  of  their  sister  ? '  Her 
mother  laid  her  head  on  the  pillow  beside  her,  and 
with  their  arms  about  each  other  they  wept  tears  of 
joy  and  sorrow." 

Uno  and  Wauka  were  crying.  Osceola  wiped  his 
eyes,  but  Thetis  went  on  to  the  end,  as  if  she  had  nerved 
herself  up  to  a  task  she  had  long  been  dreading. 

"  Mother  died  and  left  Wauka  to  me.  I  was  twelve 
years  old.  Word  was  sent  to  the  Castle  of  her  death, 
but  there  was  no  response.  She  is  buried  on  this  place 
beside  father." 

Thetis  arose  with  the  air  of  one  who  had  performed 
an  unpleasant  duty,  and  without  a  word  retired. 

Among  the  letters  from  Spain  was  one  from  a  sister. 
She  wrote  that  she  had  not  informed  the  family  of 
Madeline's  marrying  an  Indian,  as  she  would  not  re- 
ceive any  mercy  at  the  hands  of  the  proud  Estabanez 


Uno  Who.  131 

family,  even  if  he  were  the  brother  of  a  Chief,  and 
that  it  was  a  pity,  for  her  father  would,  in  a  few  years, 
return  to  Spain  to  live. 

"His  uncle  was  very  feeble  since  the  death  of  his 
only  son  which  leaves  your  husband  heir  to  the  title 
and  estates.  They  will  more  than  equal  your  own 
fortune  and  titles." 

She  hoped  she  would  be  able  to  see  her  daughter 
and  be  a  comfort  to  her.  They  should  remember  she 
was  but  a  child. 

There  were  many  letters  proving  they  were  a  family 
of  position,  and  Osoeola  felt  they  would  have  no  trouble 
in  establishing  their  claim  in  Spain.  He  advised  keep- 
ing the  affair  a  profound  secret  until  he  and  Uno  re- 
turned from  Madrid,  where  they  would  advise  with 
Paulo  what  course  to  pursue. 

Their  first  duty  upon  their  arrival  at  Madrid  was 
to  Don  Pamphilo,  who  was  at  the  ancestral  home  of 
the  Marquis  of  Floraine.  Although  prepared  to  see 
a  very  sick  man,  they  were  unprepared  to  find  him  so 
near  the  time  when  he  would  receive  the  crown  of  life 
given  to  all  the  faithful. 

(Mr.  and  Mrs.  Ross  were  there,  and  he  was  devoting 
himself  to  her  father.  She  did  not  think  they  would 
ever  return  to  America,  and  Uno  felt  like  giving  a 
sigh  of  relief.  Still  she  felt  in  her  heart  of  hearts  it 
was  only  a  little  longer  way  to  fate. 

Uno  remained  with  the  family  while  her  father  and 
brother,  as  gentlemen  of  fortune,  went  looking  for, 


132  Uno  Who. 

their  good  berth,  and  they  had  less  trouble  in  finding 
that  birth  and  fortune  had  joined  to  make  them  greater 
than  they  anticipated. 

Don  Pamphilo  was  very  much  interested  in  the  his- 
tory Uno  had  given  him  of  their  discovery,  and  when 
after  days  of  search  for  the  truth  Osceola  returned 
and  told  them  he  had  found  he  belonged  to  the  nobil- 
ity of  Spain,  through  both  his  grandfather  and  grand- 
mother, Don  Pamphilo  became  so  interested  that  it 
helped  for  the  time  being  to  throw  off  the  depression 
of  spirit  that  had  prevailed  in  the  family. 

His  grandmother's  name  was  Pezula.  She  was  a  first 
cousin  of  Captain  Pezula  of  Florida,  whose  son  Semi- 
nole  had  married.  "Then  she  has  married  her  third 
cousin,"  said  Garita. 

"  The  only  wonder  to  me  is,"  said  Don  Pamphilo, 
"  people  do  not  marry  nearer  relatives  than  that  in 
going  to  a  new  country.  After  a  time  they  neglect 
writing  to  their  friends;  they  become  absorbed  in  busi- 
ness, and  do  not  take  the  time  to  visit  their  old  homes, 
consequently  their  children  grow  up  not  knowing  who 
or  what  they  are." 

It  was  several  days  before  Don  Pamphilo  ceased  to 
talk  at  intervals  of  Osceola's  mother. 

One  afternoon  Osceola,  Paulo  and  Uno  were  in  the 
room.  Garita  was  in  her  accustomed  seat  at  her  father's 
feet,  with  her  mother  at  his  side.  The  invalid  sur- 
prised them  all  by  saying :  "  Osceola,  this  brings  out 
the  prophecy  of  your  grandfather,  that  '  truth  which 


Uno  Who.  133 

had  been  crushed  to  earth  would  throw  off  the  dust  of 
ages,  and  honor  the  descendants  of  old  You-Know- 
Who.'  Paulo,  had  you  thought  of  it?" 

"No,  Don  Pamphilo." 

He  then  looked  at  TJno,  and  said:  "I  know  you 
have."  He  then  gently  stroked  the  hair  of  the  child 
at  his  feet  and  yet  more  kindly  stroked  her  cheek. 

Isla  had  not  been  told  that  her  guardian  would  not 
get  well.  She  had  not  spent  so  much  time  in  his  room 
since  Uno  was  there.  The  fear  of  intruding  by  too 
many  being  in  the  room  had  kept  her  away.  The 
invalid's  chair  had  been  drawn  to  the  window.  It 
opened  upon  a  broad  balcony  upon  which  Isla  was 
sitting. 

It  was  the  close  of  a  very  warm  day.  The  scenery 
was  fine.  Light  and  shadow  as  they  fell  over  the 
beautifully  cultivated  grounds  seemed  to  have  a  cool- 
ing influence. 

Isla  came  in  through  the  window,  and  stood  by  her 
guardian's  chair.  He  said :  "  What  have  you  been 
thinking  about?" 

"Grandfather,  I  was  thinking  this  sunset  was  like 
the  decline  of  a  beautiful  life.  It  arose  so  bright  this 
morning,  gradually  until  it  reached  the  zenith  of  its 
power,  giving  light  and  heat  to  the  bad  as  well  as  to 
the  good.  Then  it  began  to  descend,  all  the  time  doing 
its  work.  When  it  closes,  leaving  behind  that  beauti- 
ful glow  that  good  works  leave  when  a  true  worker  of 
time  departs  from  this  life.  The  sun  goes  down,  but 


134  Uno  Who. 

it  rises  again.  Our  lives  go  out,  but  they  rise  again 
to  receive  their  reward.  The  Bible  tells  us,  '  The  Son 
of  God  shall  come  in  the  glory  of  His  Father,  and  He 
will  reward  every  one  according  to  his  work.' " 

Don  Pamphilo  broke  the  silence  by  saying :  "  Isla. 
do  you  know  I  am  going  to  leave  you  very  soon?" 

She  looked  at  him  an  instant,  then  dropped  on  her 
knees  at  his  side,  burying  her  face  in  her  hands.  He 
laid  his  hand  on  her  head  as  she  sobbed  convulsively. 

In  a  few  minutes  she  looked  in  his  face  and  said: 
"Yes,  grandfather,  going  to  receive  the  reward  of  the 
righteous.  No  one  has  told  me,  but  I  have  thought 
when  the  doctors  did  not  cure  you  it  was  because  they 
could  not,  and  I  have  so  longed  to  ask  you  what  you 
wished  me  to  do  when  you  are  gone,  and  if  you  see  my 
father  and  mother  to  bear  them  sweet  messages  of  my 
love.  Oh,  grandfather,  how  can  we  live  without  you  ?  " 

They  were  all  in  tears.  Dona  was  about  to  go  to 
her,  fearing  it  would  excite  him,  but  he  put  up  his 
hand  to  stop. 

"  My  child,  you  will  live  with  Dona  and  be  a  comfort 
to  her;  she  will  be  in  one  sense  alone  and  will  need 
you,  while  you  need  her  protection.  She  will  carry 
out  my  plans  in  regard  to  your  education.  You  have 
been  a  good  girl,  Isla,  and  I  love  you  very  much. 
Every  member  of  Dona's  family  and  mine  are  your 
friends,  so  you  have  nothing  to  fear.  I  have  placed 
your  affairs  in  Lord  Oughton's  hands,  as  he  is  a  most 


Uno  Who.  135 

just  man.  When  I  am  gone,  you  will  go  to  England 
and  live  with  Lady  Margaret." 

She  was  on  her  knees,  her  face  still  buried  in  her 
hands  on  the  arm  of  his  chair,  his  hand  on  her  head. 
When  he  had  finished  she  looked  up  and  said: 

"  Grandfather,  the  Bible  says  '  all  scripture  is  given 
by  inspiration  of  God';  perhaps  when  grandmother 
and  I  are  alone,  and  I  am  painting,  you  will  be  per- 
mitted to  come  and  be  my  inspiration.  I  know  you 
will  come  sometimes,  and  have  a  loving  care  over  us." 

She  arose  from  her  knees,  kissed  him,  and  went  out 
of  the  room. 

Dona  and  Garita  went  to  him,  taking  their  accus- 
tomed seats,  the  afterglow  of  the  sunset  making  a 
fitting  background  for  them.  It  was  a  picture  in 
which  Uno  thought  Garita  was  never  so  beautiful.  Her 
hands  were  clasped  over  her  father's  knee;  her  face 
upturned  as  if  in  pleading,  and  tears  crushed  out  from 
the  long  lashes  lay  upon  her  cheeks. 

She  touched  the  harp  upon  which  she  was  playing 
when  Isla  came  in  and  sang :  "  Softly  now  the  light 
of  day  fades  upon  my  sight  away."  When  she  had 
finished,  Don  Pamphilo  put  out  his  hand  towards  her. 
She  went  to  him  and  knelt  down  beside  Garita.  With 
a  hand  upon  each  of  their  heads  he  said:  "God  bless 
and  keep  you,  my  children."  . 

Uno  and  her  father  were  very  anxious  to  see  Marie 
and  Ola.  The  Colonel  was  ready  to  accompany  them. 
He  was  very  much  interested  in  Ola,  who  had  become 


136  Uno  Who. 

quite  noted  as  an  opera  singer.  She  was  ready  to  make 
her  debut  upon  the  stage,  but  her  brother  and  Marie 
had  with  great  tact  caused  her  to  defer  it. 

Living  in  the  city  of  Paris  for  two  years  among 
strangers  had  softened  and  rounded  off  the  sharp  and 
severe  tone  of  her  character.  Marie,  who  was  almost 
morbid  on  the  subject  of  religion,  had  learned  there 
was  a  duty  she  owed  to  her  sister,  and  if  she  would  not 
attend  the  opera,  Ola  would  not  attend  church. 

When  the  Colonel  came  he  was  gratified  to  find 
Marie  willing  to  be  reasonable  and  go  with  him.  She 
had  imparted  much  of  her  gentle  and  loving  nature  to 
Ola,  and  better  than  all  she  knew  there  was  a  secret 
that  even  if  Ola  were  a  good  Catholic,  she  would  not 
impart  to  her  Confessor.  She  had,  without  Ola  being 
aware  of  it,  used  this  secret  to  keep  her  from  going 
on  the  stage  as  an  actress.  She  knew  if  her  sister  did 
not  marry  the  man  she  loved  she  would  marry  some 
one  else. 

When  her  father  had  finished  the  story  of  his  dis- 
coveries, and  she  saw  the  color  come  and  go  in  her 
sister's  face,  she  quietly  went  up  to  her  and  patted 
her  cheek,  then  sitting  herself  beside  her  brother  she 
slipped  her  hand  in  his,  when  she  saw  his  pleased  look 
at  Ola's  silence. 

When  Osceola  took  his  mother's  picture  from  his 
pocket  to  show  her  she  recovered  herself  and  said: 
"How  much  Marie  looks  like  her." 

When  they  were  alone  Uno  asked  her  father  if  he 


Uno  Who.  137 

noticed  Ola's  expression  when  he  told  of  his  discovery. 
He  said  he  did.  She  told  him  she  expected  Ola,  of 
all  the  family,  to  he  the  most  pleased,  hut  she,  like 
Dona  and  Thetis,  was  as  silent  as  the  grave.  "  Father, 
I  hope  Ola  is  not  going  to  begin  life  with  some  hidden 
secret.  With  Aunt  Thetis  there  have  been  dark, 
heaved  up  graves  in  her  heart  from  which  the  flowers 
are  just  beginning  to  spring.  Father,  do  you  think 
Ola  loves  Don  Alfonso?" 

There  was  no  reply. 

"  Father,  Thetis  says,  '  Uno,  when  you  get  to  talking 
you  know  not  when  to  stop ;'  good-night,  father." 

After  remaining  some  time  in  Paris,  Osceola  took  his 
daughters  and  went  to  visit  his  mother's  relatives,  and 
to  quietly  find  out  about  his  mother's  family  in  Spain 
and  elsewhere.  He  wished  to  see  the  house  and  lands 
which  were  now  his. 

In  this  way  the  time  now  passed  until  fall,  when  a 
message  came  from  the  Colonel  that  he  had  better  re- 
turn to  Madrid  as  Don  Pamphilo  was  very  low. 

The  swollen  eyes  and  gentle  clasp  of  the  hand  as 
they  greeted  their  friends  told  them  that  death  was 
waiting  to  claim  its  victim.  His  brave  wife  stood  by 
the  bedside,  one  hand  clasping  his,  while  with  the  other 
she  wiped  the  dew  of  death  from  his  brow.  No  tear 
dimmed  her  eye.  By  her  side  were  her  three  daughters 
kneeling  beside  the  bed.  The  physician,  with  his  finger 
on  the  dying  man's  pulse,  was  trying  to  sustain  his 


138  Uno  Who. 

brother,  the  aged  Marquis,  beside  whom  were  the  sons 
from  America. 

Uno  and  her  father  and  brother  were  in  the  room. 
Don  Alfonso  was  at  the  foot  of  the  bed  with  other 
relatives,  when  Isla  glided  in  like  a  spirit.  She  was 
dressed  in  white.  In  her  hand  was  an  open  basket  of 
forget-me-nots.  She  stood  at  the  foot  of  the  bed  and 
scattered  them  over  the  white  cover. 

When  all  was  over  Dona  sank  down,  her  head  al- 
most on  the  pillow  beside  her  husband.  Colonel  Who 
went  to  her  and  in  his  strong  arms  bore  her  apparently 
lifeless  form  to  her  room. 

Don  Pamphilo  was  laid  beside  his  ancestors,  and 
Dona  with  her  daughters  returned  to  England,  and  to 
the  home  of  her  childhood. 


Uno  Who.  139 


CHAPTEE  X. 

"...  She  made  his  eye 
The  lonely  star  of  her  idolatry." 

UNO  was  about  to  start  on  an  errand  of  mercy, 
taking  her  sister  Burnedita,  of  the  convent,  with  her. 
Her  brother,  learning  her  intention,  said  he  would  ac- 
company them  as  they  might  need  his  protection. 

A  lady  of  good  family,  who  had  met  with  reverses, 
was  in  trouble.  She  had  been  a  teacher  in  Florida,  and 
had  twice  been  abroad  as  companion.  Uno  knew  she 
was  a  woman  of  good  sense  and  dignity ;  that  she  had 
accumulated  what  to  her  was  a  little  fortune;  she  also 
knew  that  Imogene  had  more  than  a  year  before  gone 
abroad  as  companion,  but  was  surprised  to  hear  from 
a  member  of  her  family  that  she  had  married  and  was 
living  near  Seville. 

The  lady  for  whom  she  was  companion  had  returned, 
and  told  them  she  was  sure  Imogene  had  been  deceived. 
It  was  at  the  hotel  where  they  spent  the  winter 
that  they  met  the  widower  she  had  married.  They 
were  invited  to  his  house.  His  mother  and  daughter 
and  son  were  there.  Everything  about  the  estate,  which 
he  said  was  very  large  (the  reason  for  the  house  being 
so  isolated),  was  in  good  order. 


140  Uno  Who. 

Friends  of  the  lady  had  written  Uno  they  thought 
Imogene  in  trouble.  They  had  been  to  see  her,  but 
were  told  she  was  not  at  home.  The  daughter  did 
not  say  when  she  would  be  home.  Then  a  letter 
came  to  her  family  asking  to  have  her  money  sent  to 
her. 

They  became  alarmed  and  wrote  to  Uno.  When  they 
drove  up  to  the  house  Burnedita  went  quickly  as  pos- 
sible to  the  back  door,  knowing  they  would  not  turn 
a  nun  away,  while  Uno  opened  the  front  door,  the 
Colonel  remaining  in  the  carriage.  They  found  Imo- 
gene getting  dinner,  while  the  son  and  daughter  were 
looking  on,  also  an  old  woman  who  was  in  a  bed  in  a 
corner  of  the  large  kitchen. 

Imogene  was  nearly  overcome  when  she  saw  Uno, 
and  the  family  did  not  know  what  to  say  when  they 
found  she  and  the  nun  had  come  together. 

In  English  Uno  told  Imogene  that  they  had  come 
to  take  her  away.  She  said  she  had  no  clothes,  and 
Uno  ordered  the  daughter  to  go  with  them  and  get  her 
clothes,  but  she  would  not  obey  the  orders  until  the 
Colonel  appeared  upon  the  scene.  They  then  became 
alarmed,  and  Imogene  was  allowed  to  take  her  valu- 
ables. 

The  old  woman  was  toothless,  had  a  large  nose  and 
small  black  eyes.  She  put  her  head  from  under  the 
bedclothes,  shaking  the  wide  frill  of  her  cap,  and 
said  "  yam-yam,"  then  again  drew  the  clothes  over  her 
head. 


Uno  Who.  141 

The  Colonel  told  Burnedita  to  go  and  assist  her 
sister,  that  he  would  take  care  of  the  house  in  their 
absence.  The  son  did  not  speak  to  him;  he  appeared 
dazed.  Imogene  said  that  he  always  remained  at  home 
when  his  father  went  away,  and  they  certainly  would 
have  had  trouble  if  the  Colonel  had  not  come,  as  the 
son  was  very  ugly,  and  she  was  afraid  of  him. 

She  was  in  reality  a  prisoner.  Her  husband  told  her 
she  could  go  when  the  money  came  to  pay  off  his 
mortgage.  The  family  silver  and  fine  things  they  dis- 
played before  marriage  she  found  was  loaned  for  the 
occasion.  They  left  the  house  before  the  husband  re- 
turned, but  the  old  woman  sat  up  in  bed  and  screamed 
at  the  top  of  her  voice,  making  her  frills  fly,  "Yam- 
yam-yam." 

The  Colonel  told  Imogene  she  had  reason  to  be 
thankful  for  having  made  her  escape  without  trouble. 

"  I  think,"  said  Uno,  "  this  must  have  been  a  case  of 
platonic  love.  I  am  disappointed  at  not  seeing 
the  man  of  your  choice,  but  do  tell  me  what  did  the 
old  woman  mean  by  '  Yam-yam '  ?  " 

"  She  always  says  that  when  she  is  displeased,  mean- 
ing there  is  a  future  punishment  for  us." 

"  My  kind  friends,  I  am  ashamed  to  go  home,  and 
wish  I  could  find  employment  in  Madrid." 

"That  would  not  be  safe,"  said  the  Colonel,  and 
there  was  something  like  a  smile  on  his  face  when  Uno 
said :  "  Imogene,  you  must  be  brave,  and  let  the  ocean 
separate  you  from  your  ideal  happiness." 


142  Uno  Who. 

"Uno,  how  this  mistake  of  mine  must  have  looked 
to  you  with  your  keen  sense  of  the  ridiculous." 

"  Imogene,  it  was  only  one  step  above  the  sublime, 
and  you  must  have  learned  to  suffer  and  be  strong." 

"  I  certainly  have  suffered,  but  noAv  that  I  am  rescued 
from  what  seemed  to  me  a  terrible  fate,  I  feel  very  far 
from  strong." 

During  the  conversation  Burnedita  sat  with  down- 
cast eyes,  and  Uno  thought  she  had  the  lesson  well 
learned  to  give  all  her  ear  and  but  few  her  voice,  and 
that  she  would  be  of  the  greatest  service  to  her  in  time 
of  need;  and  she  would  make  sure  of  her  being  one  of 
the  pilgrims  to  their  native  land  to  which  Marie  and 
Ola  were  desirous  of  going,  feeling  the  day  of  change 
had  come. 

Don  Alfonso  expressed  great  pleasure  at  the  good 
fortune  of  his  friends.  Ola  blushed  crimson  when  he 
told  her  that  her  carriage  was  royal,  and  that  he  hoped 
in  the  near  future  the  family  would  be  able  to  occupy 
their  ancestral  palace  in  Spain. 

He  said :  "  If  your  brother  goes  to  Cuba  this  win- 
ter, I  shall  accompany  him,  as  I  am  interested  in  Uno's 
charitable  institution;  also  in  the  improvements  that 
are  being  made  at  the  convent,  and  better  than  all,  I 
shall  be  interested  to  know  if  the  'dusky  beauty'  has 
given  up  being  an  actress." 

They  were  pacing  the  deck  of  the  steamer,  and  the 
Colonel  had  to  remind  them  that  it  was  time  to  bid 
friends  farewell. 


Uno  Who.  143 

The  family  went  to  Cuba  to  spend  their  Christmas, 
taking  Seminole's  children.  Uno  said  they  were  the 
brightest,  handsomest,  and  worst  behaved  the  sun  ever 
shone  upon. 

They  did  not  call  at  her  aunt's  in  Havana,  as  she 
wished  to  be  the  first  to  see  Aunt  Thetis  and  make 
things  smooth  and  pleasant  for  the  family.  Thetis 
said  she  did  not  mind  the  people  if  Seminole  had  only 
left  those  pesky  children  at  home. 

The  children  were  let  loose,  and  the  no-account 
Evelyn  was  glad  to  be  one  of  their  number. 

Thetis'  lectures  on  cultivating  memory,  Wauka's  on 
mending  clothes,  and  Senora  de  Vega's  on  literary  at- 
tainments, had  caused  her  to  lose  flesh,  and  she  told 
Uno  she  envied  the  blacks  their  freedom. 

There  was  a  Christmas  tree  at  the  Castle  by  the  sea. 
The  colored  people  were  wild  with  delight  at  having 
the  Castle  inhabited  once  more.  There  was  a  sound  of 
revelry  that  night  that,  in  spirit,  perhaps  the  grand- 
father saw  how  much  he  had  lost  of  life's  pleasures. 
Had  he  forgiven  his  daughter,  perhaps  his  grand- 
daughter, Thetis,  would  have  outgeneraled  the  yellow 
fever. 

Uno  ventured  to  express  these  thoughts  to  her  aunt, 
who  tossed  her  head  with  so  much  dignity  that  she 
nearly  threw  off  her  best  cap  as  she  remarked :  "  Is  there 
anything  more  you  can  think  of  ?  " 

"  Yes,  dear  auntie,  you  have  been  a  remarkable  wo- 
man. Even  your  faults  are  a  pleasure  to  think  of,  and 


144  Uno  Who. 

how  many  can  refer  to  you  as  '  This  is  the  aunt  who 
brought  me  up/  We  must  now  have  your  picture  to 
show  at  such  times  so  as  to  make  an  impression. 
Auntie,  were  none  of  the  seventh  sons  talkers?" 

She  very  emphatically  said  "  So." 

"  I  thought  not,"  said  Uno,  "  as  there  have  been  no 
opinions  handed  down." 

"Well,  future  generations  will  know  yours." 

"Auntie,  that  is  because  I  am  a  girl,  and  so  much 
like  you,  but  I  have  the  key  to  one  of  your  opinions." 

With  the  faintest  glimmer  of  a  smile,  she  said: 
"What  is  it?" 

"  It  is,  Uno,  you  know  not  when  to  stop  talking." 

They  spent  a  portion  of  the  winter  on  the  plantation. 
Uno  did  not  feel  like  entering  into  the  gaieties  of  life 
in  Havana  after  losing  so  dear  a  friend.  Ola  was 
a  great  success  and  favorite  with  her  aunt.  Marie  re- 
mained with  Uno  planning  the  plantation  work.  Tho 
church  and  school,  which  had  been  established,  were  a 
source  of  anxiety  to  Uno;  she  needed  teachers.  In 
the  midst  of  her  quandary  she  received  a  letter  from 
Imogene  asking  for  work.  She  was  unhappy  at  home, 
the  mortification  of  living  where  they  all  knew  her 
mistake  made  a  change  desirable.  Uno  wrote  what  she 
wished  to  have  done,  and  Imogene  accepted  the  posi- 
tion, thus  relieving  Uno  of  all  care  in  regard  to  the 
school;  and  in  many  other  ways  she  found  she  had 
"  cast  her  bread  upon  the  waters." 

Change  seemed  to  be  the  order  of  the  day.    Thetis 


Uno  Who.  145 

said:  "The  family  hardly  had  time  to  turn  around 
since  their  return  home,  and  now  those  people  on  the 
other  side  (as  you  call  it)  are  going  to  trot  over  here. 
I  will  just  tell  you  now,  Senorita  Uno,  you  need  not 
bring  any  more  of  your  proteges  here  for  me  to  look 
after.  If  you  do  not  stay  at  home  more,  I  will  go  to 
the  Castle  by  the  sea.  I  am  sick  and  tired.  It  is  noth- 
ing but  Senora,  Senora,  from  morn  till  dewy  eve." 

"Aunt  Thetis,  be  careful,  you're  getting  poetical. 
I  am  so  happy  that  I  often  feel  a  poetical  inspiration 
myself,  but  I  want  to  open  my  budget  of  news  for  your 
inspection.  I  wish  to  introduce  you  to  Lord  Galvin." 

"  Well,  who,  in  time,  is  he  ?  " 

"  Well,  auntie,  I  may  as  well  tell  you  now.  He  is 
an  Englishman  who  wanted  to  marry  me  when  I  was 
in  England  at  school,  and  Lady  Margaret  was  dis- 
pleased that  I  did  not  accept  him  then." 

"Uno,  have  you  gone  to  hunting  up  old  lovers? 
This  secret  that  I  carried  about  for  years,  afraid  to 
tell  that  our  family  belonged  to  the  nobility  of  Spain, 
thinking  it  might  turn  their  heads  from  the  path  of 
duty,  waiting  until  I  thought  you  were  old  enough  to  be 
sensible,  but  I  find  there  is  no  fool  so  great  as  an  old 
fool.  You  all  seem  to  have  done  gone  mad.  Paulo  has 
resigned  his  commission  in  the  army  so  that  he  can  have 
more  time  to  spend  money.  The  only  one  out  of  the 
nunnery  who  seems  at  all  sensible  is  Ola,  and  she  has 
given  up  that  stage  craze  she  had.  Don  Alfonso  coming, 
is  he?  I  thought  you  were  about  done  with  the  de 
10 


146  Uno  Who. 

Gomoras,  and  Cobre  de  Felipe  has  let  his  sweetheart's 
sister  heal  his  wounds.  Well,  Uno,  I  am  not  surprised 
at  anything,  but  your  letting  this  Lord  coine  to  see  you. 
That  news  has  given  me  a  headache;  I  suppose  you  are 
aware  that  if  you  marry  it  will  make  a  fine  mess  of 
uncle's  will  and  the  charitable  institution?" 

"Auntie,  when  you  get  to  talking,  you  know  not 
when  to  stop.  I  want  to  tell  you  about  Lord  Galvin 
and  my  plans." 

"  I  don't  wish  to  hear  your  plans ;  I  am  disgusted 
with  you,  Uno  Who." 

"  Auntie,  do  please  let  me  tell  you  about  him." 

"I  tell  you  I  do  not  wish  to  hear  about  him.  A 
portion  of  the  prophecy  has  come  true,  and  now  if 
you  marry,  what  will  become  of  Garita?  A  woman 
with  a  husband  has  to  go  at  his  beck  and  nod,  and  he 
would  not  let  you  go  looking  after  that  renegade  Eoss." 

"  Aunty,  I  am  going  to  look  after  him.  There  is  no 
man  that  will  interfere  with  me  and  my  duty.  The 
statute  of  limitation  has  almost  run  its  course,  and  his 
downward  career  will  begin  next  summer,  as  he  is  plan- 
ning to  come  to  America  for  an  English  syndicate.  I 
received  a  letter  from  Garita  wishing  me  to  join  them 
on  this  trip  to  some  new  country  where  there  are  mines, 
I  believe." 

"  Uno,  I  am  afraid  Eoss  will  get  her  fortune." 

"  He  cannot  do  that.  Lord  Ayliffe,  when  consulted 
by  her  father  in  regard  to  her  fortune,  advised  protec- 


Uno  Who.  147 

tion.  Auntie,  I  ain  going  to  turn  matchmaker.  What 
do  you  think  of  that?" 

"  I  think  when  a  person's  head  is  turned,  they  do 
very  strange  things;  you  seem  to  get  your  own  way  in 
most  everything,  why  don't  you  help  Ola  to  marry  Don 
Alfonso?" 

Marie  had  been  a  quiet  listener  to  the  conversation, 
but  she  now  looked  up  from  her  work  and  smiled. 

"  I  tell  you,"  said  Thetis,  "  Ola  is  the  flower  of  the 
family.  I  used  to  think  she  would  drive  me  crazy  with 
her  pranks,  but  a  good  father  and  brother,  and  the  in- 
fluence of  a  devoted  sister,  have  done  their  work." 

"  Auntie,  I  am  going  to  have  Mercedita  marry  Lord 
Galvin,  if  I  can.  I  wanted  you  to  see  him;  that  was 
all." 

"  Uno,  I  will  do  my  best,  and  dress  my  best.  I  hope 
our  coat-of-arms  will  be  here  by  that  time,  and  Osceola 
will  know  if  he  is  to  take  the  title  of  his  uncle.  I  have 
no  doubt  Paulo  will  be  able  to  tell  us  all.  about  it. 
Your  cousin,  Mercedita,  knows  how  to  put  on  airs 
enough  for  all  the  Lords  of  creation." 

It  is  difficult  to  disguise  sorrow  or  joy.  Paulo  and 
Cobre  proved  escape-valves  for  their  sisters.  The  de 
Felipe  family  thought  Lord  Galvin  one  of  the  most 
charming  men  they  ever  met. 

"  Uno,  what  a  strange  girl  you  are  to  refuse  such  an 
offer  of  marriage,"  said  Mercedita. 

"  I  will  promise  you  that  he  will  never  make  me  the 
second  offer  now  that  he  has  seen  you." 


148  Uno  Who. 

"  Oh,  Uno,  I  might  as  well  try  to  pick  a  star  out  of 
Heaven." 

"Mercedita,  this  is  a  shooting  star,  and  it  will  fall 
at  your  feet." 

It  did  fall  at  her  feet  sooner  than  she  expected,  mak- 
ing Uno  and  IKT  family  very  happy.  Don  Alfonso's 
choice  met  with  the  approval  of  all  his  family,  and  it 
was  arranged  that  they  were  to  be  married  at  the  an- 
cestral palace  of  the  Estabanez  family  in  Spain. 

Col.  Who,  with  his  friends,  went  to  Xew  York,  where 
they  were  to  meet  the  party  from  England,  whom  they 
were  to  join  in  the  trip  to  the  promised  lands  of  wealth. 
Upon  their  return  in  the  fall,  Mercedita  would  be  mar- 
ried to  Lord  Galvin,  and  go  to  England  to  live. 

Uno  and  Ola,  with  her  aunt's  family,  were  in  Sara- 
toga, but  she  went  to  !N"ew  York  to  see  Garita,  taking 
Meno  with  her.  She  had  received  a  letter  from  Dona 
asking  her  to  have  Meno  go  with  Garita  as  companion. 
There  was  no  one  better  fitted  to  fill  that  position 
than  the  one  who  had  been  in  the  family  so  many  years 
as  companion  and  friend;  otherwise,  they  would  have 
sent  some  one  from  England. 

Garita  said  that  she  would  much  rather  have  had 
Wewe,  as  she  never  did  like  Meno  as  well,  but  her 
mother  thought  it  was  foolish  to  take  Wewe  away  from 
her  position  in  Havana,  and  Meno  was  a  woman  of 
more  character  than  Wewe  in  a  case  of  emergency. 

Uno  was  not  prepared  for  so  great  a  change  in 
Garita.  Was  it  the  death  of  her  father,  and  the  part- 


Uno  Who.  149 

ing  with  her  mother?  Or  was  there  some  hidden 
trouble  ? 

After  a  conversation  about  their  relatives  and  friends, 
Uno  said :  "  Garita,  you  do  not  enter  into  the  spirit 
of  this  trip  that  Mr.  Eoss  does.  Why  are  you  so  sad  ?  " 

Garita  motioned  to  Xannette,  who  placed  a  cushion 
at  lino's  feet,  and  went  out  of  the  room. 

She  folded  her  hands  on  lino's  lap  as  she  said :  "  I 
have  so  longed  for  this  hour.  I  could  not  add  any  more 
sorrow  to  my  mother's  overburdened  heart.  My  sisters 
would  think  me  foolish,  and  when  I  ventured  to  say  I 
wished  we  were  not  going,  Mr.  Ross  said  '  Nonsense ;  the 
trip  will  be  a  pleasant  change,  if  nothing  more,'  and  I 
am  tired  of  the  monotonous  life." 

Uno  smoothed  the  soft  brown  hair,  twining  the 
little  curls  around  her  fingers,  unable  to  utter  a  word, 
but  she  thought,  "  The  shadow  is  crossing  the  path  of 
our  sunbeam,"  as  she  was  so  often  called  at  home. 
Then  for  an  instant  the  curtain  seemed  drawn  aside, 
and  she  saw  dark  heavy  clouds  gathering  in  the  West, 
the  silver  lining  being  obscured  by  its  sable  cloud. 
The  vision  passed,  when  Garita  said: 

"Uno,  what  makes  you  so  pale?  And  your  hands 
are  so  cold.  This  is  very  selfish  of  me.  You  will  worry 
when  I  am  gone." 

"Garita,  who  else  should  you  confide  in?  It  will 
make  me  unhappy  if  you  do  not  tell  me  everything. 
There  is  nothing  that  would  so  stir  my  spirit  to  its 
depth  as  to  know  you  were  in  trouble.  The  arrow  of 


150  Uno  Who. 

the  Indian  girl  upon  the  trail  of  her  enemy  will  not 
be  more  sure  than  the  cultivated  eye  and  ear  of  her 
civilized  sister." 

Uno  had  risen  and  was  walking  the  floor.  Garita 
went  up  to  her,  and  laying  her  head  upon  the  shoulder 
of  her  friend,  said :  "  Uno,  Uno,  what  would  I  do 
without  you?  I  awaken  from  sleep  with  a  shudder 
and  a  feeling  of  depression.  Mr.  Boss  says  I  am  griev- 
ing over  the  death  of  my  father,  and  that  change  of 
air  and  scene  will  bring  the  color  back  to  my  face." 

"  Rest,  troubled  heart,  and  believe  me,  Mr.  Ross  is 
not  unlike  other  men,  who  give  their  wives  credit  for 
having  very  vivid  imaginations.  They  don't  see  a 
danger  until  the  crisis  is  upon  them.  Then  it  is  '  Hur- 
rah, boys.'  The  woe  to  come  and  the  woe  that's  gone 
they  think  calmly  on,  but  show  me  the  man  who  calmly 
bears  the  woes  that  are.  Garita,  we  will  look  our  woes 
squarely  in  the  face,  and  if  necessary  take  the  animal 
by  the  horns.  Here  is  my  rosary ;  wear  it  for  my  sake ; 
we  have  said  our  prayers  with  it  many  times  kneeling 
side  by  side." 


Uno  Who.  151 


CHAPTER  XI. 

"  Man's  love  is  of  man's  life  a  thing  apart— 
'Tis  woman's  whole  existence." 

"Uxo,  you  look  as  if  you  had  lost  all  your  friends," 
said  Mercedita. 

"  I  am  tired,  and  I  think  I  will  retire  early." 

"  You,  tired  ?  Uno,  I  do  not  think  I  ever  heard  you 
say  that  before.  We  all  think  your  powers  of  endur- 
ance are  something  marvelous.  I  know  what  it  is. 
It's  the  parting  with  Mrs.  Eoss,  and  you  want  to  be 
alone  and  think.  Uno,  it  is  foolish  to  love  so  well; 
love  wisely,  but  always  bear  in  mind  that  love  is  a 
cheat." 

"That  is  fine  talk  for  a  girl  who  has  just  parted 
with  her  lover,"  said  her  sister  Eulalie. 

"  Well,  his  love  is  transferable,"  replied  Mercedita. 
"  He  came  here  for  Uno,  was  piqued  by  her  treatment 
of  him,  made  up  his  mind  to  be  engaged  to  somebody, 
and  I  am  the  willing  victim.  I  am  very  much  in  love 
with  his  prospective  title.  If  I  should  find  that  he  still 
pines  for  Uno,  I  will  have  a  compensation  in  the  title. 
Cousin  Uno,  why  did  you  not  accompany  the  party 
on  their  trip  when  your  brother  and  Mrs.  Ross  so 
urged  you  ? " 

"  Mercedita,    it  would   have  been    unkind    to    you. 


152  Uno  Who. 

From  the  remark  you  have  just  made,  you  might  think 
Lord  Galvin  still  cared  for  me.  He  does  not.  My 
brother  says  he  is  madly  in  love  with  you.  A  girl 
gifted,  beautiful,  stylish  and  rich  should  not  make  a 
remark  like  the  one  you  have  just  made." 

"  Uno,  you  have  a  faculty  of  making  your  friends 
feel  quite  satisfied  with  themselves;  but  how  very  quiet 
Ola  is.  I  suppose  her  heart  is  too  full  of  happiness  to 
breathe  it  to  mortal  ear,  and  she  finds  it  very  pleasant 
to  think  of.  Ola,  I  think  you  feel  very  much  as  the 
country  school  teacher  did  when  he  said  to  his  pupils 
that  they  need  not  be  surprised  if  he  was  rather  sober 
to-day  and  for  several  days  to  come,  as  he  had  just 
heard  of  the  death  of  his  father.  With  the  school 
teacher  it  was  'from  whence  no  traveler  returns/  but 
with  us  it  is  until  the  travelers  return." 

"Mercedita,"  said  Ola,  "I  was  thinking  that  you 
and  Garita  had  the  most  cheerful  dispositions  of  any 
one  I  ever  knew.  I  wish  she  could  have  remained  with 
us.  She  said  she  would  be  very  glad  to,  but  Mr.  Eoss 
insisted  upon  her  going.  I  told  him  I  thought  it  was 
very  selfish  of  him  to  take  that  beautiful  woman  into 
a  new  country  to  remain  so  long.  If  he  were  coming 
back  with  the  rest  of  the  party,  he  would  not  take  her, 
he  said.  I  cannot  keep  her  sad  face  out  of  my  mind, 
and  I  know  Uno  is  all  upset  and  glad  to  be  alone.  I 
see  she  has  dismissed  her  maid." 

Uno  had  thrown  herself  into  a  chair  with  an  air  of 
abandon  that  was  demoralizing.  The  change  in  Gar- 


Uno  Who.  153 

ita's  life  had  come.  The  vision  was  her  warning.  It 
is  cruel  and  relentless  fate.  Hush,  troubled  heart,  and 
in  thee  I  will  erect  an  altar  and  it  shall  be  my  constant 
prayer,  "  Defend,  0  Lord,  Thy  child." 

She  retired,  trying  in  slumber  to  steep  each  weary 
sense  into  forgetfulness  of  the  past  week's  excite- 
ment. 

The  summer  at  Saratoga  passed  very  quickly,  the  ap- 
proaching wedding  affording  food  for  talk,  if  not  for. 
thought. 

The  October  days  had  nearly  gone  when  the  party 
returned. 

The  wedding  of  Lord  Galvin  and  Mercedita  at  a 
Catholic  church  in  New  York  was  simple  and  beauti- 
ful. After  their  departure  for  their  home  in  England, 
Uno  improved  the  first  opportunity  to  talk  with  her 
brother  about  Garita.  He  said  she  seemed  very  cheer- 
ful and  appeared  to  enjoy  the  journey. 

"  It  is  a  frontier  town  at  which  place  we  met  some 
very  fine  people  among  the  officers  and  their  wives  who 
were  connected  with  the  fort,  but  this  scheme  of  Mr. 
Ross's  won't  amount  to  anything,  and  you  will  have 
Garita  at  home  before  long.  Uno,  why  did  you  send 
Meno  with  her?" 

"  It  was  her  mother's  request.  Paulo,  why  do  you 
ask  the  question?  A  remark  like  this  from  you  means 
something." 

"  Oh,  well,  I  think  Wewe  would  have  been  more  com- 
panionable." 


154  Uno  Who. 

"  Paulo,  she  would  have  been  my  choice,  but  she  was 
in  Havana,  and  I  did  not  like  to  take  the  responsibility 
of  sending  for  her,  so  I  simply  obeyed  Dona's  instruc- 
tions. Meno  has  always  been  lovely  to  Seminole  and 
to  me." 

A  disgusted  look  passed  over  the  Colonel's  face  as 
he  walked  to  the  window,  saying:  "You  belong  to 
the  Who  family." 

The  remark  of  years  ago  flashed  into  Uno's  mind: 
"  The  de  Gomoras  are  perfection,"  also  the  sarcasm 
that  accompanied  it. 

"I  fear  she  will  not  get  along  well  with  Mr.  Ross, 
for  he  did  not  think  it  necessary  to  take  her.  It  is  for 
her  interests  to  be  faithful  to  Garita.  Captain  Guyford 
says  she  made  a  very  favorable  impression  at  the  fort, 
and  that  you  and  Garita  excited  the  envy  of  both  men 
and  women.  He  seemed  to  have  enjoyed  his  trip  im- 
mensely. 

The  Colonel  did  not  appear  to  have  heard  a  word  his 
sister  had  been  saying,  for  he  turned  suddenly  around 
as  he  said:  "Uno,  are  you  not  aware  that  Indians 
never  let  anything  come  between  them  and  the  object 
of  their  affection  ?  " 

"  Paulo,  she  cannot  be  jealous  of  a  married  woman." 

"Uno,  you  do  not  understand  that  Garita  will  un- 
consciously excite  the  jealousy  of  her  own  sex.  Meno 
may  turn  traitor.  She  said  to  me  with  a  bitterness 
she  was  unable  to  control,  that  she  supposed  she  ought 
to  feel  highly  honored  to  be  the  companion  of  one  of 


Uno  Who.  155 

the  proud  de  Gomoras.  She  expected  me  to  say  some- 
thing, but  was  disappointed." 

Later  events  caused  Uno  to  wonder  that  she  did  not 
at  the  time  more  fully  comprehend  the  meaning  of  the 
conversation  with  her  brother.  Had  she  known  then 
that  these  were  the  preliminary  steps  to  a  plot,  that 
even  the  actors  themselves  were  unconscious  of  what 
they  were  being  led  into,  what  would  she  have  done? 
Simply  nothing,  but  make  herself  supremely  miserable. 

For  a  time  Garita  seemed  to  have  passed  out  of  lino's 
life,  so  occupied  was  she  in  what  was  going  on  about 
her.  Imogene's  school  was  a  great  success.  She  had 
interested  Evelyn  in  the  work.  Seminole  had  fold 
her  of  Col.  Sebastian's  daughter  being  without  a  home. 
The  mortgage  on  the  place  was  about  to  be  foreclosed; 
and  her  husband  was  dissipated. 

Uno  said :  "  The  daughter  of  Col.  Sebastian  must  be 
provided  for."  And  she  took  the  family  to  the  plan- 
tation, taking  care  of  the  mortgage,  that  the  boy  should 
not  be  deprived  of  his  inheritance. 

Her  cousin  Cobre  had  married  Miss  Fay,  and  the 
family  was  settled  in  Havana.  Ola  and  her  brother 
spent  most  of  their  time  in  that  city,  and  they  thought 
Uno  should  not  confine  herself  to  the  plantation,  as 
Marie,  and  her  father  were  there. 

She  found  she  had  hardly  time  to  think,  so  many 
demands  were  made  upon  her.  Garita's  letters  were 
cheerful.  She  enjoyed  the  society  of  the  Rector  and 
his  wife,  and  had  been  asked  to  play  the  organ,  in 


156  Uno  Who. 

church,  a  reminder  of  her  mother's  early  life.  There 
were  several  ladies  who  were  fine  musicians,  and  she  en- 
joyed the  dancing  parties  at  the  fort. 

"Auntie,"  said  Uno,  "which  had  you  rather  we 
would  do?  All  go  to  Florida  and  spend  Christmas 
with  Seminole  at  '  The  Shadows,'  or  have  them  come 
here." 

"  Uno,  I  think  it  would  be  very  heartless  for  you  to 
go  and  leave  Wauka  and  me  here  alone,  as  you  know  we 
would  not  go." 

"  Auntie,  it  would  also  be  heartless  to  leave  Seminole 
alone.  For  my  part,  I  prefer  having  them  all  come 
here  at  this  happy  time." 

"Oh,  dear,  how  can  my  nerves  bear  the  terrible 
strain  of  having  those  young  Arabs  here?  I  can  tell 
you  one  thing,  Senorita  Who,  you  will  have  to  lock 
that  museum  door.  The  last  time  they  were  here 
they  took  those  beautiful  birds'  eggs  your  Uncle  thought 
so  much  of  out  of  the  case,  and  were  going  to  play 
marbles  with  them.  I  took  the  boys  by  the  ears  and 
led  them  out  of  the  room,  and  they  screamed  like  wild 
Indians  on  the  warpath. 

"They  may  come  out  of  the  narrows,  and  be  as 
good  as  Ola  is,  but  I  doubt  it.  The  blood  is  mixed 
there,  and  ours  is  very  pure.  They  have  never  been 
allowed  to  sit  at  the  table  with  their  father  and  mother, 
and  of  course  have  very  bad  table  manners,  but  I  sup- 
pose they  will  have  to  come,  and  I  will  find  myself 
making  ginger  snaps  for  them." 


Uno  Who.  157 

Seminole  brought  a  letter  that  she  had  just  received 
from  Meno  which  she  wished  Uno  to  read.  They  were 
very  homesick,  she  wrote,  except  Mr.  Ross,  who  seemed 
to  be  enjoying  himself.  She  said :  "  It  would  be  pleas- 
anter  for  them  all  if  Garita  was  not  so  very  exclusive. 
She  does  not  visit  any  one  but  the  Rector's  wife,  and 
the  wives  of  the  officers  who  are  stationed  here.  She 
will  not  receive  Mr.  Ross's  friends  who,  I  think,  are  very 
nice.  She  was  agreeably  disappointed  in  Mr.  Ross,  who 
is  one  of  the  best  of  men.  Just  now  Garita  is  feeling 
quite  unhappy.  She  has  made  the  Colonel's  wife  very 
jealous  of  her,  and  they  have  stopped  the  dancing 
parties.  Of  course  there  is  no  cause  for  jealousy,  only 
Garita's  pretty  face  does  fascinate  the  men." 

They  had  passed  a  pleasant  winter,  however.  Garita 
had  done  a  great  deal  for  both  the  Catholic  and  Episco- 
pal churches,  and  had  assisted  in  getting  up  entertain- 
ments, which  made  her  very  popular  at  first. 

"  As  for  myself,  I  get  along  very  well,  I  have  made 
several  very  pleasant  acquaintances." 

Uno  did  not  like  the  tone  of  this  letter.  It  was  a  re- 
flection upon  Garita,  and  her  brother's  words  came  to 
her  mind.  Why  did  she  send  Meno? 

She  told  Seminole  to  write  at  once  to  Meno,  and  find 
out  all  she  could.  As  they  had  been  on  confidential 
terms,  she  could  do  so,  and  she  was  surprised  when 
Seminole  asked  her  if  she  did  not  know  that  Meno  was 
very  much  in  love  with  Paulo.  Uno  had  not  noticed  it, 
but  she  said  pehaps  Meno  was  jealous  of  Paulo's  at- 


158  Uno  Who. 

tentions  to  Garita,  whom  he  always  treated  in  the  same 
kind  and  gentle  manner  he  did  his  sisters.  She  then 
told  Seminole  what  Paulo  had  said,  and  her  fears  that 
she  would  not  be  true  to  Garita  if  she  were  in  trouble. 

"  Uno,  you  have  known  very  little  of  her  since  you 
were  a  child.  I  know  her  thoroughly.  She  is  a  bitter 
foe,  so  sly  and  gentle,  when  there  is  a  point  she  wishes 
to  gain,  and  will  take  one  unawares.  She  is  now  un- 
happy to  think  Paulo  is  at  home,  and  she  is  away. 
When  she  returns  she  can  go  to  '  Sunnyside,'  and  take 
care  of  old  Mary  Dee.  I  do  not  want  any  more  wild- 
flowers  around  me." 

"  Seminole,  this  is  a  revelation  to  me.  I  am  now  in 
deep  trouble.  If  I  ever  get  the  truth,  it  will  be  from 
Xannette,  and  I  gave  her  instructions  to  write  me  if 
Garita  was  unhappy.  Fortunately  the  maids  at  '  Sun- 
nyside '  were  quite  well  educated.  When  Garita  returns, 
we  will  manage  to  keep  Meno  out  of  her  life.  I  shud- 
der at  the  thought  that  she  might  be  the  one  of  our 
tribe  told  in  the  prophecy." 

While  they  were  talking  Osceola  came  in  with  the 
mail.  One  letter  was  from  Garita.  She  had  little  to 
write  about.  The  church  in  which  she  was  very  much 
interested  would  be  open  for  service  the  first  time  on 
Christmas  eve,  and  she  would  play  the  organ,  which  was 
her  gift. 

"Meno  has  become  very  religious  of  late,  and  spends  a 
great  deal  of  time  in  going  to  church,  which  is  quite 
new  for  her.  She  has  made  a  great  many  acquaint- 


Uno  Who.  159 

ances,  also  rather  forces  herself  upon  mine.  Uno,  she 
is  developing." 

If  it  were  possible  they  would  have  recalled  Meno, 
but  for  what  reason?  They  knew  she  would  willingly 
come,  for  Paulo  was  at  home.  They  made  up  their 
minds  they  would  not  worry  any  more,  nor  do  anything 
until  they  heard  from  Nannette. 

In  a  short  time  Garita  wrote  again,  saying  she  had 
found  a  letter  on  the  floor  of  her  room  from  Mrs. 
Estaugh  that  she  had  written  to  Mr.  Eoss.  It  impressed 
her  that  the  letter  was  left  there  intentionally.  She 
wrote  sympathizing  with  Mr.  Boss  for  being  out  in  that 
new  country,  and  was  sorry  to  hear  there  were  stories  be- 
ing circulated  in  regard  to  Garita.  "  That  she  had  ever 
been  in  love  with  any  one  before  you  met  her,  I  do  not 
believe,  neither  do  I  believe  she  married  you  out  of 
spite,  or  that  her  friends  were  glad  to  have  her  out  of 
the  way  because  of  her  marrying  beneath  her  position  in 
life.  That  she  is  pining  to  the  extent  of  losing  her 
mind,  surprises  me,  though  I  never  thought  her  very- 
strong  minded.  I  hope  you  will  write  me  should  her 
malady  increase." 

Garita  wrote  she  had  told  Mr.  Eoss  about  this  letter. 
He  said  he  did  write  to  Mrs.  Estaugh  occasionally,  but 
he  had  not  written  in  a  long  time,  neither  had  he  heard 
from  her.  He  could  not  imagine  how  the  letter  came 
there.  It  was  from  Boston,  and  in  Mrs.  Estaugh's 
handwriting.  "  Strange,  is  it  not,  TJno  ?  " 

Uno's  first  thought  was  to  send  Imogene  to  her.     She 


160  Uno  Who. 

could  counteract  all  Meno's  underhand  work.  She  is 
under  obligations  to  me,  she  thought.  Then  after  con- 
sidering she  felt  that  was  a  reason  why  she^should  not 
be  employed  in  a  case  like  this.  "  Her  family  live  in 
Garita's  birthplace.  She  might  some  day  wish  to  make 
them  forget  her  mistake  by  bringing  up  Garita's  mis- 
fortune, and  the  active  part  she  was  called  upon  to  .take 
in  it.  People  do  so  like  to  have  something  to  tell,"  and 
Uno  threw  the  letter  on  the  floor  saying  to  herself: 
"No,  Imogene,  stay  where  you  are." 

Uno  talked  with  her  father  and  he  said:  "My  daugh- 
ter, you  cannot  hasten  the  day  of  Garita's  release.  When 
you  are  called  upon  it  is  time  enough  to  act,  otherwise 
even  she  might  think  you  officious.  We  must  wait  until 
that  man  is  fully  developed." 


Uno  Who.  161 


CHAPTER  XII. 
"  Her  face  a  heart  of  flint  might  tender  make." 

IN  the  fjpring  Uno  received  a  letter  from  Nannette 
which  she  took  to  the  convent  that  the  Mother  Supe- 
rior might  understand  the  state  of  affairs  from  the  be- 
ginning. It  read  as  follows :  "  Dear  Senorita : — I  hope 
you  will  pardon  me  for  writing  a  conversation  that 
has  taken  place  between  my  mistress  and  myself.  I 
told  Senora  there  was  something  I  would  like  to  tell 
her  if  she  would  allow  me.  She  said  e  Certainly.'  We 
were  among  strangers,  and  that  she  wished  me  to  tell  her 
all  I  heard  that  we  might  protect  ourselves  if  necessary. 
I  told  Senora  her  colored  laundress  was  brought  up 
in  the  South,  and  we  had  become  friends.  She  washed 
for  ladies  at  the  fort,  and  had  often  told  me  of  ques- 
tions she  was  asked  in  regard  to  her,  and  that  she  had 
been  told  the  reason  that  Mr.  Ross  kept  Senorita  Meno 
and  me  with  her  was  because  she  was  not  in  her  right 
mind.  She  turned  deathly  pale,  and  I  thought  she  would 
faint.  I  said,  '  Honey,  don't  look  like  that,  it  breaks 
my  heart  to  tell  you.  The  good  Lord  knows  I  would 
bear  it  all  if  I  could  for  the  child  I  have  never  been  sep- 
arated from  a  day  since  she  was  born.  Honey,  be  brave, 
and  we  will  work  together,  otherwise  my  actions  might 
11 


162  Uno  Who. 

look  strange  to  you.  It  is  no  use  to  put  this  notion 
into  Mr.  Boss's  head.  Men  are  queer.  They  cannot 
see  trouble  until  it  is  ready  to  knock  them  down.  That 
is  why  women  get  the  best  of  them.  Now,  honey,  dear, 
what  is  the  trouble  ?  Tell  your  old  nurse.  If  we  want 
to  beat  the  devil,  we  must  use  some  of  his  tools.  If 
we  are  as  watchful  for  good  as  he  is  for  bad,  we  will 
get  there  first.  We  will  watch  and  pray,  that  is  what 
I've  been  doing.' 

"  Then  my  dear  mistress  told  me  that  she  had  found 
a  letter  on  Mr.  Ross's  dressing  table.  He  had  laid  it  on 
the  white  cover  with  the  address  down,  and  had  forgot- 
ten to  take  the  letter  with  him  when  he  changed  his 
coat.  It  was  an  invitation  signed  '  Signal.'  I  did  not 
give  him  the  letter,  as  I  did  not  wish  him  to  know  I 
had  seen  it.  Nannette,  this  seems  to  excite  you.  Have 
you  ever  heard  the  name  before?  Yes,  honey,  that 
was  from  Mrs.  Red,  the  woman  he  wished  to  have  call 
upon  you.  Her  husband's  name  is  Signal,  and  a  danger 
signal  they  are.  He  works  for  Mr.  Ross,  and  must 
get  fine  pay  from  the  way  they  are  living  in  the  house 
they  have  just  moved  into. 

"  I  did  not  tell  my  mistress,  but  I  know  he  goes  there 
a  great  deal.  They  wish  to  make  a  cat's  paw  of  my  poor 
darling  by  her  going  there,  as  it  would  take  the  curse 
off  his  visits.  Mrs.  Red  is  angry  because  Mrs.  Ross 
would  not  receive  her,  and  is  now  quietly  circulating  this 
story.  She  tells  it  to  her  dressmakers,  who  are  anxious 
to  keep  in  her  good  graces,  as  she  is  dressing  fine.  I 


Uno  Who.  163 

used  to  think  the  colored  people  could  be  as  smart  as 
white  folks  if  they  had  the  chance,  but  this  beats  me. 
All  I  can  do  is  to  deny  the  lie,  but  it  needs  a  powerful 
sight  of  grace  to  keep  my  tongue  still. 

"  I  went  into  the  closet  and  shut  the  door,  and  Sen- 
orita,  I  took  right  hold  of  the  horns  of  the  altar  and 
asked  God  to  help  me  to  save  my  poor  darling  from  these 
people,  for  I  had  heard  Mr.  Eoss  tell  his  wife  that  she 
must  send  home  for  money,  and  I  knew  where  the 
money  was  going.  I  hope  you  will  not  think  I  have 
done  gone  mad,  but  Mr.  Eoss  is  acting  very  strangely, 
and  Senora  has  very  little  to  say  to  Meno,  who,  I  think, 
goes  to  Mrs.  Bed's  to  please  Mr.  Eoss." 

The  Mother  Superior  said  she  understood  the  case 
perfectly,  and  advised  Uno  to  see  Garita's  brother  and 
prepare  him  for  a  change.  That  when  the  time  came 
there  would  be  no  delay. 

Uno  took  Ola  and  they  went  to  Florida.  She  had 
a  talk  with  Seminole  about  Meno,  and  the  course  to 
be  taken  in  regard  to  her  upon  her  return.  They  must 
keep  control  of  her  tongue,  and  that  she  should  not  be 
among  Garita's  old  friends  they  would  manage  to  get 
her  on  the  plantation  for  a  visit. 

She  did  not  tell  Seminole  of  the  story  circulated  in 
regard  to  her  mind,  only  that  Mr.  Eoss  was  spending 
his  time  and  money  upon  a  family  Garita  would  not 
visit,  and  Meno  did  to  please  Mr.  Eoss.  The  crazy  part 
of  the  story  must  be  told  only  to  Osceola  and  the 
Mother  Superior. 


164  Uno  Who. 

While  in  Florida  Uno  received  what  seemed  a  strange 
letter  from  Nannette.  She  said  Senorita  Meno  had 
called  at  the  house  of  Major  West,  and  while  there  Col. 
O'Toole's  wife  came  in,  and  this  was  the  conversation 
that  took  place.  "  Senorita  Meno  has  written  it  for  me 
to  copy,  saying  she  did  not  wish  to  get  mixed  up  in 
this  affair,  but  thought  it  best  you  should  know  how 
Senora  was  talked  about. 

"  I  have  taken  your  advice,  and  have  never  told  Meno 
anything.  I  saw  enough  on  the  journey  here,  and 
while  your  brother  was  here,  to  disgust  a  sensible  woman. 
She  was  so  jealous  of  your  brother's  little  attentions 
to  Senora  that  she  has  hated  her  ever  since,  and  I  know 
that  she  started  the  story  that  they  were  old  lovers, 
and  her  father  would  not  let  her  marry  him  because  of 
his  Indian  blood,  and  it  had  affected  her  mind.  I  think 
she  has  put  this  idea  in  Mr.  Ross's  head,  for  I  heard  my 
mistress  tell  him  it  was  no  more  for  Paulo  to  be  at- 
tentive to  her  than  it  was  for  him  to  be  attentive  to 
Mrs.  Estaugh.  He  told  her  he  could  see  through  the 
whole  affair,  and  she  had  married  him  out  of  spite, 
and  that  she  was  mourning  for  her  lover,  not  her  father. 

"  You  see  he  must  get  some  excuse  for  his  own  bad 
conduct.  I  wish  we  had  some  one  here  as  smart  as 
Senorita  Meno  to  help  us.  It  takes  a  powerful  sight 
of  faith  to  sit  here  and  wait  for  help,  seeing  these  devils 
gaining  ground  every  day. 

"  This  is  a  copy  of  what  Senorita  Meno  gave  me ; 
but  she  was  very  careful  to  keep  the  one  she  wrote: 


Uno  Who.  165 

"  Mrs.  West,  I  hear  that  Mr.  Ross  is  very  pleased 
that  the  Colonel  has  stopped  the  dancing  parties.  My 
daughter  feels  very  badly  about  it,  and  I  know  we  will 
all  miss  them.  There  is  so  little  pleasure  to  be  gotten 
out  of  life  in  a  place  like  this. 

"Well,  Mrs.  O'Toole,  it  is  all  your  own  fault.  Of 
course,  Mr.  Ross  does  not  care,  as  he  never  dances,  but 
I  think  it  very  selfish  when  he  sees  how  much  his  wife 
enjoyed  them.  Mrs.  Red  is  so  piqued  at  her  not  being 
able  to  get  into  our  little  circle  that  she  would  help  to 
break  up  the  dancing  or  anything  else.  She  is  very 
liberal  in  her  purchase  of  tickets  for  our  entertainment. 
Miss  Wildflower,  I  hear  Mr.  Ross  does  not  wish  his  wife 
to  sing  or  recite  for  us.  I  cannot  see  what  objection 
he  can  have. 

"  Mrs.  O'Toole,  I  do  not  think  he  has  any  objection, 
only  on  account  of  her  health,  but  she  is  going  to  both 
sing  and  recite  for  you.  She  says  if  Mr.  Ross  does  not 
care  to  go  we  can  go  alone.  Then  said :  '  Mrs.  West,  the 
papers  will  make  a  time  over  the  beautiful  Mrs.  Ross, 
lashing  Mrs.  O'Toole' s  and  Mrs.  Red's  jealousy  into  fury.' 

"'Well,  I  cannot  understand  why  a  young  and  beauti- 
ful woman  like  Mrs.  Ross  should  come  to  this  frontier 
town  to  live,'  said  Mrs.  O'Toole. 

" '  I  suppose  she  came  for  the  same  reason  that  you 
and  I  did, — to  be  with  her  husband/  said  Mrs.  West. 

" '  Miss  Wildflower,  I  presume  you  have  come  here 
to  live,  judging  from  the  beautiful  furniture  and  piano 
Mrs.  Ross  has  here,'  said  Mrs.  O'Toole,  'but  they 


166  Uno  Who. 

say  that  Mr.  Ross's  business  will  be  a  failure,  and  I 
should  think  she  would  want  it  to  be.' 

"'Why,  Mrs.  O'Toole?  Mrs.  West,  I  cannot  see 
any  pleasure  in  living  in  a  place  and  being  talked  about 
as  Mrs.  Ross  is.' 

" '  Then/  said  Mrs.  West,  laughing,  '  I  should  think 
you  would  want  to  receive  marching  orders,  for  your 
jealousy  is  as  much  talked  of  as  Mrs.  Ross's  beauty/ 

."'That  is  rather  broad,  Mrs.  West,  but  it  seems 
that  I  am  not  the  only  jealous  person,  for  her  husband 
is  also  affected  in  that  way.  Now,  don't  you  really 
think  that  a  very  strange  match,  Mrs.  West?' 

"  '  Yes,  I  have  often  thought  of  it.  She  is  his  super- 
ior in  every  respect.  He  is  fine  looking,  but  not  a  man 
of  much  character.  She  seems  so  sad  of  late.' 

" '  Oh,  Mrs.  West,  she  puts  that  on  to  attract  the  men.' 

"'My  dear  Mrs.  O'Toole,  this  is  beneath  you.  We 
should  try  and  put  down  this  gossip.  It  is  very  unpleas- 
ant for  the  Colonel,  and  when  the  officers'  wives  see  you 
and  your  daughter  treat  her  as  you  do,  they  do  not  know 
how  to  act/ 

" '  Mrs.  West,  what  do  you  think  of  this  story  of  her 
being  in  love  with  Col.  Who?  Her  parents  opposed  it, 
as  he  is  a  half-breed  Indian,  and  she  married  Mr.  Ross 
out  of  spite,  which  has  somewhat  affected  her  mind; 
and  they  got  this  position  for  him  to  get  them  away 
from  England.  You  know  she  married  him  in  America, 
did  she  not,  Miss  Wildflower  ? ' 

" '  Yes,  they  were  married  in  the  South  at  her  home, 


Uno  Who.  167 

and  there  is  not  a  word  of  truth  in  her  mind  being 
affected,  and  I  shall  be  glad  to  see  her  leave  here.' 

"(I  feel  strangely  drawn  to  her/  said  Mrs.  West, 
'  and  think  she  has  a  wordless  grief.  That  she  is  simply 
accepting  the  position  in  life  in  which  she  has  placed 
herself.  The. Rector  and  his  wife  do  not  wish  to  give 
offense  to  you  and  the  Colonel,  and  Mrs.  Ross  has  re- 
fused to  play  the  organ,  as  your  daughter  is  not  allowed 
to  sing.' 

" '  Then,  Mrs.  West,  you  do  not  believe  the  story  about 
her  seeing  my  husband,  and  what  do  you  think  of  her 
flirting  with  the  officers  as  she  used  to  when  we  had  the 
dances  ? ' 

" '  There  was  no  flirting  about  it,  Mrs.  O'Toole. 
They  were  simply  the  pretty  airs  and  graces  of  a  culti- 
vated society  woman.  She  goes  very  often  to  the  con- 
vent. I  hear  she  had  letters  to  the  Mother  Superior. 
Is  that  true,  Miss  Wildflower  ? ' 

" '  Yes,  and  Mrs.  Ross  is  going  to  give  an  organ  to 
the  Catholic  church,  and  it  will  be  here  very  soon.' 

"  '  There,  she  knows  my  husband  is  a  devout  Catholic, 
and  she  will  make  that  organ  an  excuse  for  going  there. 
He  has  known  of  this  and  has  not  told  me.' 

" '  Oh,  Mrs.  O'Toole,  you  are  exasperating ;  I  have 
heard  you  tell  your  husband  to  not  mention  her  name 
in  your  presence.' 

" '  Well,  I  hope  they  will  go  away.  His  business  is 
a  failure.  He  and  Mr.  Red  are  always  together,  and 
he  must  pay  him  a  fine  salary  from  the  way  they  live.' 


1 68  Uno  Who. 

" '  Mrs.  O'Toole,  if  I  were  you  I  would  not  allow  my 
feelings  to  run  away  with  my  judgment.  You  will 
find  it  is  Mrs.  Ross  who  has  reason  to  grieve,  and  not 
you,  and  we  will  not  allow  this  gossip  to  bring  on  a 
war  that  would  be  worse  than  fighting  Indians/  " 

After  hearing  the  letter,  Seminole  sitting  with 
clasped  hands  looked  at  Uno,  as  if  waiting  for  her  to 
express  herself  upon  the  subject  and  object  of  this 
strange  missive,  and  finally  she  spid: 

"  Uno,  what  are  your  thoughts  upon  the  course  Meno 
is  taking?" 

"  My  thoughts  are  in  such  a  muddle  I  have  to  stop 
and  arrange  them.  In  the  first  place  Meno  wants  to 
came  home,  and  has  taken  this  course  to  get  me  stirred 
up  and  have  her  sent  for.  She  is  jealous  of  Garita,  and 
for  some  reason  is  trying  to  undermine  her.  I  do  not 
believe  she  contradicted  one  of  the  lies  she  said  she  did 
in  talking  with  those  ladies.  There  is  truth  in  part 
of  it.  What  Nannette  has  written  proves  that.  She 
has  Nannette  do  the  writing,  so  that  if  anything  should 
come  of  it  there  would  be  no  proof  against  her,  and  I 
will  venture  to  say  she  has  taken  good  care  to  secure 
the  paper  she  gave  Nannette  to  write  from.  She  would 
not  like  to  have  it  known  that  she  had  written  about 
Mr.  Eoss,  even  in  the  guarded  manner  she  has  done." 

"  I  have  no  doubt  but  that  it  is  her  doings  with, 
perhaps,  the  assistance  of  Mrs.  Red,  that  has  excited 
Mrs.  O'Toole's  jealousy  so  as  to  get  a  start  for  her 
plot." 


Uno  Who.  169 

"Uno,  in  all  our  talk,  you  have  never  given  any 
reason  for  her  dislike  of  Garita.  What  is  it?  " 

"  I  must  confess  I  do  not  know,  though  I  have  often 
in  a  sort  of  a  way  wondered  at  it." 

"  I  will  tell  you.  She  is  never  accepted  as  an  equal 
by  the  de  Gomora  family,  but  is  always  kept  in  the 
position  of  one  who  is  being  paid  for  their  services. 
When  Paulo  is  there  she  feels  it  keenly  to  have  him  see 
her  not  treated  as  he  and  his  sisters  are,  and  she  will 
bring  disgrace  on  the  family  if  she  can.  She  is  madly 
in  love  with  Paulo,  and  knows  he  will  never  marry 
beneath  him.  She  has  often  told  me  that  her  father 
and  mother  were  as  good  as  ours,  and  she  was  our  equal 
in  all  but  money.  When  I  told  her  Ola  was  engaged  to 
Don  Alfonso,  she  set  her  teeth,  then  .said  the  '  de  Go- 
moras  again.'" 

"  Seminole,  there  is  no  doubt  but  that  she  is  the  In- 
dian of  the  prophecy.  You  know  her  better  than  I  do, 
and  you  must  help  me.  It  is  something  we  cannot  ex- 
plain, even  to  our  own  family.  You  will  remember  on 
what  familiar  terms  she  was  with  Mrs.  Estaugh,  as 
Maud  Ayling  at  Saratoga,  and  I  am  now  quite  sure  she 
has  written  something  to  her  as  if  coming  from  Mr. 
Ross,  and  the  reply  she  put  in  Garita's  room  herself, 
thinking  to  make  trouble  between  Mr.  and  Mr?.  Ross, 
and  in  other  ways  to  worry  and  embarrass  Garita." 

Garita's  letters  did  not  give  any  information  in  re- 
gard to  her  troubles.  She  said  Mr.  Ross's  business  did 
not  seem  to  be  a  success,  and  she  thought  it  would  not 


170  Uno  Who. 

be  long  before  she  returned  to  her  home  in  Florida. 
Garita  would  consider  it  a  great  liberty  on  the  part  of 
her  maid  if  she  knew  she  was  writing  to  Uno  in  re- 
gard to  her  troubles,  overlooking  the  loving  kindness  of 
the  act  which  in  time  she  would  approve  of,  and  Uno 
fearing  her  letters  might  fall  into  other  hands  dared 
not  mention  in  a  direct  way  what  Garita  had  written  in 
regard  to  the  Estaugh  letter. 

The  only  thing  she  could  do  was  to  wait  until  the 
syndicate  were  tired  of  sending  money  and  he  began  to 
make  demands  on  Garita. 

Her  brothers  had  heard  what  Meno  had  written  Semi- 
nole,  and  when  asked  for  a  large  amount  of  money  they 
wrote  her  she  had  best  come  home  on  a  visit,  and  they 
wrote  to  England  to  have  Mr.  Boss  recalled. 

In  the  early  fall,  while  the  families  were  at  Sara- 
toga, Uno  received  a  letter  from  Nannette.  She  had 
heard  the  first  quarrel  between  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Ross.  He 
demanded  that  she  dismiss  Xannette;  that  Meno  was 
company  enough  for  her;  that  she  was  well  and  able  to 
wait  upon  herself,  as  other  women  did,  and  they  could 
not  afford  the  expense. 

"  Senorita  Uno,  at  this  her  proud  spirit  rebelled,  and 
Mr.  Ross  saw  he  was  going  too  far,  and  appeared  sur- 
prised at  what  he  called  her  display  of  temper.  She 
cried  herself  into  a  nervous  headache.  I  tried  in  every 
way  to  soothe  her,  then  she  said :  '  Xanny,  sing  to  me/ 
After  a  while  she  said :  '  I  can  almost  imagine  I  am  at 
home  once  more.  No,  my  faithful,  I  will  never  part 


Uno  Who.  171 

with  you.'  I  said,  '  Just  think,  honey,  my  mother  was 
your  mother's  maid  when  you  were  born.  She  always 
called  her  that  dear  angel.  Many's  the  story  she  told 
of  your  grandmother;  how  fine  they  were  in  England. 
Senorita  Uno's  great-great-grandfather  was  alive 
when  you  and  she  were  born.  My  mother  had  a  great 
love  for  telling  and  talking  about  the  prophecy  until 
your  mother  told  her  to  not  say  anything  more  about 
it.'  Oh,  Senorita,  I  was  so  frightened.  She  said, 
( Nanny,  give  me  my  salts,  I  am  very  faint ;  open 
the  window.'  '  My  dear  mistress,  what  is  the  trouble  ?  ' 
I  exclaimed.  She  walked  the  room,  her  hands  clasped 
over  her  head,  and  after  a  while  she  said :  1 1  feel  better 
now.  Come  sit  beside  me.  I  am  interested  in  the 
story  of  the  prophecy,  I  really  had  forgotten  it. 
Strange,  is  it  not,  that  we  should  have  gotten  on  that 
subject  to-day  ?  I  believe  it  is  going  to  drive  my  head- 
ache away?  Do  you  remember  it?' 

"  I  said,  e  I  think  so,  but  I  have  a  copy  of  it,'  and  I 
think  every  slave  on  the  plantation  had  a  copy  of  the 
oracle's  last  prophecy.  I  got  it  and  read  to  her.  When 
it  came  to  the  part  about  her,  '  poor  little  pale  face  will 
have  sad  life  with  pale-face  man,  and  will  be  in  great 
danger  from  a  woman  of  our  tribe,  Uno  Who  will  save 
her,  and  the  pride  of  the  de  Gomora  family.' 

"  She  sobbed  and  cried,  saying,  '  I  wish  I  could  see 
Uno.  The  part  of  the  prophecy  of  their  family  being 
honored  has  come  true,  and  I  am  sure  this  will,  even  my 
father  spoke  of  the  prophecy  concerning  them  coming 


172  Uno  Who. 

true.  Yes,  they  all  believe  it,  and  strange  that  I  have 
not  thought  of  it.' 

"  She  was  walking  the  floor  again,  and  said,  'This  day 
my  eyes  have  been  opened.'  She  threw  herself  on  the 
bed  in  a  fit  of  hysterical  crying.  She  said,  *  Do  not  let 
Meno  come  in  until  I  get  myself  under  control.  Then 
I  will  tell  her  to  go  to  Mrs.  West  and  say  I  cannot  go 
out  this  afternoon.  Nanny,  I  see  my  time  for  action 
has  come.  I  will  think  of  my  future,  asking  wisdom  of 
Him  who  giveth  freely,  and  upbraideth  not.' 

"  I  left  her  and  went  to  my  room.  There  is  a  com- 
municating door,  and  I  heard  that  dear  child  praying 
for  the  man  who  is  so  unjust  to  her.  Yes,  Senorita, 
praying  for  him  and  I  wishing  the  devil  had  him.  If 
things  keep  on  at  this  rate  my  thinking  cap  won't  hold 
out.  I  believe  in  prayer,  and  am  on  my  knees  half  of 
the  time  asking  for  help,  but  to  pray  for  that  man  is 
an  insult  to  the  Lord. 

"  Pardon  me,  Senorita,  I  know  you  would  not  allow 
me  to  talk  to  you  this  way,  but  all  the  '  nigger '  in  me 
is  roused.  My  disposition  is  ruined  forever  if  I  live 
here  much  longer. 

"  Mr.  Ross  is  done  gone  when  he  reach  the  point  when 
he  want  to  separate  me  from  my  mistress.  This  is  that 
woman's  work.  She  has  him  sure  enough.  My  blood 
is  boiling,  and  I  wish  I  could  go  to  '  nigger '  prayer- 
meeting,  where  I  could  shout.  The  evil  one  has  got 
hold  of  me  since  I  went  with  the  laundress  and  saw  Mr. 
Ross  go  to  the  Signal  Red  house,  and  they  were  having 


Uno  Who.  173 

a  fine  time.  It  is  now  common  talk  of  the  town  his 
attentions  to  her.  I  have  heard  Mr.  Ross  ask  his  wife 
what  made  her  talk  so  nervous,  and  she  simply  replied, 
'  Do  I  ? '  When  we  were  alone  she  said,  *  He  never  used 
to  talk  like  this  to  me/ 

"  Senorita,  it  will  be  necessary  to  do  something  for 
her  very  soon,  or  her  health  will  suffer.  She  is  not 
well  now,  and  if  things  keep  on  it  will  be  enough  to 
turn  her  head.  She  seems  to  have  taken  a  dislike  to 
Meno,  but  does  not  appear  so  to  her,  as  they  go  driving 
together  every  day,  but  the  Indian  lady  is  fine.  She 
needs  your  care,  for  I  believe  she  is  the  Indian  of  the 
prophecy." 

When  Uno  received  this  letter  she  knew  Mr.  Ross 
would  soon  be  recalled,  and  they  would  keep  Garita  in 
her  old  home  during  the  winter.  She  wondered  where 
the  powers  of  the  seventh  daughter  were  that  she  had 
not  read  the  heart  of  Meno,  but  Meno  did  not  know  her 
own  heart.  Had  anyone  told  her  before  she  went  away 
that  she  would  plot  to  injure  that  innocent  woman,  she 
would  have  been  highly  indignant. 

The  little  things  she  had  said  were  harmless,  perhaps 
she  was  jealous.  Who  could  help  being  of  one  so  richly 
endowed  with  blessings? 

Could  she  have  stood  beside  Uno  while  she  drew  aside 
the  curtain  to  a  tragic  scene  she  would  have  said,  "  How 
horrible!" 


174  Uno  Who. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

"  Afford  me  place  to  show  what  recompense 
Towards  thee  I  intend  for  what  I  have  misdone." 

THERE  was  great  rejoicing  at  the  news  that  Garita  was 
coming  home.  To  the  many  friends  who  thought  her 
ill,  it  was  told  that  she  had  been  very  homesick,  also 
that  the  climate  did  not  agree  with  her. 

Mr.  Ross  was  very  loverlike  in  his  devotions  to  his 
wife.  Meno  had  to  tell  of  her  sympathy  for  Mrs.  Ross 
at  having  to  live  so  long  in  that  new  country,  and  how 
much  she  had  done  for  the  churches,  and  how  she  had 
been  admired.  Uno  was  unprepared  for  the  course 
she  and  Mr.  Ross  were  taking,  but  she  thought,  "  You 
are  not  going  to  outwit  me  this  time.  The  serpent  is 
not  dead,  but  waiting  a  more  convenient  season." 

Garita  received  their  attentions  in  an  indifferent  man- 
ner. She  made  not  the  slightest  sign  of  approval  or 
pleasure  at  anything  they  said  or  did.  She  was  at 
home  and  could  talk  if  she  chose,  and  all  would  be 
taken  for  gospel  truth.  For  the  time  being  they  were 
in  her  power.  She  could  send  them  both  out  from  her 
life  homeless  and  friendless,  but  it  was  her  husband,  and 
it  was  for  better  or  for  worse.  Then  perhaps  the  dark 
days  would  never  come  back. 


Uno  Who.  175 

Uno  invited  the  families  to  her  plantation  home.  It 
seemed  that  every  one  wanted  to  do  something  for 
Garita.  She  was  overwhelmed  with  kindness,  and  by 
none  more  than  Paulo,  who  was  so  straightforward  and 
honorable  in  all  he  said  and  did  that  her  enemies  could 
not  help  but  understand  that  he  knew  what  they  had 
done  and  said. 

Mr.  Ross  would  not  go  to  England  to  live,  and  Garita 
had  her  friends  secure  a  position  for  him  at  the  North, 
where  they  went  in  the  spring  to  live.  Uno  felt  that 
Garita  was  being  led  on  by  the  light  of  the  eternal  stars 
to  promised  lands  that  lay  ahead  only  to  be  betrayed 
into  the  hands  of  her  enemies. 

In  regard  to  Meno,  she  felt  that  their  path  in  life 
would  never  cross  again,  for  the  family  could  prevent  it. 
It  would  have  been  better  for  Garita  if  Mr.  Eoss  had 
gone  to  England  to  live,  but  the  social  atmosphere  was 
not  congenial.  He  could  now  have  a  fine  income,  and 
could  seek  the  society  of  those  who  would  appreciate  a 
nature  like  his.  He  admired  and  loved  his  wife,  if  he 
could  bring  her  down  to  his  level,  all  would  be  well. 
He  was  under  restraint  in  her  society  and  that  of  her 
friends,  and  he  deceived  her  because  he  knew  she 
would  not  approve  of  the  truth,  and  consequently 
drifted  away  from  her  into  the  social  life  of  those  who 
make  a  weak  nature  like  his  believe  he  is  married  but 
not  mated. 

Mr.  Eoss  had  asked  his  wife  to  write  to  England, 
and  secure  this  position  for  him,  and  she  was  in  hopes 


176  Uno  Who. 

that  he  would  do  differently.  Vain  hope — she  did  not 
know  this  would  be  one  more  act  in  the  drama  of  her 
life. 

Garita  spent  the  summer  at  Saratoga  with  her 
brother,  Mr.  Ross  going  there  frequently.  In  the  fall 
she  would  go  to  the  beautiful  house  she  had  purchased. 
Her  friends  were  delighted  when  they  heard  she  was 
going  to  a  home  of  her  own,  and  were  lavish  in  the 
beautiful  gifts  they  bestowed. 

She  was  happy  to  all  appearances,  taking  the  greatest 
interest  in  the  furnishing  of  her  house.  It  was  late 
in  the  fall  before  she  was  ready  for  the  reception  of 
Ola  and  Uno  whom  she  had  invited  to  be  her  first  guests. 

She  was  expecting  her  cousin,  Don  Alfonso,  but  he 
was  detained  in  Madrid  by  the  illness  of  his  father 
whose  recovery  was  doubtful. 

Upon  receipt  of  this  news  Col.  Who  went  to  Eng- 
land. He  had  been  waiting  for  Don  Alfonso  that  they 
might  return  together. 

The  family's  claim  to  nobility  had  been  established, 
and  there  was  much  that  needed  looking  after.  He 
would,  therefore,  remain  in  Spain  during  the  winter. 

Garita  had  not  told  Uno  of  her  strange  and  unhappy 
life,  and  she  felt  that  perhaps  it  was  unjust  to  her 
friend.  In  the  future  if  anything  further  should  oc- 
cur, Uno  would  be  prepared  by  knowledge  of  the  past 
how  to  act  for  her. 

Uno  had  not  referred  to  anything  in  regard  to  Mr. 
Ross  except  the  Estaugh  letter,  and  she  rather  encour- 


Uno  Who.  177 

aged  the  belief  that  it  was  Meno'c  doings.  It  at  least 
would  make  better  feeling  in  regard  to  Mr.  Koss  to  think 
so. 

Garita  improved  the  first  opportunity  when  they  were 
alone  to  relate  to  her  what  Nannette  had  already  writ- 
ten, omitting  the  one  subject  of  most  importance, — her 
mind.  She  tried  in  every  way  to  make  some  excuse  for 
Mr.  Ross,  even  smoothing  over  the  parts  she  was  obliged 
to  tell.  Uno  had  brought  with  her  the  letter  that  Meno 
had  Nannette  copy,  and  she  gave  the  letter  to  Garita 
to  read.  It  opened  the  way  to  Uno's  letting  her  know 
she  was  aware  of  the  story  about  her  mind  being  af- 
fected, which  she  felt  sure  Garita  would  never  tell  un- 
less forced  to. 

At  first  she  was  inclined  to  blame  Nannette  for 
doing  what  Meno  asked  her  to,  but  Uno  very  soon  mads 
her  see  the  necessity  for  action  on  the  part  of  Nan- 
nette. 

Garita  walked  the  floor  of  her  boudoir  for  a  few 
minutes  in  silence,  then  as  if  in  desperation  at  finding 
her  secret  was  known,  she  pushed  a  hassock  in  front  of 
Uno,  and  sitting  down  laid  her  head  in  her  lap,  bursting 
out  crying,  saying :  "  Uno,  Uno,  how  I  longed  for  you 
in  those  terrible  days.  The  prophecy  has  come  true, 
but  I  am  sure  the  worst  is  not  over.  I  had  forgotten 
about  it  until  Nannette  referred  to  it  one  day,  and  since 
then  my  eyes  have  been  opened,  and  I  am  sure  my  hus- 
band is  deceiving  me  now,  but  I  am  among  friends,  and 
shall  try  and  have  some  of  them  with  me.  0,  that  I 


178  Uno  Who. 

could  forget.  You  can  never  know  how  cruelly  he  has 
wronged  me.  I  kept  a  great  deal  from  Nannette,  for  she 
got  so  excited,  but  now  I  shall  trust  her,  and  you  will 
know  what  I  cannot  write. 

"  When  my  eyes  were  first  opened  I  was  crushed,  yes, 
my  very  life  seemed  to  have  paused,  as  it  were,  but  now 
I  am  learning  to  suffer  and  be  strong,  though  I  also  have 
learned  that  life  is  a  lie  and  love  a  cheat.  I  first 
thought  that  I  would  go  and  leave  my  husband  to  his 
fate,  but  that  would  cause  no  end  of  talk.  Then  1 
knew  they  would  soon  hear  of  the  wreck  at  home  and 
that  lifeboats  would  be  sent,  and  he  would  go  with 
me.  It  seemed  sometimes  that  I  was  forsaken  by  God. 
I  could  not  pray,  my  heart  was  so  full  of  grief.  My 
looks  were  my  accusers  with  those  who  had  wronged  me. 
Oh,  he  was  strangely  infatuated;  very  irritable,  and  the 
letters  I  found  fairly  glared  at  me.  Then  I  became  the 
daughter  of  my  proud  father  in  my  treatment  of  him. 
You  know  my  affectionate  nature  toward  those  I  love. 
I  continued  to  bestow  upon  him  that  affection  until  one 
day  with  his  strong  arm  he  laid  my  heart  dead  at  his 
feet.  Since  then  these  poor  lonely  ghosts  of  my  buried 
hopes  have  haunted  me  night  and  day.  I  try  to  bring 
back  the  quickening  tide  of  life  once  more,  but  it  is 
too  late.  Each  day  I  enter  into  my  holy  of  holies,  and 
there  implore  of  him  who  doeth  all  things  well  to  keep 
my  home  from  being  polluted  by  the  one  I  have  taken 
for  better  or  for  worse." 

She  asked  Uno  to  accompany  her,  and  before  a  beau- 


Uno  Who.  179 

tiful  altar  they  prayed  that  peace  and  purity,  truth  and 
justice  might  be  her  gentle  guests.  There  with  uplifted 
hands  she  prayed  for  the  man  who  had  so  cruelly 
wronged  her.  Then  she  told  Uno  she  had  now  buried 
the  past,  and  would  go  forth  to  meet  the  shadowy  future. 
In  her  beautiful  little  chapel  she  had  a  window  in  mem- 
ory of  her  father,  a  crucifix  that  had  been  sent  to  htr 
from  Spain  with  paintings,  and  an  organ.  She  said: 
"  I  have  always  thought  when  I  had  a  home  I  would 
have  a  chapel  where  our  dear  Lord  should  be  the 
honored  guest."  She  then  had  the  folding  doors  thrown 
open  into  the  music  room,  connecting  it  with  the  chapel. 

When  Mr.  Ross  came  home,  Garita  with  Ola  and 
Uno  were  singing.  He  stood  listening  and  enjoying 
the  beauty  of  the  rooms  until  they  had  finished.  He 
then  put  his  arm  about  his  wife,  and  kissed  her  lovely 
brow,  saying:  "The  arrangement  of  these  rooms  is 
like  you ;  have  you  shown  Senorita  the  harp  ? " 

"  Oh,  yes,  Mr.  Eoss,  and  I  have  enjoyed  it  very  much, 
also  the  inscription  for  You-Know-Who ;  it  is  very  kind 
of  you,  and  I  have  been  made  to  feel  I  am  a  welcome 
guest  in  your  house." 

Garita  played  and  sang,  accompanied  by  Ola  and 
Uno: 


"  Some  may  win  fortune, 

And  some  may  win  fame ; 
All  must  know  sorrow, 

And  many  know  shame  ; 
As  we  wander  life's  pilgrimage  through ; 


i8o  Uno  Who. 

Come  the  joy  or  the  grief  in  my  pathway  that  lies, 
Even  shame  I  could  bear  if  the  few  that  I  prize 
Would  look  on  me  with  the  same  fond  eyes, 
And  thou  art  among  the  few." 

As  they  sang  the  last  line  Garita  looked  up  in  her 
husband's  face  as  he  stood  beside  her  turning  the  leaves 
of  the  music,  her  large  brown  eyes  beaming  with  love 
so  sad  it  must  have  gone  to  his  heart,  for  he  put  his 
arm  across  her  shoulder  and  lovingly  patted  her  cheek. 

Was  it  their  imagination  that  there  was  a  slight 
tremor  in  his  voice  when  he  said :  "  Garita,  you  never 
sang  better,  and  it  would  be  well  to  take  lessons  of  one 
of  our  fine  professors  this  winter." 

As  she  arose  from  the  piano  she  said :  "  I  am  trying 
to  prevail  upon  Ola  to  remain  here.  She  is  already 
in  great  demand,  and  I  would  have  an  incentive  to  keep 
up  my  practice." 

The  shadow  that  passed  over  his  face  did  not  escape 
Uno's  notice,  and  seating  herself  in  an  armchair,  she 
thought,  that  man  is  playing  a  part,  and  from  this 
time  I  will  begin  playing  mine.  Why  cannot  he  be 
true  to  himself  and  the  woman  who  has  placed  her 
life's  happiness  in  his  hands?  He  is  a  weak  man,  and 
an  artful  woman  could  flatter  him  into  almost  any- 
thing when  she  has  him  in  her  power.  She  can  lead 
him,  for  he  is  a  moral  coward.  That  artful  woman 
will  say,  'Do  as  I  wish  or  I  will  expose  you  to  your 
family.'  The  wife  says,  'I  can  bear  this  neglect  no 
longer.'  He  knows  exposure  is  financial  ruin.  His 


Uno  Who.  181 

evil  influence  says,  'Be  cautious,  we  must  keep  the 
means  of  support.  I  love  you  and  would  make  any 
sacrifice,  and  that  is  more  than  you  will  receive  in 
your  uninteresting  home.  Your  wife  wearies  you. 
Her  friends  are  not  congenial.  If  I  have  not  family 
influence  I  manage  to  keep  as  good  society  as  you  care 
for,  and  there  is  no  restraint.  You  must  be  careful 
how  you  treat  your  wife,  for  we  must  keep  public 
opinion  on  our  side.'  His  evil  influence  says,  '  I  dare 
not  say  it  to  him,  but  I  will  poison  the  mind  of  public 
opinion,  then  it  will  be  easy  to  control  him.  When  he 
sees  others  turn  against  her,  and  she  will  be  left  to 
weep  alone,  he  will  think  there  must  be  something 
wrong.  His  treatment  of  her  will  irritate  her,  for  she 
is  proud  and  sensitive.  He  will  come  to  me,  and  I 
will  sympathize  with  him,  but  tell  him  what  I  have 
heard,  and  that  he  must  take  his  wife  out  and  have 
his  friends  see  that  he  does  not  neglect  her.  But  I  will 
be  sure  that  I  have  a  new  story  of  some  freak  of  hers 
started;  a  certain  set  will  get  it,  and  she  will  feel  that 
she  is  the  subject  of  remark.  He  will  notice  the  neglect, 
and  begin  to  think  there  must  be  something  wrong. 
He  will  tell  me,  and  I  will  pity  him,  but  urge  him  to 
take  her  out,  and  keep  her  before  the  public.  Show 
them  how  devoted  you  are,  and  when  the  right  time 
comes  you  can  keep  her  home  and  have  the  sympathy 
of  the  public,  and  your  business  interests  will  not  be 
injured.  I  must  not  let  him  know  the  part  I  have 
taken  in  it,  for  he  once  loved  his  wife.  Yes,  he  idolized 


182  Uno  Who. 

her,  and  I  must  be  very  careful  that  he  does  not  see 
through  my  plot  to  get  him  in  my  power  and  his  wife 
out  of  the  way." 

"  Uno,  what  have  you  been  thinking  about  ? "  said 
Garita.  "  You  have  been  buried  in  thought  for  some 
minutes." 

Uno  then  realized  she  had  been  oblivious  to  every- 
thing about  her  during  which  time  Garita's  life  lay 
before  her,  and  she  felt  herself  in  the  worst  Eoss  chill 
she  had  ever  experienced.  She  saw  him  looking  at  her 
intently,  and  the  thought  came  to  her  mind,  had  Meno 
told  him  of  the  prophecy?  She  was  satisfied  she  had, 
and  that  he  would  keep  her  out  of  his  life  as  far  as  it 
was  possible  for  him  to  do.  He  knew  few  of  her  sisters, 
and  she  would  take  good  care  that  Meno  did  not  know 
of  any  of  their  movements  to  inform  him.  Burnedita 
and  Marie,  she  would  have  Meno  think,  were  in  Spain. 
As  soon  as  she  could  make  arrangements  to  have  them 
removed,  they  would  be  brought  to  the  convent  near 
Garita,  and  she  would  know  there  were  those  who  would 
be  friends  in  need  near  by. 

Such  were  her  thoughts,  and  she  could  not  drive 
them  away.  Finally  she  said:  "Garita,  I  am  poor 
company  this  evening;  if  you  will  excuse  me,  I  will 
retire." 

As  she  closed  her  door,  she  said  aloud:  "You  will 
have  reason  to  dread  me,  Mr.  Boss,  I  am  ever  on  the 
trail  of  my  enemies.  You  cannot  go  out  into  the  world 
and  say  and  feel  that  you  are  your  own  master,  but  the 


Uno  Who.  183 

victim  of  an  evil  influence,  which  you  cannot  and  dare 
not  throw  off.  Mr.  Ross,  you  are  a  weakling,  and  I 
will  help  you  throw  off  this  influence  in  a  manner  you 
least  expect.  I  have  said,  he  it  prophetic  or  not,  that 
the  arrow  of  the  Indian  girl  on  the  trail  of  her  enemy 
would  not  be  more  sure  than  the  cultivated  eye  and  ear 
of  her  civilized  sister,  and  I  will  prove  my  words  true, 
for  you  will  yet  he  in  my  power." 

Ola  and  Uno,  leaving  Garita  apparently  in  the  hest 
of  spirits,  returned  to  Cuba.  They  stopped  in  Florida 
to  see  Seminole,  and  found  Meno  at  "  Sunnyside," 
where  she  would  remain.  They  went  to  the  convent 
where  Uno  prepared  Burnedita  for  the  change  she 
knew  would  take  place  as  soon  as  she  had  seen  the 
Mother  Superior. 

Uno  went  to  Georgia,  and  after  a  talk  with  Pam- 
philo,  he  said  that  he  and  his  wife  would  surprise  Mr. 
Ross  during  the  winter,  and  she  impressed  upon  him 
the  necessity  of  some  of  her  friends  going  to  his  sister's 
house  and  looking  into  her  affairs.  He,  as  one  of  the 
executors,  could  do  so. 

Before  going  to  the  plantation,  Uno  went  to  see  the 
Mother  Superior,  who  quite  agreed  with  her  in  having 
help  near  at  hand.  She  would  see  that  Burnedita  and 
Marie  were  sent  to  the  convent  near  Garita.  Ola  re- 
mained at  her  aunt's  in  Havana  while  Uno  went  to  the 
plantation,  where  they  were  waiting  for  her  return  to 
open  the  new  institution. 

The    old    house,    though    spacious,    was    becoming 


1 84  Uno  Who. 

crowded,  and  Aunt  Thetis  on  her  way  half  of  the  time 
to  the  Castle-by-the-sea.  There  were  several  kinds  of 
work  in  progress  on  the  place,  and  all  were  trying  to 
make  themselves  useful. 

Uno  was  enjoying  the  rest  and  quiet  of  her  home, 
and  with  her  father  planning  their  future  in  Spain. 
Thetis  was  enjoying  the  serene  expectation  of  her 
future  life.  Now  they  were  rid  of  the  proteges,  when 
they  were  surprised  by  Ola.  She  had  received  news  of 
the  death  of  the  Marquis  of  Floraine,  and  did  not  wisli 
to  remain  in  Havana. 

In  the  spring  Paulo  wrote :  "  We  are  now  in  pos- 
session of  the  ancestral  palace  of  the  Estabanez  family, 
and  Don  Alfonzo  (now  Marquis  of  Floraine)  tells  me 
that  he  and  Ola  will  be  married  in  the  fall.  I  hope 
the  wedding  may  take  place  in  the  home  of  her  grand- 
mother's ancestors." 

When  Thetis  heard  of  this  arrangement,  she  said: 
"Will  this  family  ever  get  through  tramping  across 
the  ocean?  I  think  it  would  look  more  respectable 
for  Don  Alfonso  to  come  here.  No,  I  would  not  cross 
the  ocean  for  a  crown.  It  makes  me  sick  to  think  how 
I  felt  when  I  came  here  from  Florida,  but  do  tell  me 
who  is  going  to  look  after  Seminole's  Arabs.  She  can- 
not take  them  along,  and  they  must  not  be  left  to  the 
mercy  of  servants.  I  suppose  Wauka  will  have  to  go 
there.  I  do  hojje  this  will  be  the  last  wedding  of  my 
day." 


Uno  Who.  185 

"  Just  think,  Aunt  Thetis,"  said  Uno,  "  Ola  is  going 
to  marry  the  Marquis  of  Floraine." 

"  Yes,  I  am  aware  of  it,  and  that  he  is  going  to  take 
the  flower  of  an  illustrious  family." 

"  Aunt  Thetis,  father  has  decided  to  let  Paulo  have 
the  titles  and  estates  in  his  grandmother's  native  coun- 
try." 

"  Osceola,  you  have  done  well.  Paulo  is  a  good  man 
if  he  would  only  settle  down.  That  military  life  made 
him  restless.  I  was  afraid  you  and  Uno  would  think 
you  must  go  there  and  live  in  the  palace,  leaving  me 
to  look  after  the  proteges.  I  had  my  mind  made  up 
on  that  subject." 

"No,"  said  Uno,  "I  will  never  desert  this  home. 
My  work  here  has  only  just  begun." 

Mr.  Ross  urged  his  wife  to  accompany  her  brothers 
and  friends  to  attend  the  wedding  in  Spain,  but  he 
could  not  leave  his  business.  Garita  thought  how  dif- 
ferent it  was  from  the  days  when  he  would  not  let  her 
go  home  without  him.  Now  he  was  willing  to  place  the 
ocean  between  them. 

Uno  improved  the  opportunity  of  getting  Burnedita 
North,  that  she  could  become  familiar  with  the  Ross 
household.  Ola  insisted  that  Marie  should  attend  her 
wedding,  and  wished  her  to  live  with  her,  only  leaving 
to  help  Uno,  and  Paulo  had  written  that  she  must 
live  with  him. 

The  lovely  girl  had  been  faithful  over  a  few  things, 
and  now  found  herself  ruler  over  many. 


1 86  Uno  Who. 

Garita  and  her  brothers  went  to  England,  where, 
after  the  wedding,  they  remained  some  time.  Upon 
their  return  to  America  they  went  to  Saratoga,  Marie 
going  to  the  convent.  Uno  did  not  return,  but  at  her 
brother's  urgent  request,  remained  with  him.  Then 
she  had  work  for  the  Mother  Superior,  who  had  written 
that  Senora  de  Vega  was  in  Madrid,  called  there  by 
the  serious  illness  of  her  husband.  He  was  in  the  hos- 
pital, where  she  needed  Uno's  influence  in  gaining 
entree.  She  met  Senora  at  the  hospital,  and  explained 
to  the  sister  in  charge  who  she  was.  The  Colonel  was 
delirious,  and,  in  the  garb  of  a  sister,  she  was  allowed 
to  assist  in  nursing  him.  The  first  words  she  heard 
upon  entering  his  room  were :  "  Jeanie,  Jeanie,  why  did 
you  go?  I  did  not  mean  what  I  said.  Forgive  me. 
Jeanie." 

Then  he  rolled  his  head  upon  the  pillow,  and  with  a 
sudden  start  in  which  it  took  two  attendants  to  hold 
him,  he  screamed:  "Kill  that  snake.  It  has  bitten 
Jeanie.  It  has  driven  her  away  to  die.  Yes,  to  die 
alone." 

Then  exhausted,  he  lay  back  on  the  pillow.  Putting 
Nout  his  hands,  he  very  pitifully  said:  "Here,  Jeanie. 
are  your  darlings.  It  was  cruel  to  take  them  from  you." 
Then  folding  his  arms,  as  if  he  had  her  in  his  embrace, 
he  said :  "  I  knew  you  would  forgive  me,"  and  he  cried 
like  a  child,  saying:  "It  is  nice  to  be  in  our  happy 
home."  After  he  had  lain  exhausted  for  a  while  he 
would  again  start  up,  screaming :  "  Where  am  I  ?  _  Take 


Uno  Who.  187 

me  to  her.  They  say  she  is  not  dead."  Then  laying 
back  on  his  pillow,  he  cried  out :  "  Oh,  these  years  of 
misery." 

The  sisters  told  Uno  the  fever  had  nearly  run  its 
course.  He  had  raved  for  days,  and  it  would  soon  end. 

The  disguise  was  perfect,  even  should  he  suddenly 
become  conscious. 

When  the  fever  was  broken  the  physicians  said  he 
was  a  strong  man  and  would  no  doubt  soon  recover. 
When  he  asked  to  see  his  boys  they  were  permitted  to 
come,  but  he  was  not  allowed  to  talk. 

This  was  a  very  trying  time  for  Senora,  but  she  kept 
back  where  the  Colonel  could  not  see  her  watching 
them.  She  went  to  the  door  and  managed  to  shake 
hands  as  they  went  out.  When  he  was  stronger  they 
came  every  day,  sometimes  bringing  papers  and  read- 
ing to  him.  One  day  they  brought  a  magazine,  saying, 
"  Here  is  an  article  by  the  writer  you  like  so  much.  I 
think,  father,  it  is  strange  we  cannot  find  out  who  she 
is." 

In  the  twilight  she  managed  to  talk  with  her  hus- 
band about  his  lovely  boys.  She  told  him  she  had  lost 
two  children  and  a  husband,  that  she  was  restless  and 
unhappy  and  had  become  a  sister  of  charity  as  a  diver- 
sion. He  told  her  it  was  very  kind  to  sit  with  him  in 
the  twilight,  as  he  did  not  like  to  be  alone,  so  evening 
after  evening  she  talked  with  him.  Once  he  said: 
"  Did  you  not  tell  me  you  had  been  in  America  ?  " 

"  Yes,  Colonel,  I  wanted  to  tell  your  sons  I  had  met 


i88  Uno  Who. 

the  authoress  of  the  magazine  articles,  but  I  did  not 
know  that  you  would  approve  of  a  sister  of  charity 
taking  part  in  your  conversation.  It  was  in  America 
I  met  her.  She  is  quite  a  noted  woman,  and  has  written 
several  novels,  the  last  of  which  has  created  a  greater 
sensation  than  '  Out  of  the  Depths '  did.  I  met  her  at 
the  home  of  the  brother  of  the  Marquis  of  Floraine. 
Lady  Margaret  Oughton  was  there  from  England, 
and  invited  her  to  visit  her.  She  is  coming  to  Spain 
as  the  guest  of  the  sister  of  Col.  Who,  who  has  just 
married  the  young  Marquis  of  Floraine.  Colonel,  has 
she  not  taken  a  strange  nom  de  plume?  'The  Un- 
known/ and  the  title  of  her  last  book  is  '  Seek  and  ye 
shall  find.'  It  seems  like  an  invitation  for  some  one 
to  look  for  her." 

Uno  was  sitting  where  she  could  hear  the  conversa- 
tion, and  he  did  not  know  she  was  in  the  room.  After 
a  few  minutes'  silence  he  asked :  "  What  does  this  un- 
known woman  look  like  ?  " 

"  She  is  not  handsome,  Colonel.  She  has  dark  hair, 
and  expressive  gray  eyes.  Her  friends  say  she  has  a 
bewitching  smile  and  beautiful  teeth,  but  I  never  saw 
her  smile.  She  rarely  ever  goes  out  in  company,  but 
has  traveled  extensively  with  the  sister  of  Col.  Who. 
They  say  she  has  had  a  strange  sad  life.  Her  last  book- 
has  caused  her  to  scorn  delights  and  live  laborious 
days,  but  it  has  made  her  famous." 

"Is  she  French?"  said  the  Colonel. 


Uno  Who.  189 

"  I  do  not  know,  she  speaks  several  languages,  and 
holds  an  enviable  position  in  the  hearts  of  her  friends." 

"  Sister,  what  did  you  say  her  name  is  ?  " 

"  Senora  de  Vega,  but  every  one  calls  her  the  '  Un- 
known.' " 

It  is  best  to  not  talk  unless  one  has  something  to  say, 
so  the  sister  evidently  thought,  for  she  went  quietly  out 
of  the  room,  then  returned  to  light  up  and  give  her 
patient  his  medicine. 

The  next  day,  when  his  sons  came,  he  told  them 
that  the  sister  knew  the  unknown  authoress,  and  her 
name  was  the  same  as  theirs.  After  they  had  gone 
she  sat  down  beside  the  bed,  and  in  conversation  about 
his  sons,  she  said :  "  You  are  always  called  Colonel, 
and  you  call  your  sons  by  their  given  name,  so  I  had 
not  heard  the  name  '  de  Vega.'  It  would  be  strange  if 
you  should  find  that  she  is  a  relation  of  yours,  but  I 
see  and  hear  stranger  things  than  that  in  my  hospital 
life.  My  own  sad  life  makes  me  interested  in  others. 
I  envy  you  because  you  have  something  to  love." 

He  said :  "  Yes,  my  sons  are  a  great  comfort.  Are 
you  alone  in  the  world,  sister  ?  " 

"Yes,  I  saw  my  husband  and  sons  taken  from  me 
at  almost  one  blow,  only  a  few  short  hours  apart.  It 
left  me  stunned,  stricken  and  alone.  I  loved  my  hus- 
band, God  only  knows  how  well,  but  the  blow  came 
when  I  was  trying  to  rescue  him  from  the  approaching 
ill  which  clasped  him  in  its  black  arms.  I  then  went 


190  Uno  Who. 

to  my  children,  knowing  that  destiny's  relentless  knife 
must  sever  them  from  me.  If  I  could  only  hear  my 
darlings  say,  'Mother,  dear/  once  more,  I  would  ask 
no  greater  boon.  Were  your  sons  old  enough  to  remem- 
ber their  mother  when  she  was  taken  from  them?" 

With  a  trembling  voice  he  said :  "  Yes,"  then  look- 
ing at  the  sister,  he  said:  "You  often  remind  me  of 
my  wife." 

With  a  smile  she  answered :  "  I  hope  it  is  a  pleasant 
reminder." 

"  Yes,  sister,  but  I  cruelly  wronged  her,  and  the  re- 
membrance of  it  doth  afflict  me  grievously.  My  wife 
is  always  in  my  mind." 

"  Then  that  was  what  made  you  so  continually  rave 
about  Jeanie  in  your  delirium.  Was  that  her  name  ?  " 

"Yes,"  he  said. 

"  Then,  perhaps,  in  spirit,  she  was  near  you." 

"  She  has  not  entered  into  spirit  life,"  he  said. 

"  Col.  de  Vega,  it  was  your  wife  I  met  in  America." 

"  I  have  no  doubt  of  it,"  he  replied. 

"  Do  you  love  her  ?  " 

"  I  have  never  ceased  to  love  her." 

"Why  not  send  for  her?" 

"  I  do  not  think  she  would  come." 

"  Col.  de  Vega,  that  sad  face  told  me  of  a  heart  that 
was  yearning  for  its  home,  husband  and  children.  Send 
for  her,  and  thou  wilt  find  love  and  peace  no  mortal 
tongue  has  told." 


Uno  Who.  191 

He  burst  into  tears,  as  he  exclaimed:  "If  I  could 
only  see  her  and  die  in  our  home." 

"  Colonel,  you  are  not  going  to  die,  but  I  am  sure 
you  will  go  to  your  home,  and  find  your  wife  there  to 
meet  you,  if  I  can  get  her  there  before  you  get  well  and 
leave  this  hospital,  so  don't  get  well  too  fast,  and  you 
have  the  disagreeable  task  of  preparing  your  sons  to 
meet  their  mother.  I  am  almost  as  happy  as  you  are 
to  be  able  to  bring  about  a  reconciliation  for  that  un- 
happy woman,  and  now  that  I  see  you  love  her,  and 
always  have,  I  feel  that  the  closing  of  your  once  happy 
lives  was  as  though  a  morning  in  June,  with  all  its 
music  and  sunshine,  had  suddenly  paused  in  the  sky. 
She  has  been  making  this  dreary  blank  of  absence  a 
noble  task  of  time,  while  you,  too  proud  to  acknowl- 
edge your  wrong,  have  grown  gray,  carrying  about  the 
great  heart's  secret  that  she  alone  must  hear.  How 
strange  it  must  have  seemed  with  so  much  gone  of  life 
and  love  to  still  live  on.  Think  of  her  who  has  been 
longing  to  hear  the  coming  of  little  feet  she  left  upon 
the  untried  border  of  life's  mysterious  land.  Oh, 
Colonel,  I  know  her  heart  will  leap  forth  in  joy  to 
greet  her  husband  and  boys." 

"  Sister,  when  I  was  on  the  shore  of  death's  dividing 
sea,  with  spirit  scathed  and  rent  and  riven,  I  thought 
the  sweet  unspoken  words  were  never  more  for  me. 
The  thorns  which  I  have  reaped  are  of  the  tree  I 
planted.  They  have  torn  not  only  me,  but  those  whose 


iQ2  Uno  Who. 

lives  I  held  closer  and  dearer  than  my  own.  Can  I 
hope  to  be  forgiven  ?  " 

"Yes,  for  she  believes  we  climb  to  Heaven  on  the 
rounds  of  love." 

Colonel  de  Vega  did  not  have  to  wait  but  a  short 
time  before  his  physicians  said  he  could  be  taken  to  his 
home.  His  wife,  with  her  home  looking  as  it  did  the 
day  she  left  it,  was  watching  for  her  husband  and  sons. 
He  was  carried  to  his  room,  and  the  family  so  long 
separated  were  once  more  united  in  the  bonds  of  peace, 
and  the  sister  of  charity  hoped  in  righteousness  of  life. 


Uno  Who.  193 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

"  I  must  be  cruel  only  to  be  kind  ; 
Thus  bad  begins,  and  worse  remains  behind," 

WHILE  in  Spain,  Uno  had  told  Garita  of  the  Mother 
Superior  having  Burnedita  sent  to  the  convent  in  the 
city  in  which  she  was  living,  and  that  Marie  was  to  go 
there  upon  her  return. 

Mr.  Ross  had  never  seen  either  of  them,  and  they 
could  go  to  her  house,  Marie  to  give  painting  lessons, 
and  Burnedita  to  assist  her  in  keeping  up  her  practice 
*n  music.  In  this  way  they  would  know  if  anything 
was  going  wrong,  and  she  would  have  some  one  besides 
her  faithful  Nannette  to  confide  in. 

When  people  have  once  gone  astray,  they  are  apt  to 
give  false  ideas  and  false  intelligence.  She  told  Garita 
she  had  very  little  confidence  in  Mr.  Ross.  The  Mother 
Superior  would  do  all  in  her  power  to  protect  her  from 
wrongdoers.  She  said  the  daughter  of  Don  Pamphilo 
de  Gomora  would  not  be  without  friends. 

Garita  had   expressed   herself   in   most   affectionate 

terms  for  the  loving  kindness  she  was  receiving,  and 

was  not  surprised  when  Uno  told  her  that  Marie  had 

written  of  Nannette's  receiving  a  letter  from  the  colored 

13 


194  Uno  Who. 

laundress,  and  that  Signal  Eed  was  preparing  to  leave 
that  place. 

Uno  urged  Garita  to  remain  in  England,  and  have 
Mr.  Eoss  come  there  to  live.  She  had  hoped  this  bit 
of  news  would  make  her  feel  the  necessity  of  being 
with  her  family,  but  her  pride  had  been  wounded,  and 
she  disliked  to  bring  the  one  who  had  done  it  among 
her  friends.  No,  she  would  return  to  her  home  and  get 
what  happiness  she  could  out  of  life.  After  a  few 
minutes'  silence  she  said :  "  Uno,  I  wonder  if  I  was 
born  for  no  other  than  this  kind  of  life.  In  Boston 
it  was  Mrs.  Estaugh,  and  now  my  husband  is  the  slave 
of  an  evil  influence  that  I  feel  will  not  hesitate  to  com- 
mit almost  a  crime?  Must  I  leave  my  husband  and 
home?  Not  yet,  Uno,  give  me  one  more  trial.  I  must 
confess  that  I  would  be  almost  afraid  if  I  did  not  have 
you  at  the  helm.  If  those  people  come  to  live  where 
we  are  I  will  soon  know  of  it,  and  I  am  determined  that 
I  will  not  give  my  husband  an  air  of  respectability 
and  have  him  spending  his  time  and  money  on 
others." 

After  seeing  Senora  de  Vega  out  of  her  trouble,  Uno 
went  to  England  at  Dona's  request,  she  wishing  to  see 
her  before  her  return  to  America.  She  did  not  know 
how  much  or  how  little  Garita  had  told  of  her  affairs, 
but  she  felt  sure  they  wished  to  interview  her  in  regard 
to  the  unhappy  life  they  now  knew  she  was  living.  Uno 
found  Garita's  mother  and  sisters  anxiously  awaiting 
her  arrival.  Garita  had  not  told  them  of  her  trouble, 


Uno  Who.  195 

and  avoided  every  approach  to  a  conversation  on  the 
subject.  Her  brothers  had  told  what  they  knew,  but 
did  not  think  Mr.  Eoss  would  be  so  foolish  as  to  renew 
his  past  life,  and  they  were  going  to  look  after  her. 
Thus  they  quieted  their  mother  and  sisters. 

Uno  told  them  everything,  except  the  story  about 
her  mind  being  affected.  She  gave  them  the  Estaugh 
letter  to  read.  They  could  think  what  they  chose 
from  that.  It  was  a  satisfaction  to  let  Dona  see  that 
those  lovely  people  could  do  wrong.  She  related  Gar- 
ita's  experience  with  them  and  Mr.  Eoss  in  Boston, 
in  regard  to  which  her  sister,  Lady  Elaine,  knew  some- 
thing. 

Dona  was  surprised  at  the  part  Meno  was  taking  in 
the  life  of  her  unhappy  daughter,  and  wondered  why 
that  beautiful  and  amiable  woman  should  have  become 
the  victim  of  bad  people.  Uno  said  it  was  simply  be- 
cause she  had  married  beneath  her,  and  cannot  asso- 
ciate with  the  people  her  husband  enjoys,  and  it  creates 
in  their  hearts  envy,  hatred  and  malice  towards  one 
they  would  never  have  known  anything  about,  only 
for  him. 

"Eight,  quite  right,"  exclaimed  Lady  Margaret. 
"Uno,  you  were  always  opposed  to  this  match.  See 
what  happy  and  complete  lives  Flora  and  Elaine  are 
living.  It  nearly  broke  my  heart  to  see  Garita  trying 
to  appear  happy.  Uno,  if  you  were  not  there,  I  do  not 
know  what  we  would  do.  I  am  very  sure  this  Mrs. 
Eed  will  be  found  living  near  Garita.  It  is  very  wise 


196  Uno  Who. 

of  Nannette  to  keep  track  of  her,  and  I  hope  you  will 
manage  to  be  with  Garita  all  you  can." 

"  Lady  Margaret,  that  is  what  I  am  trying  to  avoid. 
I  know  Mr.  Boss  does  not  want  me  there,  and  I  could 
not  see  him  treat  his  wife  badly  without  saying  some- 
thing, which  would  bring  on  a  war  of  words.  Then 
my  influence  would  be  gone.  When  the  right  time 
comes,  I  will  be  there  if  he  does  not  treat  her  well." 

Uno  sailed  for  America,  but  she  did  not  let  Garita 
know  of  her  return,  fearing  Mr.  Eoss  might  hear  of  it, 
and  it  would  be  a  restraint  upon  him.  She  preferred 
his  miserable  life  to  mature  as  rapidly  as  possible  that 
she  might  be  rid  of  him,  for  she  knew  the  blood  around 
his  heart  was  dry  as  dust. 

Uno  went  to  the  convent,  and  there  learned  from 
her  sisters  of  the  miserable  life  Garita  was  living.  He 
had  made  the  most  of  his  time  during  his  wife's  absence. 

Nannette  had  learned  from  her  laundress  friend  that 
Mrs.  Signal  Ked  had  sold  her  house  and  left  that  place, 
but  that  she  could  not  find  out  where  they  had  gone, 
but  it  was  not  long,  however,  until  the  ever-watchful 
Nannette  saw  Mrs.  Red  on  the  street,  and  had  followed 
her  to  where  she  lived,  in  a  beautiful  house  not  far 
from  Mrs.  Ross. 

Mr.  Eoss  was  home  very  little,  and  was  very  dis- 
agreeable when  there. 

One  afternoon,  near  the  close  of  the  day,  Garita  was 
in  the  chapel  playing  the  organ.  Burnedita  was  play- 
ing the  harp,  and  with  Marie  they  were  singing.  Heart 


Uno  Who.  197 

and  voice  were  in  their  devotions,  and  they  did  not  hear 
(Mr.  Boss  enter  the  house.  As  they  finished  he  entered 
the  chapel,  and  said  with  a  sneer:  "That  is  a  very 
pretty  song." 

Garita  was  a  proud  woman,  and  these  drizzling 
rains  of  existence  were  very  wearing  to  her  sensitive 
nature.  They  had  chilled  her  to  the  very  bone. 

Mr.  Ross  did  not  like  the  nuns  coming  there,  and 
he  now  took  occasion  to  show  that  he  was  displeased. 
Garita  for  an  instant  seemed  petrified,  then  she  said: 
"Mr.  Ross,  you  have  wounded  a  spirit  that  has  loved 
you,  and  my  heart  is  too  full  of  grief  to  breathe  its 
bitterness  to  mortal  ear.  You  have  told  me  that  I  am 
being  made  the  subject  of  ridicule  for  having  this 
chapel  in  my  house,  that  I  am  considered  morbid  upon 
the  subject  of  religion,  and  having  the  nuns  come  here 
is  one  of  my  freaks.  Where  do  you  get  all  of  your  in- 
formation? You  say  novices  are  not  allowed  to  go  out 
in  their  religious  dress,  and  you  do  not  believe  they  are 
from  the  convent.  Mr.  Ross,  the  custom  of  giving 
novices  the  religious  dress  began,  I  think,  about  the 
Twelfth  Century.  I  do  not  blame  you  for  what  you  do 
not  know,  for  you  were  educated  way  down  in  Maine, 
but  I  do  blame  you  for  spending  half  of  the  night  away 
from  home  in  some  place  that  cannot  be  far  off,  for  the 
foul  odor  of  the  vile  incense  is  still  upon  you  when 
you  return.  You  have  asked  me  why  I  did  not  take 
lessons  in  singing  of  one  of  our  fine  professors  instead 
of  the  nuns.  I  will  now  tell  you  it  is  because  you 


iQ8  Uno  Whe. 

said  if  I  did  not  place  a  mortgage  upon  my  house  for 
you,  that  you  would  get  rid  of  me,  if  not  by  fair  means, 
you  would  through  foul,  and,  Mr.  Eoss,  I  feel  that  I 
am  safer  with  a  sister  of  charity." 

"Mrs.  Eoss,  have  you  finished  with  your  tirade  of 
abuse?" 

"  No,  Mr.  Eoss,  not  if  you  call  this  telling  the  truth 
abuse.  You  say  your  business  does  not  pay  expenses. 
If  so,  I  wish  you  would  close  your  office,  and  I  will  sup- 
port you." 

He  looked  at  the  sisters,  who  had  sat  with  downcast 
eyes,  as  he  said :  "Did  you  ever  hear  any  one  in  her  right 
mind  talk  as  she  has  done?  Her  family  are  no  doubt 
paying  well  to  have  you  look  after  her." 

Garita  smiled  as  she  said :  "  My  case  is  becoming  in- 
teresting, as  even  the  sisters  coming  here  is  being  mis- 
construed. We  have  been  in  this  house  a  year  and  a 
half,  and,  Mr.  Eoss,  you  have  developed  very  rapidly. 
I  have  never  been  able  to  find  out  what  talents  you 
possess,  but  it  is  very  evident  that  some  woman  has 
made  the  discovery,  and  is  bringing  you  out.  Mr.  Eoss, 
I  think  you  will  regret  the  price  you  are  paying  for  it." 

He  left  the  room,  ordered  his  wife's  carriage,  and  in 
evening-dress  left  the  house  and  did  not  return  till 
near  morning. 

Garita  had  improved  this  opportunity  of  telling  the 
sisters  about  the  mortgage  in  his  presence,  and  other 
things  she  had  been  hesitating  and  trying  to  make  up 
her  mind  to  talk  about. 


Uno  Who.  199 

Next  day  she  told  the  sisters  that  she  did  not  like  a 
Mrs.  Mauve,  to  whom  Mr.  Eoss  had  introduced  her. 
She  was  a  very  lovely  and  cultivated  woman,  but  Nan- 
nette  had  found,  through  Mrs.  Red's  maid,  that  she 
visited  there.  But  Garita  had  thought  it  best  to  treat 
her  well,  and  not  let  Mr.  Ross  know  she  did  not  care 
for  her. 

The  servants  in  Garita's  house^were  sent  to  her  by 
the  sisters,  and  in  the  fall  they  would  secure  servants 
for  Mrs.  Red. 

Uno  went  to  her  home  in  Cuba  without  seeing  any 
of  her  friends  in  Florida.  She  feared  Meno  would  re- 
port her  return  to  Mr.  Ross.  Before  going  to  the  plan- 
tation she  went  to  the  convent  and  had  a  consultation 
with  the  Mother  Superior.  They  were  sure  that  Garita, 
in  asserting  her  rights,  which  her  conversation  with 
their  sisters  proved  she  was  doing,  would  make  Mr. 
Ross  anxious  to  mature  his  plans.  They  felt  sure  his 
next  move  would  be  to  introduce  a  doctor  friend  from 
whom  he  could  get  a  certificate  of  insanity.  The 
friends  of  his  who  went  to  the  house,  and  with  whom 
Garita  was  on  friendly  terms  for  the  reason  there  was 
no  excuse  for  her  not  being,  might  unconsciously  be 
doing  him  a  service.  If  he  should  manage  to  get  her 
in  a  retreat,  it  might  kill  her,  or  it  would  take  so  long 
before  her  family  could  understand  the  case  and  get 
her  released,  she  might  be  driven  insane.  She  certainly 
would  be  crushed  by  the  mortification  should  she  sur- 
vive it.  If  she  were  to  leave  her  home,  and  seek  refuge 


200  Uno  Who. 

with  her  friends,  her  enemies  would  have  a  case  and  say 
she  had  been  taken  away.  Mr.  Eoss  could  thus  prevent 
her  making  a  will,  and  before  anything  could  be  done 
her  affairs  would  be  in  his  power. 

"  Uno/'  said  the  Mother  Superior,  "  you  will  have  to 
go  to  the  battlefield,  and  work  for  God  and  the  truth. 
You  have  the  divine  faculty  of  being  able  to  inspire 
enthusiasm,  and  I  know  you  will  be  able  to  gain  her 
release  from  this  unequal  strife.  I  have  already  pre- 
pared the  way  for  you,  and  you  will  be  provided  with  all 
the  help  you  require." 

TJno  went  to  the  plantation  and  remained  during 
the  summer.  Her  aunt  and  family  were  in  Saratoga. 
Garita  was  there  with  her  brothers.  While  Uno  with 
her  father  awaited  the  coming  of  the  hurricane,  often 
with  a  thrill  in  every  vein,  when  they  received  letters 
from  Burnedita  or  Marie  of  Mr.  Ross's  indiscreet  con- 
duct. 

Late  in  the  fall,  "  Senor  Who,  daughter  and  maid," 
was  on  the  register  of  a  fashionable  hotel  of  the  city 
in  which  Garita  lived.  Uno  learned  from  her  sisters 
that  Mr.  Ross  was  going  from  bad  to  worse.  He  had 
taken  several  trips  during  the  summer,  and  they  found 
Mrs.  Signal  Red  was  away  at  the  same  time.  Garita 
had  told  them  he  did  not  pay  any  of  the  expenses  of  the 
house,  and  made  demands  upon  her  for  money  which 
she  gave  for  the  sake  of  peace.  He  was  still  worrying 
her  for  a  mortgage  on  her  home,  and  when  she  appeared 
to  acquiesce  he  was  very  lover-like,  and  seemed  to  think 


Uno  Who.  201 

her  in  her  right  mind,  to  which  opinion  she  kept  him 
as  long  as  possible. 

Her  worried  and  troubled  life  was  telling  upon  her 
fine  constitution.  Her  brothers  had  observed  the 
change  in  her  demeanor  and  looks,  but  it  seemed  that 
she  would  rather  die  of  tormenting  grief  than  tell  the 
cause. 

In  the  fall  her  brother,  Pamphilo,  went  home  with 
her.  The  politeness  and  devotion  of  Mr.  Ross  not  all 
Heaven  could  move,  and  the  powers  approved  it.  So 
Garita  went  tugging  away  at  her  heavy  burden,  Mr. 
Ross  knowing  the  day  would  soon  come  when  the  nerves 
would  relax  and  he  would  behold  her  in  tears  and  not 
relent.  He  sold  her  horses  and  carriages  without  con- 
sulting her,  and  when  she  rebelled  he  informed  her  he 
did  not  wish  any  scene.  She  was  not  in  a  condition  to 
go  out,  and  they  were  a  needless  expense. 

She  asked  him  why  he  did  not  go  out  with  her,  but 
he  said  he  did  not  wish  to  parade  a  sick  woman  before 
the  public.  "  Your  brother  noticed  the  change  in  your 
appearance.  Garita,  you  must  have  the  advice  of  a 
physician  to  get  you  out  of  this  moping  melancholy. 
I  have  talked  with  a  specialist,  and  he  will  see  you  very 
soon." 

"  Mr.  Ross,  I  will  not  see  your  doctor.  I  am  not 
sick.  All  I  ask  is  for  you  to  stop  tormenting  me,  and 
I  know  you  and  your  friends  are  trying  in  every  way 
to  injure  me." 


2O2  Uno  Who. 

"  Garita,  such  talk  as  that  proves  that  you  are  not 
in  your  right  mind." 

She  fainted  from  over-excitement  caused  by  his  tell- 
ing of  a  specialist  coming.  She  told  her  maid  she  was 
sure  it  was  the  beginning  of  a  plot  to  destroy  her. 

That  day  Mrs.  Eosepink  called.  She  was  surprised 
to  hear  that  Mrs.  Eoss  was  not  well,  as  she  had  seen  her 
on  the  street  only  the  day  before.  In  the  afternoon 
her  pretended  friend,  Mrs.  Mauve,  came  from  out  of 
town.  She  remained  all  night.  In  the  evening  she 
said  she  would  let  poor  Mrs.  Eoss  rest,  and  went  out. 
Mrs.  Eed's  maid  reported  that  she  was  there,  also  Mr. 
Eoss,  with  several  others.  They  inquired  after  his 
wife.  He  said  he  had  consulted  a  physician  in  regard 
to  her.  He  dreaded  to  go  home,  she  worried  him  so. 
She  was  constantly  running  in  debt,  and  had  now  sold 
her  horses  and  carriages  to  give  to  charity.  He  thought 
the  nuns  who  went  there  had  a  depressing  effect  and 
that  they  made  her  morbid.  Mrs.  Eed  said :  "  Do  not 
do  anything  rash,  Mr.  Eoss.  You  certainly  do  not  care 
how  much  she  gives  away  of  her  abundance.  It  seems 
to  come  from  the  heart  instead  of  a  disordered  brain. 
Cannot  you  induce  her  to  go  abroad?  I  think  this  old 
colored  woman  an  injury  to  your  wife.  She  makes  such 
a  baby  of  her.  She  certainly  is  a  beautiful  woman, 
but  fading  like  a  flower  in  both  body  and  mind.  I 
hope  you  will  not  do  anything  her  friends  will  blame 
you  for." 

Marie  had  laid  aside  her  charity  dress,  and  as  a 


Uno  WhcK  203 

friend  of  Mrs.  Bed's  maid,  heard  this  conversation. 
Not  long  after  Uno's  arrival  in  the  city  her  sisters  re- 
ported to  her  an  affecting  scene  that  had  taken  place 
the  night  before. 

Garita,  in  a  white  robe,  sat  watching  for  her  hus- 
band. It  was  after  midnight.  Her  maid  was  in  the 
room,  and  knew  she  was  crying,  when  she  dropped  on 
her  knees.  Putting  up  her  hands,  she  said:  "Jesus, 
Lord,  my  heart  will  break.  Help  me  for  Thy  dear 
name's  sake." 

It  was  enough  to  melt  a  heart  of  stone.  Mr.  Eoss 
had  quietly  come  in,  and  seeing  her,  he  said  he  had 
heard  enough  of  this  nonsense.  He  was  tired  of  coming 
home  and  finding  a  lunatic  in  his  room.  "  Hereafter 
I  will  take  a  room  up-stairs,"  and  he  did. 

The  next  day  the  specialist  called.  She  would  not 
have  seen  him,  only  Mr.  Eoss  came  with  him,  and  un- 
announced brought  him  to  her  room,  and  in  a  few  min- 
utes took  his  departure. 

Burnedita  was  sitting  in  Nannette's  room,  which  ad- 
joined that  of  her  mistress.  The  door  was  open.  Xan- 
nette  was  with  Mrs.  Eoss,  who  was  very  calm  as  she 
said:  "I  was  never  sick  in  my  life,  and  am  not  now 
going  to  consult  with  a  specialist." 

"Mrs.  Eoss,  you  need  not  feel  offended.  Perhaps 
your  husband  and  friends  have  been  over  anxious  in 
regard  to  you.  I  have  often  seen  you,  and  have  of  late 
remarked  the  change  in  your  appearance.  I  will  not 


204  Uno  Who. 

talk  too  long  with  you  to-day,  as  I  see  you  are  nervous 
and  tired." 

During  the  week  he  called  again,  taking  his  time  to 
make  a  sort  of  visit.  Mr.  Ross  had  taken  him  to  her 
boudoir,  where  with  Marie  she  was  studying  a  new 
piece  to  recite.  The  latter  had  become  quite  proficient 
as  an  elocutionist  during  the  years  she  and  Ola  were  to- 
gether. Marie  did  not  leave  the  room,  and  Nannette 
was  not  far  off. 

The  doctor  told  Mrs.  Eoss  she  appeared  like  one  who 
had  some  sorrow  that  was  preying  upon  her  mind,  and 
she  should  have  constant  change.  There  was  nothing 
like  it  for  a  troubled  mind;  when  a  woman's  nerves 
get  to  a  certain  tension  they  must  relax  or  snap.  "  That 
is  what  causes  you  to  faint  so  easily." 

"  Doctor,"  Garita  said,  "  I  will  be  my  own  specialist 
and  prescribe.  Shall  I  tell  you  what  ?  " 

"  Certainly,  Mrs.  Ross." 

He  was  quite  gushing  in  his  desire  to  please,  par- 
ticularly as  she  had  not  replied  to  any  of  his  remarks. 

She  very  quietly  said :  "  I  will  remove  the  cause  of 
the  tension  without  your  assistance.  The  string  which 
is  kept  in  a  state  of  tension  will  vibrate  at  the  slightest 
impulse." 

"  Then  you  admit  there  is  a  cause  ?  " 

"  I  admit  nothing."  She  smiled  as  she  said :  "  Doc- 
tor, don't  you  know  that  when  a  woman  will,  she  will, 
even  if  she  has  to  faint  for  it  ?  I  did  not  think  I  would 
alarm  Mr.  Ross  to  the  extent  of  sending  for  a  specialist, 


Uno  Who.  205 

but  really,  doctor,  you  will  have  to  excuse  us,  for  I 
have  an  engagement." 

She  arose  from  her  seat,  and  he  was  obliged  to  take 
the  hint,  but  said :  "  It  is  really  sad,  Mrs.  Ross,  to  see 
a  young  and  beautiful  woman  like  you  getting  into  such 
a  morbid  state  of  mind." 

"  Doctor,  you  are  not  a  good  mind  reader,  or  you 
would  know  that  I  think  a  specialist  that  is  constantly 
looking  for  something  wrong  in  other  people's  minds 
cannot  help  becoming  morbid  himself,  and  I  shall  be 
obliged  to  treat  you  to  a  dose  of  excuse  me." 

She  sailed  out  of  the  room,  while  he  looked  as  if  he 
preferred  his  own  medicine. 

The  next  time  he  called  Garita  was  in  the  chapel 
playing  the  organ.  Burnedita  was  playing  the  harp. 
Mr.  Eoss  brought  the  doctor  to  the  chapel  door.  Throw- 
ing the  doors  open  he  said :  "  Doctor,  this  is  where  my 
afflicted  wife  spends  most  of  her  time."  Garita  and 
Burnedita  stepped  into  the  music  room,  and  Nannette 
at  once  closed  the  chapel  doors. 

"It  is  a  great  pity,  Mr.  Ross,  that  you  don't  spend 
more  of  your  time  cultivating  manners,"  said  Garita. 

"  There,  Doctor,  you  see  how  careful  one  has  to  treat 
that  royal  blood." 

"Mr.  Ross,  the  royal  blood  must  be  very  apparent 
to  be  seen  by  you." 

With  a  frown  he  left  the  room,  well  knowing  it  was 
not  safe  to  open  fire  when  his  wife's  spirit  was  aroused 
by  his  insinuating  remarks. 


206  Uno  Who. 

The  doctor  turned  away,  and  with  a  smile  looked 
over  the  music  on  the  piano. 

After  Mr.  Ross  had  gone  he  said :  "  I  think  from 
what  I  saw  that  your  chapel  must  be  very  beauti- 
ful, but  I  thought  you  were  a  Protestant." 

"  I  am,  Doctor,  but  my  father  was  a  Catholic.  He 
and  his  family  were  and  are  very  influential  in  the 
Church.  My  mother  and  sisters  attend  the  Church  of 
England.  My  parents  were  not  narrow-minded  people. 
They  loved  wisely  and  well,  and  did  not  let  the  subject 
of  religion  cause  any  discord." 

"  Mrs.  Ross,  I  hear  you  are  very  religious." 

"  Doctor,  I  hope  you  are,  but  I  shall  not  take  the 
trouble  to  inquire." 

He  had  very  little  to  say,  waiting  to  see  if  she  would 
not  talk,  but  she  knew  that  in  repose  there  was  power, 
and  she  simply  looked  at  him  in  an  amused  way  at  his 
increasing  embarrassment.  Finally  he  said:  "Mrs. 
Ross,  a  morbid  state  of  mind  always  has  its  ups  and 
downs  at  the  beginning  of  the  disease.  I  am  glad  to 
see  you  feeling  so  well  to-day,  and  if  you  will  take  a 
tonic,  for  which  I  have  written  a  prescription,  and  a 
few  trips  with  your  husband  and  friends,  you  will  soon 
be  able  to  go  out  in  society  again." 

After  he  had  gone  Burnedita  said  if  she  remained 
there  much  longer  she  would  not  be  fit  to  take  the  veil. 
All  the  old  Adam  in  her  was  aroused. 

"  Oh,  yes  you  will,"  said  Garita,  "  for  you  are  learn- 
ing some  of  the  wickedness  that  lurks  in  high  places, 


Uno  Who.  207 

and  you  will  go  to  your  secluded  home  happy  that  you 
are  not  worried  by  evil-doers." 

Garita  now  saw  the  necessity  for  action  on  her  part, 
and  she  readily  consented  that  Burnedita  should  lay 
aside  the  nun's  garb  and  come  to  her  house  as  her  friend 
from  Florida.  In  fact  she  had  received  instruction 
from  the  Mother  Superior  to  do  so.  Garita  introduced 
her  to  Mr.  Boss  as  her  friend,  Miss  Burnie.  He  asked 
how  long  she  was  going  to  remain.  Garita  said :  "  I 
did  not  limit  the  time  in  this  case.  Now  that  the  nun, 
as  you  call  her,  has  been  ordered  away,  I  will  be  alone 
a  great  deal,  and  sent  for  her  to  come.  You  will  not 
be  troubled  about  the  nuns  any  more." 

Mr.  Ross  was  very  much  annoyed,  and  still  more  so 
when  he  found  that  his  wife,  with  Miss  Burnie,  had  at- 
tended a  reception. 

Uno  was  there,  but  kept  away  from  Garita.  Marie 
had  found  out,  through  Mrs.  Red's  maid,  that  she  would 
be  there.  Uno  could  interview  Mrs.  Red,  and  there 
would  be  no  danger  of  Garita  seeing  her,  as  she  would 
not  look  that  way. 

Uno  went  as  the  guest  of  Mrs.  Anson,  to  whom  she 
had  letters  of  introduction. 

When  Garita  arrived,  Mrs.  Anson  said :  "  There  is 
Mrs.  Ross;  I  did  not  know  she  was  able  to  go  out.  I 
have  not  seen  her  in  a  long  time." 

"  Mrs.  Anson,  who  is  that  woman  that  seems  so  sur- 
prised and  stared  after  Mrs.  Ross  so  boldly  ?  " 

"0,  that  is  Mrs.  Signal  Red  and  her  friend,  Mrs. 


208  Uno  Who. 

Crimson.  They  are  strangers  to  me.  I  hear  she  says 
Mrs.  Ross  is  an  old  friend  of  hers,  but  of  late  she  has 
seen  very  little  of  her  on  account  of  her  failing  health. 
The  physicians  have  advised  Mr.  Ross  to  keep  her  quiet 
as  possible.  By-the-way,  Miss  Uno,  there  is  to  be  a 
musicale  which  I  wish  you  to  attend  this  week.  I  pre- 
sume Mrs.  Ross  will  be  there.  I  wish  she  would  sing. 
I  wonder  who  that  pretty  young  lady  is  she  has  with 
her?" 

Garita  went  home  and  did  not  say  a  word  about  the 
reception  to  Mr.  Ross.  The  next  morning  he  said: 
"  You  seem  in  fine  spirits  after  going  out  and  giving 
people  something  to  talk  about.  I  have  planned  a  trip 
for  next  month,  and  the  Greens  are  going  with  us.  Gar- 
ita,! know  the  doctor  will  be  very  much  displeased  when 
he  hears  of  your  going  in  company.  You  must  be  care- 
ful, Miss  Buinie,  and  not  let  Mrs.  Ross  overdo.  If 
you  see  her  in  one  of  her  sick  spells,  you  will  not  want 
to  witness  another." 

They  attended  the  musicale.  Mrs.  Ross  gratified  her 
friends  by  singing  for  them.  Burnedita  accompanied 
her.  Mr.  Ross  did  not  hear  of  this,  as  none  of  his  set 
were  there,  but  he  did  hear  of  another  reception  she 
attended  which  caused  great  excitement  for  Garita. 
Mr.  Ross  told  her  that  unless  she  mortgaged  her  home 
and  gave  him  the  money,  he  would  leave  her. 

She  asked  him  if  he  was  going  to  let  his  evil  influence 
ruin  him,  soul  and  body.  He  said:  "How  dare  you 
say  there  is  any  one  ruining  me  ?  " 


Uno  Who.  209 

"  Then,  darling,  where  does  your  money  go  ?  I  wish, 
for  your  own  sake,  you  would  not  be  seen  in  Mr.  Signal 
Eed's  company  any  more." 

"  See  here,  Mrs.  Ross,  I  have  heard  enough  of  this 
queer  talk  of  yours,  and  only  that  they  would  take 
away  my  business,  I  would  not  live  with  you  another 
day." 

All  was  silent  for  a  few  minutes,  then  she  said :  "  No, 
my  darling  husband,  you  do  not  mean  what  you  say," 
and  going  up  to  him  she  affectionately  said:  "Tell 
me  you  love  me.  That  you  will  leave  this  evil  influence 
and  be  as  of  old." 

"Mrs.  Ross,  I  have  had  enough  of  this  tragedy. 
These  beautiful  ravings.  You  talk  like  a  mad  woman." 

"I  am  not  mad,  but  heartbroken.  The  demands 
made  upon  you  are  greater  than  the  supply.  You  come 
to  me  for  money,  and  because  I  do  not  give  you  my  in- 
heritance, you  think  you  do  not  love  me.  My  darling, 
you  do,  and  the  day  will  come  when  you  will  repent 
of  your  treatment  of  me.  You  are  now  a  slave,  but  I 
will  break  the  spell  that  binds  you." 

With  a  sneer,  he  said :  "  I  will  see  that  you  are  well 
taken  care  of  before  that  time.  You  are  not  the  same 
woman  you  once  were.  Your  lack  of  confidence  in  me 
is  the  outcome  of  a  disordered  mind.  I  am  tired  of  this 
Ophelia  business." 

"  Mr.  Ross,  if  I  were  weak  enough  to  listen  to  you, 
I  might  have  to  play  the  part  of  Ophelia  to  earn  my 
living  and  yours.  You  wish  to  make  me  out  insane 
14 


2io  Uno  Who. 

that  you  may  get  the  control  of  iny  fortune  and  prevent 
me  making  a  will,  but  if  it  will  be  of  any  comfort  to 
you  I  will  tell  you  that  it  is  already  looked  after.  Why 
did  you  take  me  from  my  happy  home  to  make  a  wreck 
of  my  life?" 

"  For  which  act,  Mrs.  Boss,  I  have  no  doubt  you  and 
your  family  will  try  to  make  me  suffer." 

"  Mr.  Eoss,  in  taking  revenge,  one  is  but  even  with 
her  enemy.  In  passing  it  over,  she  is  superior." 

"  Garita,  you  are  always  praying  and  talking  of 
your  trust  in  God,  why  don't  He  help  you,  if  you  are 
being  so  fearfully  wronged  ?  The  people  I  go  with  seem 
to  have  a  good  time,  much  better  than  you  do.  I  intend 
to  invite  some  of  them  here,  and  I  expect  they  will  be 
treated  well.  The  best  thing  you  can  do  is  to  mortgage 
this  house,  receive  my  friends  as  well  as  yours,  and  you 
will  prove  your  love  in  deeds  as  well  as  words." 

He  went  out  of  the  house,  and  Nannette  went  into 
the  boudoir  where  Garita  was  walking  the  floor,  her 
hands  clasped  as  if  in  agony. 

When  Miss  Burnie  went  in  she  said :  "  Is  there  no 
escape  from  this  terrible  fate  which  threatens  me? 
Must  I  open  the  doors  of  my  pure  home  and  become  the 
associate  of  doubtful  characters?  Is  it  my  husband 
who  asks  this?  No,  a  thousand  times  no.  He  may  de- 
prive me  of  my  inheritance,  but  I  will  remain  true  to 
myself.  I  know  that  God  will  send  help  to  me,  though 
He  scourge  me,  yet  will  I  trust  Him.  The  scales  have 


Uno  Who.  211 

fallen  from  my  eyes.  It  is  all  over.  My  influence  has 
gone.  All  hope  is  buried." 

She  went  to  her  room  and  threw  herself  on  her  bed 
in  an  hysterical  crying  spell,  saying :  "  Uno,  Uno,  how 
I  wish  you  were  here.  Burnedita,  you  will  have  to 
write  for  her  to  come." 

She  arose  from  the  bed  and  walked  the  floor,  the 
personification  of  purity  in  her  long  white  robe  de 
chambre.  Suddenly  she  stopped  as  if  listening.  Then 
turning  her  head  to  one  side  she  clasped  her  hands. 
All  was  silent.  Then  turning  to  her  friend  and  her 
maid  she  said :  "  Did  you  not  see  it  ?  " 

They  said  :«ffo." 

"  That  was  strange,  for  there  was  an  angel  looking 
over  my  shoulder.  I  felt  its  wings,  and  it  said: 
'  Though  you  have  lain  among  the  pots,  yet  shall  you 
be  as  the  wings  of  a  dove  that  is  covered  with  silver 
wings  and  her  feathers  like  gold.' " 

While  she  was  talking  the  clock  struck  twelve,  and 
she  said:  " I  know  that  help  is  coming;  that  I  will  not 
be  destroyed." 

Nannette  said :  "  Now,  honey,  let  me  put  you  in  bed. 
I  am  glad  this  talk  is  over,  and  that  you  know  the  worst. 
Senorita  is  coming,  and  we  will  all  fight  the  devil.  I 
feel  just  like  it  to-night,  but  your  seeing  that  angel 
has  quieted  me  a  little.  I  really  thought  I  should  forget 
who  and  what  I  am  and  give  Mr.  Ross  a  piece  of  my 
mind  when  he  said  that  I  and  the  rest  were  not  your 
friends.  Never  mind,  he  will  get  the  hot  end  of  the 


212  Uno  Who. 

poker,  and  we  will  fix  him  so  he  can't  let  go  of  it  either. 
Honey,  I  must  talk,  and  do  promise  me  you  won't  pray 
for  him  to-night.  I  think  it  would  be  an  insult  to  the 
angel  who  has  just  been  here." 


Uno  Who.  213 


CHAPTEE  XV. 

"  Bright  with  the  radiance  of  intellect, 
Not  darkened  by  madness  or  passion." 

GARITA,  looking  very  beautiful,  attended  another  re- 
ception with  Miss  Burnie.  Mrs.  Signal  Bed,  with  the 
other  danger  signals,  were  there:  Mrs.  Scarlet,  Mrs. 
Crimson,  Mrs.  Carnation  and  Mrs.  Rosepink.  Mrs. 
Anson  had  given  Uno  a  sketch  of  the  gossip  in  regard 
to  Mr.  Ross  and  Mrs.  Red. 

Uno  improved  the  first  opportunity  to  get  near  Mrs. 
Red,  and  entered  into  conversation  with  her  by  saying: 
"  I  have  strayed  away  from  my  friend,  Mrs.  Anson, 
do  you  see  anything  of  her  ? " 

"  Yes,  she  is  near  the  conservatory." 

"  Oh,  I  see  her,"  said  Uno.  "  I  am  a  stranger  here, 
but  through  mutual  friends,  Mrs.  Anson  is  making  my 
sojourn  very  pleasant.  Who  is  the  lady  Mrs.  Anson  is 
talking  with?  She  has  a  sad  sweet  face." 

With  heightened  color  she  said :  "  That  is  Mrs.  Ross. 
I'm  surprised  to  see  her  here,  but  she  has  a  friend 
with  her,  as  they  do  not  let  her  go  out  alone." 

"  Why  not  ?  "  asked  Uno,  in  surprise. 

"  Oh,  her  mind  has  been  very  much  affected  of  late, 
and  she  has  not  been  allowed  to  go  out  at  all.  They  are 


214  Uno  Who. 

seeing  what  effect  a  little  pleasant  excitement  will  have 
upon  her.  The  doctor  says  he  expects  he  will  have  to 
spend  half  the  night  there,  as  he  did  some  time  ago 
after  she  had  attended  a  reception  and  made  a  few 
calls.  We  used  to  be  very  intimate,,  but  she  has  dropped 
one  and  then  another  of  her  friends.  I  do  not  care 
to  let  her  see  me  and  have  her  get  to  talking." 

This  woman  thought  Uno  would  repeat  this  conver- 
sation to  Mrs.  Anson,  who  was  being  so  pleasant  to 
Garita,  and  she  indifferently  said :  "  I  believe  they  are 
talking  of  taking  her  abroad  very  soon." 

This  bit  of  news  to  her  friends  would  account  for 
the  prolonged  absence  she  was  plotting  for  Garita. 

Uno  bowed  herself  away  saying:  "I  see  my  friend  is 
looking  for  me." 

Mrs.  Anson  had  talked  with  Garita  in  regard  to  a 
concert  for  some  charity  which  she  wished  to  interest 
her  in.  In  a  few  days  Mrs.  Anson  called  with  a  pro- 
fessor who  wished  to  hear  Mrs.  Eoss  sing.  He  said  her 
voice  was  so  sweet  that  it  reminded  him  of  the  plaintive 
tone  of  the  robin  at  early  morn,  and  when  Miss  Burnie 
played  the  harp  he  said  they  would  certainly  have  to 
take  part  in  the  concert. 

Garita  requested  that  there  be  nothing  said  in  re- 
gard to  it  until  she  had  time  to  consider. 

Burnedita  went  to  the  convent  and  there  met  Uno, 
whom  she  told  that  it  was  not  possible  for  her  or  Garita 
to  take  part  in  the  concert.  She  knew  they  would  be  a 
failure. 


Uno  Who.  215 

Uno  said :  "  There  is  no  can't  or  failure  in  this  work. 
Burnedita,  it  must  be  done.  You  must  encourage  Gar- 
ita,  and  when  Mrs.  Anson  calls  for  her  answer,  tell  her 
to  not  have  your  names  mentioned  as  you  wish  to  sur- 
prise Mr.  Ross." 

Uno  said  she  would  be  at  the  rehearsal,  and  if  there 
was  a  chance  for  failure  she  would  discover  it.  They 
had  only  a  week  to  work  in,  and  she  also  wished  them 
to  sing  in  St.  Aloysius'  church  on  Sunday,  and  she 
would  see  that  it  was  in  the  paper.  This  would  be  a 
beginning,  and  give  them  practice. 

Mrs.  Red's  maid  had  reported  that  the  doctor,  Mr. 
Ross  and  Mrs.  Red  held  a  long  consultation  the  even- 
ing before.  Mr.  Ross  had  not  alluded  to  the  last  re- 
ception, thinking  undoubtedly  that  Mrs.  Red  had  said 
enough  to  Mrs.  Anson's  friend. 

After  they  had  gone,  Mrs.  Red  said  to  her  maid: 
"They  have  awful  times  with  that  woman.  Mr.  Ross 
is  about  worn  out.  It  is  a  relief  for  him  to  come  here, 
and  he  consults  with  the  doctor  and  is  not  seen  going 
to  his  office,  which  would  make  talk,  as  it  is  known  he 
is  her  physician.  It  is  a  pity  she  cannot  enjoy  her 
beautiful  home.  I  hear  her  family  are  going  to  have 
her  taken  to  England,  and  the  place  will  be  sold." 

Garita  now  saw  the  necessity  of  doing  something  to 
save  herself,  and  entered  into  the  spirit  of  her  work 
with  her  old  time  vigor.  She  also  knew  it  would  not 
be  long  before  Uno  would  come,  and  she  would  then 
make  some  change  in  her  unhappy  life. 


216  Uno  Who. 

She  was  mortified  when  she  was  obliged  to  admit 
that  she  had  not  money  to  pay  for  a  carriage.  She  had 
anticipated  her  income  in  order  to  keep  peace,  and  had 
received  a  loan  from  her  mother. 

When  Uno  heard  this  she  gave  her  purse  to  Burne- 
dita,  saying:  "Let  me  know  all  her  wants.  Has  it 
come  to  this  with  a  daughter  of  Don  Pamphilo  ?  " 

They  went  to  Mrs.  Anson's,  and  from  there  to  re- 
hearsal. Mr.  Eoss  had  been  home  in  the  evening,  and 
finding  them  out  he  began  to  make  inquiries  where 
they  were.  Mrs.  Eed  had  been  to  Mrs.  Anson's  to  see 
about  securing  seats  for  her  party,  and  show  off  her 
generosity,  which  helped  Uno  to  secure  seats  for  her- 
self and  father  just  back  of  them.  She  told  Mrs.  Auson 
she  thought  it  would  be  interesting  to  see  how  Mr.  Eoss 
took  the  surprise  in  store  for  him. 

After  they  were  in  their  seats,  Uno  and  her  father, 
well  disguised,  took  theirs.  Mr.  Eoss  had  a  troubled 
and  careworn  look.  When  Signal  Red  would  lean  over 
his  wife  to  speak  to  him  he  acted  like  one  who  wished 
to  be  let  alone  with  his  thoughts.  He  seemed  to  be 
oblivious  to  all  about  him  until  Garita  made  her  ap- 
pearance. Then  he  was  startled.  He  acted  like  one 
awakened  fiom  a  dream.  He  could  not  but  feel  he 
was  the  observed  of  all  observers,  and  he  looked  as  if 
he  would  like  to  end  his  days  on  some  desolate  coast, 
for  dead  to  the  world  and  yet  shut  out  of  Heaven,  he 
was  a  target  for  unpitying  fate. 

Burnedita  made  her  harp  fairly  talk,  so  anxious  was 


Uno  Who.  217 

she  to  inspire  Garita  with  confidence,  but  she  had  an- 
other inspiration.  She  had  trusted  in  man  and  found 
him  shifting  sand,  and  this  was  a  last  effort  to  save 
herself  and  him  from  destruction,  as  she  sang : 


How  I  have  called  thee, 

Lifted  hands  beseeching ; 

Hands  of  imploring  and  despairing  woe  ; 

Thou  answerest  not  my  piteous  outreaching, 

Dear  heart,  that  I  loved  so." 


Her  voice  and  plainly  spoken  words  seemed  to  pene- 
trate every  part  of  the  large  hall.  Mr.  Eoss  could  not 
hold  up  his  head.  He  wished  to  shut  out  the  jubilant 
voice  that  was  repeatedly  encored.  It  was  never  more 
for  him. 

Mr.  Ross  did  not  get  home  until  near  morning.  At 
the  late  breakfast  he  informed  his  wife  that  Mrs.  Green 
would  be  there  during  the  day  to  talk  over  the  little 
outing  they  had  been  anticipating.  "  The  doctor  was 
at  the  concert  last  evening,  and  was  many  times  con- 
gratulated upon  your  recovery.  He  says  that  you  have 
had  excitement  enough  for  the  present." 

In  the  afternoon  Mr.  Ross  came  home  with  the  doctor. 
As  usual,  he  brought  him  to  Garita's  boudoir  un- 
announced. He  tried  to  get  her  to  promise  that  she 
would  go  in  less  than  a  week  with  Mr.  Ross  and  Mr. 
and  Mrs.  Green  to  a  fashionable  resort.  She  said  she 
would  think  the  matter  over,  and  let  them  know  in  a 
day  or  two.  She  conversed  with  Miss  Burnie,  almost 


218  Uno  Who. 

ignoring  him,  treating  him  as  though  he  was  her  hus- 
band's friend. 

The  next  day  Mrs.  Green  called,  hut  she  did  not 
urge  their  going,  and  seemed  to  think  it  was  all  to 
please  Mrs.  Boss,  who  said  very  little  in  regard  to  it. 

While  there  Mrs.  Anson  called,  and  Mrs.  Green 
seemed  puzzled.  She  listened  to  their  animated  con- 
versation about  the  concert,  and  Mrs.  Anson's  plans 
for  the  future,  in  all  of  which  Mrs.  Eoss  took  a  deep 
interest.  She  was  very  pleased  to  have  her  friend, 
Miss  Burnie,  enjoying  her  visit,  and  they  would  accept 
Mrs.  Anson's  invitation. 

Mrs.  Green  had  evidently  told  of  her  call,  and  the 
meeting  of  Mrs.  Anson.  Garita  knew  the  woman  went 
to  Mrs.  Eed's  but  thought  her  innocent  of  their  plot. 

One  afternoon  Mr.  Eoss  came  home  and  said  that 
he  and  Mr.  Green  had  arranged  to  go  early  next  morn- 
ing. They  had  purchased  the  tickets  and  telegraphed 
for  rooms.  It  was  all  nonsense  to  take  Nannette,  but 
he  supposed  she  would  have  to  go  along.  Miss  Burnie 
could  enjoy  herself  with  Mrs.  Anson  for  a  few  days, 
and  he  told  Nannette  to  have  her  trunks  ready  that 
night. 

Garita  did  not  say  a  word.  He  went  out  and  in  a 
short  time  returned.  When  he  saw  there  was  nothing 
being  done,  he  wished  to  know  the  reason,  and  very 
pleasantly  said :  "  Come,  Garita,  you  do  not  know  how 
happy  I  am  at  having  my  wife  herself  once  more.  I 
hardly  know  how  to  leave  just  now,  but  the  doctor  so 


Uno  Who.  219 

fears  a  relapse,  and  Heaven  knows  I  have  had  enough 
of  this  kind  of  life.  Miss  Burnie,  I  hope  you  will  cheer 
Mrs.  Eoss  by  telling  her  you  will  manage  to  enjoy  your- 
self for  a  few  days.  Now,  Nannette,  you  see  that  every- 
thing is  ready  for  the  early  morning  train,"  and  he 
again  went  out. 

Garita  said:  "Burnie,  what  shall  I  do?  Oh,  Uno, 
Uno,  if  you  were  only  here.  Why  did  I  not  send  for 
you  sooner?  I  know  she  will  come  on  the  wings  of 
the  wind,  but  'tis  too  late.  Despair  seems  to  have 
clasped  me  in  its  black  arms/' 

Burnedita  said:  "You  must  be  brave,  and  I  will 
help  you." 

"Nannette,  tell  Katie  to  keep  near  this  room." 

Then  she  quietly  said:  "I  do  not  wish  to  be  sur- 
prised." 

To  which  remark  Nannette  said:  "  What  if  those 
girls  were  traitors  ?  " 

"  Be  calm,  my  poor  Nannette,  I  know  from  whence 
they  come,  and  I  have  other  help  near  at  hand." 

She  then  went  to  the  basement  of  the  house  and  told 
Bridget  not  to  leave  the  door,  and  tested  her  memory 
as  to  the  countersign. 

After  Mr.  Eoss  went  out  two  men  who  had  been 
watching  him  come  and  go,  quickly  went  to  the  base- 
ment door.  It  was  now  no  longer  daylight,  and  there 
was  little  danger  of  being  seen.  The  door  was  in- 
stantly opened,  and  they  entered,  remaining  in  the 
basement. 


220  Uno  Who. 

In  a  few  minutes  two  women  walked  leisurely  along, 
laughing  and  chatting.  They  stopped  and  looked  up 
at  the  house  as  if  to  see  the  number.  One  of  them  had 
a  bundle,  and  the  other  went  to  the  front  door  and  rang 
the  bell  three  times.  It  was  answered  by  Bridget. 

After  talking  a  few  minutes  the  woman  went  down 
the  steps  and  had  a  consultation  with  the  one  with  the 
bundle.  They  walked  along  as  if  looking  for  the  right 
number,  then  turned  and  went  into  the  basement. 
They  were  instantly  admitted. 

Garita,  in  a  beautiful  white  robe,  was  lying  on  a 
couch  in  her  boudoir.  Her  fears  had  been  quieted 
by  telling  her  they  had  sent  to  the  convent  for  help, 
and  if  necessary  there  would  be  a  carriage  ready  to 
take  her  there.  They  had  just  heard  through  Mrs. 
Eed's  maid  that  the  doctor  and  Mr.  Boss  were  in  her 
house,  and  they  appeared  to  be  holding  a  consultation. 

Garita  had  decided  to  be  determined  and  say  she 
would  not  go,  and  so  settle  the  matter  at  once,  after 
being  promised  that  they  would  protect  her. 

The  two  women  who  had  entered  the  house  were  in 
Nannette's  room,  adjoining  Mrs.  Ross.  They  had  put 
on  their  nuns'  cloaks  and  bonnets,  and  were  waiting 
for  an  exhibition  of  Mr.  Ross's  temper.  They  had 
not  long  to  think  of  what  they  would  say  or  do  when 
he  came  in  with  the  doctor,  who  said :  "  I  was  coming, 
Mrs.  Ross,  to  see  how  you  are  feeling  after  the  con- 
cert, and  I  met  Mr.  Ross.  You  sing  divinely,  and  are 
the  talk  of  the  town.  I  was  proud  to  say  that  you  were 


Uno  Who.  221 

my  patient.  Mrs.  Boss,  you  are  in  a  fair  way  to  regain 
your  former  good  health.  I  was  afraid  I  would  find 
you  in  bed  after  the  excitement  you  have  had,  as  a  re- 
action will  very  likely  take  place.  I  see  you  have  not 
recovered  from  the  nervous  strain,  and  I  will  give  you 
a  tonic  to  take  on  your  trip,  your  good  husband  tells 
me  you  are  about  to  take." 

"  Mr.  Ross,  I  may  as  well  tell  you  now  that  I  am  not 
going." 

"Garita,  I  have  made  all  arrangements,  even  to 
buying  the  tickets." 

"  Mr.  Ross,  I  have  never  had  to  consider  the  waste  of 
a  traveling  ticket,  and  will  not  begin  now.  Take  the 
party  you  had  with  you  at  the  concert.  Do  you  think 
I  will  be  seen  with  you  after  that  public  exhibition? 
Never;  this  is  the  straw  that  breaks  the  camel's  back. 
Do  your  worst,  I  defy  you  and  your  doctor.  I  wish 
you  would  retire  to  the  library  with  him.  There  is 
no  occasion  for  him  to  visit  me." 

"  Mrs.  Ross,  you  are  well,  all  but  your  mind,  which 
has  become  morbid  from  brooding.  We  do  not  wish 
you  to  get  back  into  your  old  tracks  and  have  to  be 
taken  to  a  retreat." 

"  I  will  let  my  own  family  be  my  judge.  You  are 
not  my  doctor,  and  I  do  not  wish  to  hear  any  more 
upon  this  subject." 

"  My  dear  Mrs.  Ross,  I  have  only  come  to  help  you, 
and  the  advice  of  a  pleasant  little  outing  with  a  devoted 
husband  cannot  be  very  disagreeable." 


222  Uno  Who. 

"  I  have  given  my  answer." 

"Garita,  I  am  tired  of  having  Mrs.  Signal  Eed 
brought  up  to  me,  and  the  house  expenses,  and  'why 
don't  I  go  out  with  you/  and  finding  you  in  your  den 
praying,  and  nuns  around  to  keep  the  house  gloomy, 
and  so  suspicious  of  me  that  you  won't  have  a  professor 
give  you  lessons  for  fear  I  have  some  design.  And, 
Doctor,  she  had  to  get  up  a  scene  for  me  one  night  be- 
cause I  was  out  to  a  card  party.  When  I  came  home 
she  was  up,  and  when  I  went  in  to  our  room  she  fell  on 
her  knees  and  began  to  pray.  She  makes  me  tired." 
;  "Mr.  Eoss,  as  that  did  not  seem  to  please  you,  I 
had  a  friend  come,  and  I  have  been  having  a  very  gay 
time,  and  am  going  to  have  it  kept  up.  I  am  all  over 
praying  for  you  or  wasting  any  more  tears.  I  shall 
not  give  you  a  mortgage  nor  ask  my  mother  for  money, 
nor  again  place  myself  in  a  position  where  I  have  not 
money  to  pay  for  a  carriage,  but  have  to  borrow  of  my 
friends.  Mr.  Eoss,  I  am  done  with  you,  and  shall  send 
for  my  friends,  and  you  can  live  with  those  Danger 
Signals  if  you  choose." 

"  Doctor,  there  is  only  one  way.  You  will  have  to 
use  the  papers  you  have  in  your  possession  declaring 
her  insane.  I  cannot  live  this  kind  of  life  any  longer. 
You  think  these  women  are  your  friends,  but  they  have 
been  keeping  me  posted  in  regard  to  your  doings  all 
the  time,  or  I  would  not  dare  go  to  business." 

"  Mr.  Eoss,  I'm  tired  of  this  talk.    I  see  your  object 


Uno  Who.  223 

is  to  worry  me  into  a  state  of  excitement  in  which  you 
can  take  advantage  of  me." 

"  There  it  is,  Doctor,  a  lunatic's  suspicion." 

"I  see  it,  Mr.  Ross,  and  there  is  no  other  way  but 
to  use  our  papers." 

Garita  arose  from  the  chair  she  had  taken  when  they 
came  in,  and  as  the  doctor  handed  the  papers  to  Mr. 
Ross  which  declared  her  insane,  she  started  to  leave 
the  room,  but  Mr.  Ross  stopped  her,  saying :  "  You  are 
not  to  be  lost  sight  of,  day  or  night." 

Garita  said:  "Has  it  come  to  this?  Have  you 
gotten  so  degraded  that  you  will  be  a  party  to  a  con- 
spiracy? I  see  it  all;  you  and  your  friends  want  my 
money,  and  in  order  to  get  it,  you  will  place  me  in  an 
asylum  where  you  were  intending  to  leave  me  on  this 
trip  that  you  and  your  friends  have  been  plotting  for 
me  to  take.  I  could  almost  wish  to  be  insane  if  I  could 
come  back  to  reason  and  find  that  my  husband  had 
never  been  the  demon  he  is." 

"  Mrs.  Ross,"  said  the  doctor,  "  we  have  to  be  cruel 
only  to  be  kind." 

She  stood  for  an  instant  and  looked  at  him,  as  if 
her  fast  failing  strength  could  bear  no  more.  Then 
she  said :  "  It  is  thus  that  bad  begins,  and  for  you,  Mr. 
Ross,  the  worst  remains  behind."  Then  she  clasped  her 
hands  as  if  in  agony,  saying :  "  Oh,  Uno,  Uno,  how  long 
must  I  plead  and  cry  in  vain?  Lift  back  these  iron 
bars,"  and  putting  her  hands  up  to  her  head  she 
fainted. 


224  Uno  Who. 

This  was  the  opportunity  that  the  doctor  and  Mr. 
Ross  were  evidently  waiting  for.  Mr.  Ross  caught  her 
as  she  was  falling,  and  laid  her  on  the  floor. 

"  Bring  me  some  water,"  said  the  doctor,  and  he  took 
a  small  phial  out  of  his  pocket. 

Mr.  Ross  was  bending  over  her,  chafing  her  hands. 
As  the  doctor  stooped  down  to  give  her  the  medicine, 
a  nun  appeared  at  the  door.  "Hold  there,"  she  ex- 
claimed, "  give  her  a  drop  at  the  peril  of  your  life." 

The  doctor  started  up,  spilling  his  medicine,  and  Mr. 
Ross  said:  "Who  are  you  who  dares  to  dictate  in  my 
family?" 

The  nun's  cloak  and  honnet  were  thrown  off  as  she 
said:  "Uno  Who." 

In  an  instant  Osceola  and  an  officer  entered  the 
room,  who  said:  "Mr.  Ross,  you  are  my  prisoner. 
You,  the  doctor  and  Mrs.  Signal  Red  are  under  arrest 
for  conspiracy." 

The  doctor,  at  sight  of  the  officer,  had  gone  down- 
stairs and  out  of  the  house,  leaving  his  medicine  case 
behind. 

•  The  officer  stood  with  his  hands  on  Mr.  Ross's 
shoulder  while  Uno  told  him  there  were  not  words 
in  the  English  language  to  express  her  contempt  for 
him. 

"It  was  not  bad  enough  to  spend  your  time  and 
money,  taking  the  name  of  your  pure  wife  upon  your 
lips  in  the  society  you  have  been  keeping,  but  you  must 
demand  her  fortune,  plotting  with  a  miserable  fiend 


Uno  Who.  225 

who  calls  himself  a  physician  to  declare  her  insane, 
and  doom  her  to  a  life  worse  than  death.  Surely,  you 
are  a  fit  subject  for  the  gallows.  You  poor  miserable 
weakling.  The  woman  will  fly,  leaving  you  to  your  fate, 
taking  what  she  can  of  her  ill-gotten  gains,  and  what 
are  you?  Despised  of  man.  God  and  the  angels  say, 
'  I  never  knew  you.'  Officer,  take  this  man  to  a  room 
on  the  top  floor,  which  has  been  prepared  for  his  re- 
ception. Lock  the  door  and  remain  in  sight  of  the 
room  until  I  give  you  further  instructions." 

Uno  then  turned  her  attention  to  Garita,  who  had 

been   carried   to   her   room,   and   was   just   recovering 

from  her  fainting  spell.     She  said :  "  Don't  let  them 

take  me.    Where  am  I  ?    I  don't  want  that  doctor  here. 

They  said  I  am  a  prisoner.    Why  did  TJ-no  not  come  ?  " 

"  There,  honey,  don't  get  excited,  Senorita  is  here." 

"What  did  you  say,  Nanny?     I  must  be  dreaming. 

She  is  not  here,  and  I  am  afraid  I  will  never  see  my 

mother  or  sisters  again.    But  you  will  never  leave  me." 

They  were  relieved  when  she  began  to  cry.    She  said : 

"  The  way  is  dark,  my  Father.      Cloud  on  cloud  is 

gathering   thickly   o'er   my   head.      I    am   bewildered. 

Merciful  Father,  take  my  hand,  and  lead  safe  along 

Thy  child.     Did  I  hear  Uno's  voice?"  Nannette  was 

crying  so  she  could  not  answer. 

"  Yes,  Garita,  I  am  here,  and  your  troubles  are  over." 

She  laid  her  head  on  the  pillow  beside  her,  saying: 

"  Did  I  not  tell  you  I  would  be  here  at  the  right  time  ? 

My  father  is  with  me,  and  we  will  see  that  the  doctor 

15 


226  Uno  Who. 

does  not  come  again,  and  that  you  are  not  disgraced  by 
these  bad  people." 

Osceola  was  on  the  war-path,  but  the  culprits  dis- 
appeared so  quickly  that  it  was  hopeless  to  follow  them. 

Mrs.  Bed's  maid  was  in  the  house,  having  been  sent 
there  to  get  information  as  to  how  the  preparations 
for  the  journey  were  progressing.  She  returned  to  Mrs. 
Eed  in  great  excitement,  telling  her  that  Mr.  Eoss  was 
arrested,  that  she  saw  the  officer,  and  that  Miss  Who 
and  her  father  had  come  with  him.  Then  the  other 
maids  came  in  corroborating  the  story,  saying  she 
too  was  to  be  arrested  for  conspiracy.  The  doctor 
had  already  been  there,  and  advised  her  to  leave  the 
city  before  daylight  if  she  could.  He  was  going  right 
away,  and  could  not  help  her. 

"Ha,  ha,  ha,  Sally/'  said  Signal  Red;  "they  can't 
do  anything  with  me.  I  have  not  had  anything  to  do 
with  this  affair,  only  to  bear  the  humiliation  of  being 
your  show  husband.  Your  '  Mx-my-Dolly/  as  you  call 
me.  Ha,  ha,  ha,  Sally,  this  is  fun  for  me." 

"  You  miserable  wretch,  how  dare  you  sit  there  and 
laugh?" 

Mrs.  Scarlet  and  Mrs.  Crimson  had  come  in  to  hear 
how  they  were  getting  along  with  poor  Mrs.  Ross.  It 
was  late,  but  they  were  anxious  to  hear  the  latest  news. 

"  I  will  tell  you  the  very  latest,"  said  Mr.  Red,  and 
after  relating  what  had  occurred,  he  said :  "  I  am  mon- 
arch of  all  I  survey,  except  Sally.  Ha,  ha,  ha,  '  Nix- 
my-Dolly '  feels  fine.  I  will  keep  peaceable  possession 


Uno  Who.  227 

of  this  house,  and  you  can't  help  yourself,  for  you 
won't  dare  to  come  back.  What  a  fool  that  Eoss  has 
been." 

"  I  think  we  had  better  be  going,"  said  Mrs.  Scarlet 
and  Mrs.  Crimson.  They  were  horrified,  they  said3 
"but  there  is  nothing  that  can  be  proven  against  us. 
Mrs.  Bed,  we  have  all  thought  you  were  carrying  this 
Eoss  scheme  too  far." 

"  Yes,"  said  .Signal,  "  she  has  been  digging  a  ditch 
for  that  innocent  woman,  but  has  fallen  into  it  her- 
self. Sally,  the  tables  have  turned,  and  'Nix-my- 
Dolly '  is  a  free  man  while  Mrs.  Eoss  is  a  free  woman. 
I  will  go  home  to  my  respectable  relations,  marry  a 
respectable  woman,  and  we  will  have  all  these  nice 
things.  I  need  some  compensation  for  being  your 
<  Mx-my-Dolly.' " 

Just  then  the  maid  came  to  the  door  ready  to  go 
out.  Mrs.  Eed  said :  "  I  want  you  to  help  me." 

"  Indeed,  ma'am,  we  are  leaving  you  to-night." 

"  What  do  you  mean  ?  "  said  Mrs.  Eed. 

"I  mean  our  work  is  done.  We  have  been  in  the 
employ  of  Miss  Uno  Who  as  detectives  in  your  house, 
and  are  to  appear  in  Court  against  you." 

"We  must  go,"  said  Mrs.  Scarlet.  "I  really  am 
very  much  surprised  to  learn  that  you  are  trying  to 
make  Mrs.  Eoss  out  insane  so  as  to  take  her  to  an 
asylum.  I  see  through  this  terrible  plot  now.  I 
thought  you  were  only  circulating  this  story  so  as  to 
keep  people  from  believing  what  she  said  in  regard  to 


228  Uno  Who. 

you  and  her  husband.  You  certainly  have  had  great 
power  over  him  to  get  something  like  a  fortune  out 
of  him.  I  shall  do  everything  I  can  to  contradict  this 
lie." 

"  So  will  I,"  said  Mrs.  Crimson.  "  I  think  Mr.  Eoss 
has  been  the  insane  one,  and,  Mrs.  Red,  I  have  often 
heard  you  call  Mr.  Ross  your  weakling.  It  is  a  strange 
match,  that  beautiful  woman;  I  have  often  wondered 
how  she  happened  to  marry  him." 

"Yes,"  said  Signal  Red,  "and  so  have  I,  but  it  is 
a  greater  wonder  why  he  lets  Sally  fool  him  so,  but 
he  is  not  the  first  man  she  has  fooled — I  mean  besides 
myself.  I  have  not  pretended  to  be  anything  but 
'  Nix-my-Dolly '  so  long  that  it  will  take  me  about 
as  long  as  it  will  Ross  to  regain  my  equilibrium. 

"  Signal,  I  think  you  have  talked  quite  enough,  and 
I  want  you  to  begin  packing  our  trunks." 

"  Sally,  I  will  help  you  to  get  out  of  my  house,  but 
I  am  not  going  with  you,  as  it  would  look  as  though  I 
was  guilty." 

When  Mrs.  Crimson  and  Mrs.  Scarlet  left,  Mrs.  Red 
sent  a  message  to  Mrs.  Rosepink,  saying  if  she  kept 
very  quiet  she  would  not  expose  her  to  her  husband 
for  the  sake  of  her  daughter.  "But  if  I  remain  here 
I  think  you  will  all  be  glad  to  pay  me  well  for  seal- 
ing my  lips.  I  will  return  when  the  excitement  has 
died  out,  and  Mrs.  Ross  has  gone  with  her  friends. 
They  won't  care  to  have  him  around  after  what  he  has 
done,  or  care  to  have  the  disgrace  of  troubling  me.  I 
have  no  further  use  for  Mr.  Ross." 


Uno  Who.  229 


CHAPTEK  XVI. 

"  When  remorse  is  blended  with  the  fear  of  punishment 
and  arises  to  despair,  it  constitutes  the  supreme  wretched- 
ness of  the  mind." 

OSCEOLA  wrote  at  once  to  Lord  Oughton  the  state 
of  Garita's  affairs,  and  received  news  that  some  mem- 
bers of  the  family  would  come  to  her  at  once. 

Garita  said  she  had  never  been  so  happ}r  in  her  home 
as  while  she  was  waiting  for  their  arrival.  She  said 
the  air  seemed  purified,  and  there  was  no  restraint  upon 
her  actions.  It  was  a  relief  to  know  where  her  husband 
was,  though  a  prisoner  in  her  house.  They  went  out 
and  entertained  a  great  deal. 

Mrs.  Anson  was  delighted  when  she  found  TJno  was 
visiting  Mrs.  Eoss,  and  that  they  had  mutual  friends  in 
England  and  Spain. 

Mr.  Eoss  was  allowed  to  go  to  the  drawing-room,  so 
there  was  no  suspicion  of  what  had  occurred.  When 
he  went  to  his  office,  the  officer  and  Osceola  went  with 
him.  He  was  not  allowed  any  money,  and  was  told 
they  could  do  nothing  for  him  until  some  of  the  family 
arrived  from  England. 

He  asked  Garita  to  let  him  go  to  Boston,  and  he 
would  not  trouble  her  again.  She  told  him  he  had 
taken  his  case  out  of  her  hands  and  she  had  nothing  to 


230  Uno  Who. 

say.  Her  friends  would  not  listen  to  any  suggestion 
from  her  in  regard  to  him.  He  was  now  in  the  hands 
of  the  law,  and  she  was  in  fact  powerless. 

Her  sister,  Flora,  came  accompanied  by  Lord  Phil- 
ippe Oughton.  Uno  and  her  father  told  Lady  Flora 
the  entire  story  that  they  might  act  in  accordance  with 
the  facts.  The  house  was  to  be  sold,  and  Garita  to 
go  to  England.  Her  sister  was  so  incensed  at  his  con- 
duct that  she  wished  Garita  to  leave  him.  Her  reply 
was:  "Thy  vows  are  upon  me,  0  God."  She  said: 
"I  have  lived  through  the  worst,  and  what  would  be- 
come of  him  were  I  to  leave  him  ?  " 

They  took  him  to  England,  also  the  officer,  that  they 
might  decide  what  was  best  to  do.  They  went  to  the 
ancestral  home,  where  he  was  treated  like  one  that  was 
just  recovering  from  brain  trouble,  and  the  officer 
was  allowed  to  return  to  America. 

Uno,  with  her  father  and  sisters,  went  to  Florida. 
After  a  visit  with  their  friends  they  went  to  Cuba. 
Marie,  taking  the  advice  of  the  Mother  Superior,  acted 
as  an  assistant  to  Uno. 

They  now  felt  that  Garita's  troubles  were  over.  Osce- 
ola  was  quiet  upon  the  subject.  Did  he  still  see  danger 
in  her  path?  Uno  said:  "Father,  I  cannot  see  how 
Meno  can  harm  her  with  the  ocean  between  them.  I 
think  she  has  done  enough,  and  the  prophecy  has  been 
fulfilled,"  though  even  as  she  said  it,  there  was  a  feel- 
ing as  of  something  tugging  away  at  her  heartstrings 
warning  her  to  be  watchful  and  beware. 


Uno  Who.  231 

Uno  had  a  year  of  uninterrupted  work  at  the  insti- 
tution, when  she  received  a  letter  from  Dona  asking 
her  to  come  to  England.  She  was  shocked  at  the 
change  in  Mr.  Ross.  He  seemed  like  a  man  that  was 
being  devoured  by  remorse.  The  kindness  shown  him 
only  the  more  made  him  feel  his  unworthiness.  He 
could  not  bear  to  have  Garita  out  of  his  sight.  With 
her  the  arrow  had  gone  deep  into  her  very  soul.  It 
was  the  cold  calm  winter  of  her  existence,  and  she  was 
waiting  for  an  angel  to  sweep  the  drifts  away,  when 
she  was  made  aware  of  Mr.  Ross's  condition.  Con- 
sumption had  claimed  him  for  its  own.  In  the  fall  he 
failed  very  rapidly ;  even  Uno,  who  had  a  heart  of  stone 
towards  him,  softened  when  she  saw  him  watch  every 
move  Garita  made.  If  she  was  out  of  his  sight,  he 
would  ask  for  her. 

They  had  been  in  England  two  years,  and  he  was  now 
about  to  take  the  journey  that  has  no  companionship. 
He  implored  his  wife's  forgiveness,  asking  her  to  call 
him  darling  as  of  old. 

"  Is  it  too  much  to  ask  that  you  will  sometimes  think 
kindly  of  me  ?  Oh,  wretch  that  I  have  been,  that  I  did 
not  listen  to  your  pleadings.  The  unhappy  hours  I 
have  caused  you  have  eaten  into  my  very  soul." 

As  Garita  kneeled  by  his  bedside,  holding  his  hand, 
Uno  stood  not  far  off.  Her  thoughts  were  that  it  was 
fine  talk,  but  she  was  not  a  believer  in  deathbed  re- 
pentances; that  if  he  were  well  and  had  money,  know- 
ing what  he  did  now,  he  would  do  it  all  again,  for  he 


232  Uno  Who. 

was  of  such  a  weak  character.  He  worried  her  life 
out  with  his  cruel  treatment,  and  now  he  was  worry< 
ing  her  sick  with  his  pleadings  for  forgiveness.  Oh, 
consistency,  thou  art  a  virtue. 

It  was  an  affecting  scene,  and  Uno  was  glad  when 
it  was  over.  Garita  had  heen  true  to  her  marriage 
vows  "  until  death  us  do  part." 

Uno  and  Garita  spent  the  following  winter  in  Rome 
with  Isla  Manrique,  where  she  attracted  a  great  deal  of 
attention  as  a  young  and  beautiful  widow.  Her  sor- 
rows had  given  a  new  charm  to  her  face  and  manner. 
She  said  she  was  tired  of  thinking  and  wished  to 
travel.  "  Oh,  help  me  to  forget  my  strange,  sad  life. 
Uno,  take  me  with  you  and  give  me  work.  When  I 
am  with  my  family  I  make  them  unhappy  by  my  in- 
difference, but  I  cannot  enter  into  the  gay  life  they 
live.  Those  memories !  Oh,  help  me  to  fold  them  up, 
and  lay  them  sacredly  by.  What  avail  is  it  to  dream 
of  the  bitter  past  that  now  lies  scattered  around  a  bier, 
when,  perhaps,  there  is  a  bright  and  happy  future  in 
reserve  for  me  ?  Uno,  pale-face  has  taken  of  the  bitter 
dregs  mixed  in  the  cup  she  could  not  see,  thus  fulfilling 
the  prophecy  in  regard  to  you  and  me." 

<l  Garita,  you  say  give  me  work.  My  sweeter  self, 
you  know  not  what  you  ask.  My  work  will  cover  a 
broad  field.  When  I  leave  you,  it  will  be  a  scene  of 
solitude,  a  wilderness  of  care,  as  I  walk  with  the  motley 
throng  in  which  my  work  is  never  done.  I  have  crossed 


Uno  Who.  233 

the  river's  broad  expanse  and  come  to  thee.  I  will  not 
leave  you  until  the  prophecy  has  been  fulfilled." 

"  Uno,  you  helped  me  out  of  the  quicksands  where 
I  was  in  danger  of  a  living  death,  proving  true  your 
own  prophetic  words.  Yes,  I  followed  the  gliding 
stream  in  all  its  devious  ways  into  a  wilderness  of  doubt 
and  shifting  sands." 

In  the  spring  Isla  Manrique  received  news  of  her 
aunt's  serious  illness,  and  wishing  her  to  come  to  Ma- 
drid. Uno  and  Garita  went  with  her,  and  remained 
at  the  house  until  her  aunt  died.  She  lived  long 
enough  to  tell  of  the  wrong  and  injustice  she  had  done 
her  only  brother's  only  child,  and  wished  to  make 
what  reparation  she  was  able  by  leaving  her  estate 
to  Isla. 

At  the  time  her  brother  and  wife  were  drowned,  it 
was  supposed  the  child  was  also  drowned.  Her  mother 
was  somewhat  an  invalid  and  lived  with  her.  She  never 
recovered  from  the  shock  of  her  son's  death,  and  the* 
aunt  of  Isla,  hearing  from  Col.  Sebastian  that  he  had 
the  child,  did  not  reply  to  his  numerous  letters,  know- 
ing the  child  was  well  provided  for  by  her  rich  grand- 
father, and  she  did  not  let  her  mother  know  that  the 
child,  of  whom  she  was  very  fond,  was  saved.  All  who 
inquired  for  her  mother,  wishing  to  see  her  in  regard 
to  her  affairs,  were  directed  to  her  lawyer,  who  had  his 
instructions,  and  Col.  Sebastian  was  unable  to  leam 
anything  about  the  estate  of  his  son-in-law. 

The  mother  died,  leaving  everything  to  her  only  child. 


234  Uno  Who. 

Isla  Manrique  was  now  a  fine-looking,  self-possessed 
young  woman.  Her  first  thought  was  that  she  could 
provided  a  home  for  her  Aunt  Isla  and  her  son  who  were 
in  Cuba  at  the  TJno  home,  her  husband  having  died 
from  the  effects  of  his  dissipated  life. 

TJno  and  Garita  were  warmly  welcomed  by  the  young 
Marquis  of  Floraine  and  his  beautiful  and  happy  wife. 
They  were  disappointed  when  they  learned  that  Col. 
Who  had  gone,  they  hardly  knew  where,  but  he  was 
traveling  with  his  sister  Florita's  son,  who  was  living 
at  the  palace  with  him,  where  TJno  and  Garita  went. 

A  young  and  attractive  widow  finds  many  admirers, 
and  Garita  wished  the  convent  was  her  dwelling-place, 
but  TJno  said  that  would  not  do,  for  she  would  turn  the 
heads  of  the  priests.  "  Then  we  will  go  home  to 
Florida.  I  want  to  see  my  old  home  and  friends  once 
more." 

This  was  the  first  time  she  expressed  a  wish  for  or 
about  anything,  and  TJno's  heart  was  glad. 

After  seeing  Senora  de  Vega  in  her  happy  home, 
which  was  a  center  for  the  literary  lights  of  that  city, 
and  seeing  Isla  with  her  aunt  in  their  beautiful  home, 
the  son  giving  promise  of  a  bright  future,  they  sailed 
for  Cuba,  and  the  plantation — the  dearest  spot  on  earth 
to  TJno  and  her  devoted  father. 

They  went  to  the  convent  taking  with  them  Marie, 
to  whom  Garita  was  devotedly  attached.  She  wished 
to  see  the  Mother  Superior  who  had  done  so  much  to 
save  her  from  destruction. 


Uno  Who.  235 

While  there  she  asked  Uno  to  tell  her  from  beginning 
to  end  how  she  managed  to  be  at  her  house  the  night 
she  and  her  father  rescued  her  from  the  hands  of  her 
husband  and  doctor.  She  wished  to  know  how  she  had 
used  her  cultivated  eye  and  ear.  She  was  now  able  to 
hear  the  whole  truth,  and  there  was  no  better  place  or 
time.  She  was  perfectly  calm.  The  fountain  of  her 
tears  seemed  dry.  No  words  escaped  her.  It  was  the 
peace  of  a  heart  whose  conflicts  are  over  and  whose 
sorrows  are  buried. 


236  Uno  Who. 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

"  It  came  o'er  their  ears  like  the  sweet  South, 
That  breathes  upon  a  bank  of  violets." 

<e  OH  Uno,  this  is  the  shrine  where  my  heart  can 
find  its  needed  treasure,"  exclaimed  Garita  as  she  stood 
on  the  piazza  at  "  Sunny  side,"  enjoying  the  low:  lone 
song  of  the  waves  as  they  came  dashing  upon  the  distant 
shore.  "  This  soothes  my  soul,  and  here  will  I  find  the 
blessed  balm  of  healing.  It  is  the  dearest  spot  on  earth 
to  me,  and  I  feel  like  taking  life's  lease  anew." 

"  Come,  Meno,  here  are  the  children  that  shot  many 
a  dart  from  mischievous  eyes  which  you  warded  off 
with  your  good  government." 

"And  you  have  let  your  light  so  shine  before  men 
that  they  have  seen  my  good  work,"  said  Meno. 

"  One  of  you  is  happy  in  reply  and  the  other  excels 
in  rejoinder,"  said  Uno,  "but,  Meno,  the  reason  your 
good  work  has  not  been  seen  by  women  is  that  jealousy 
has  obscured  the  light.  In  order  to  prove  her  beauty 
and  lovely  character  to  some  people  would  be  like  hav- 
ing to  light  a  candle  to  see  the  sun." 

When  Meno  retired,  Garita  said :  "  The  injured  for- 
gives the  wrong  that  is  past,  but  he  who  wrongs  you 
hates  you  to  the  last." 


Uno  Who.  237 

"  Garita,  what  shall  we  do  in  regard  to  Meno  ?  I  fear 
she  will  make  your  home  unhappy  by  being  disagree- 
able, and  I  wish  to  see  you  free  from  annoyance." 

"Uno,  I  have  already  thought  of  the  subject,  but 
where  can  she  go  or  what  can  she  do?  W<e  really  have 
no  excuse  for  sending  her  away  from  the  house.  Should 
I  pension  her?  I  have  come  to  the  conclusion  that  I 
am  or  ought  to  be  capable  of  ignoring  anything  dis- 
agreeable she  says  or  does." 

Garita's  friends  were  delighted  when  they  heard  she 
was  going  to  spend  the  winter  at  "  Sunnyside."  She 
now  felt  that  Heaven  was  showering  its  richest  blessings 
upon  her.  There  was  nothing  she  asked  for  she  did  not 
have.  Loving  friends  anticipated  her  every  wish,  and 
she  felt  that  she  could  afford  to  be  generous  in  over- 
looking Meno's  faults — she  who  had  so  little  and  loved 
so  much. 

She  set  about  wiping  from  the  table  of  memory  all 
that  was  gone  by  preparing  for  a  Christmas  of  the 
olden  time. 

Osceola  had  Marie  accept  her  invitation  to  be  one  of 
her  guests  at  "  Sunnyside."  He  would  spend  the  winter 
at  "The  Shadows"  being  cautiously  observant  of  all 
things,  for  the  unexpected  had  come.  If  Meno  was 
jealous  of  a  married  woman's  beauty,  what  must  now 
be  her  feelings  toward  the  beautiful  and  fascinating 
widow  ?  The  still  evening  and  twilight  gray  had  in  her 
sober  liven7  all  things  clad,  when  Garita  asked  Meno 
to  join  her  in  the  library,  where  she  with  Uno  and  Marie 


238  Uno  Who. 

were  talking  over  the  finishing  up  of  their  arrangements 
for  Christmas. 

The  shadows  had  deepened.  The  pine  knot  looking 
as  if  it  might  be  a  near  relative  of  the  one  of  long  ago, 
was  snapping  and  crackling  in  the  open  fireplace  in  true 
Southern  style. 

Garita  went  to  the  piano  during  a  lull  in  the  conversa- 
tion, and  played  soft,  sweet  airs,  until  a  spirit  of  in- 
spiration took  possession  of  them,  and  all  joined  her 
in  singing.  Then  one  after  another  (wishing  to  hear 
the  melodious  murmurs,  the  soul  of  melody,  she  poured 
into  their  listening  ears)  stopped.  They  were  so  ab- 
sorbed that  they  did  not  hear  the  footsteps  in  the  dimly 
lighted  hall — the  only  light  in  the  room  came  from  the 
pine  knot  that  seemed  to  be  enjoying  the  honor  of  be- 
ing the  favorite  light  of  the  songstress. 

Osceola  came  to  the  door.  He  put  up  his  finger  that 
they  might  wait  until  Garita  had  finished,  and  the  li- 
brary was  lighted,  then  he  and  Paulo  entered  the  room. 
Paulo  embraced  his  astonished  sisters,  kissing  Garita 
as  he  did  them,  and  turning  to  Meno  he  took  her  hand 
while  with  the  other  he  patted  her  shoulder,  saying: 
"  And  here  is  Meno  still  making  home  pleasant  for  the 
wanderers.  I  am  glad  you  have  not  outgrown  your 
usefulness/' 

There  was  now  no  lack  of  good  cheer  at  either  of 
the  mansions.  Upon  both  plantations  rolled  one  un- 
ebbing  tide  of  overflowing  admiration  for  Paulo  and 
Garita.  Bonfires  and  music  were  kept  up  evening  after 


Uno  Who.  239 

evening.  The  melodious  voices  of  the  negroes,  as  they 
joined  the  band  in  a  refrain  of  "  There  is  none  so  rich  in 
birth  and  beauty  as  Paulo  and  Garita,"  was  heard  for 
a  long  distance  as  it  was  played  and  sung  in  the  different 
negro  quarters. 

When  Garita  heard  her  name  so  suddenly  associated 
with  Paulo's  she  did  not  know  what  to  think,  much  less 
to  say,  and  when  Paulo  told  her  it  was  just  as  it  should 
be — that  his  wish  had  been  anticipated,  and  that  he 
desired  to  include  the  heart  which  had  been  hers  for 
years,  she  was  silent. 

Who  does  not  know  the  magic  of  a  brief  pause?  A 
calm  of  five  minutes  will  invite  back  our  vagrant  powers. 
As  she  put  her  hand  in  his  she  said :  "  Paulo,  tell  me, 
this  is  not  all  a  dream?" 

They  were  on  the  piazza,  where  they  were  soon  joined 
by  Uno,  who  for  an  instant  gazed  at  Garita's  flushed 
cheek,  when  Paulo  taking  Garita's  hand  placed  it  in 
Uno's,  saying  :  "  It  is  now  mine." 

"Oh,  Paulo,  she  is  now  doubly  mine,"  said  Uno  as 
she  embraced  her. 

At  a  dinner  given  by  Osceola  to  the  members  of  the 
two  families  who  had  come  to  be  present  at  the  Christ- 
mas eve  festival  he  said :  "  Come,  health  and  love  to  all, 
but  I  drink  to  the  general  joy  of  the  whole  table  over 
this  engagement." 

Pamphilo  said :  "  In  Heaven  this  day  there  is  rejoic- 
ing with  your  names." 
""Sunnyside"  and  "The  Shadows"  were  connected 


240  Uno  Who. 

by  a  canopied  walk.  In  the  former  the  guests  were  re- 
ceived by  Garita  and  Uno.  The  dancing  was  in  the 
ball-room  at  "  The  Shadows."  No  cloud  obscured  the 
vision  of  Garita  as  through  the  mazy  dance  she  was  led 
by  Paulo  until  she  saw  Meno.  Then  with  beating  heart 
she  thought :  "  Your  eyes  do  menace  me.  Why  do  you 
look  pale  ?  " 

That  night  she  told  Uno  how  the  strange,  weird  look 
of  Meno  made  her  shudder. 

Congratulations  came  from  all  their  relatives  and 
friends.  They  spent  the  winter  in  making  happy  by 
their  presence  those  they  had  known  in  their  child- 
hood days. 

The  families  abroad  were  well  represented,  and  costly 
bridal  gifts  came  from  all  their  friends.  One  of  great 
value  was  from  Mrs.  Estaugh.  She  had  seen  the 
notice  of  Garita's  approaching  marriage  to  Col.  Who, 
of  his  being  heir  to  the  title  and  estates  of  the  Esta- 
banez  family,  and  she  did  not  fail  to  do  the  proper 
thing. 

Garita  asked  Uno  to  reply  to  her  letter  of  congratula- 
tion, as  she  did  not  wish  to  revive  old  libels  that  were 
born  to  die.  They  were  of  death's  old  life,  which  she 
would  soon  cast  off,  even  in  name,  and  she  would  keep 
the  past  out  of  her  happy  future. 

The  bloom  of  favor  was  gone.  The  old  wound  closed, 
but  the  highest  skill  in  spiritual  surgery  could  not  make 
it  heal. 

The  family  made  a  pilgrimage  to  the  convent,  Garita 


Uno  Who.  241 

making  an  offering  to  the  sacred  wit  of  the  Mother 
Superior. 

They  went  to  the  plantation  where  Paulo  found  his 
Aunt  Thetis  a  willing  captive.  She  had  her  household 
affairs  settled  and  in  a  prosperous  way  that  she  might 
attend  his  wedding.  She  was  glad  Garita  had  shown 
so  much  good  sense  in  being  married  at  home  where  the 
old  folks  could  be  present. 

"Paulo,,  your  Aunt  Wauka  and  I  are  going  to  be 
a  credit  to  the  family.  It  needs  gray  hairs  and  black 
satin  to  give  tone  and  character  to  such  an  occasion." 

Everything  was  now  ready.  The  beautiful  wedding- 
dress  Garita's  mother  had  ordered  had  arrived  from 
Paris.  Osceola  and  his  daughters  had  doubled  the  con- 
stant vigilance  they  had  kept  over  the  wan  specter. 
Garita  and  Uno  occupied  the  rooms  of  their  childhood 
days.  Osceola  had  set  a  watch  upon  the  valuables  that 
had  been  placed  in  these  rooms.  He  managed  to  be 
the  companion  of  Meno,  advising  with  her  in  every  pos- 
sible way,  his  wonderful  presence  of  mind  serving  him 
well  in  this  emergency.  He  wished  to  keep  Paulo  and 
Garita  in  ignorance  of  what  was  going  on,  and  he  could 
not  rely  in  this  hour  of  need  on  broken  reeds  that  might 
pierce  the  hand  that  trusted  them,  so  he  depended 
upon  his  ready  wit  which  was  better  than  a  coat  of  mail 
to  those  about  him,  the  valuable  gifts  often  being  a 
source  of  excuse  for  his  presence. 

The  evening  before  the  wedding,  which  was  to  take 
place  at  noon,  Meno  was  seen  to  watch  Paulo  as  he  left 
16 


242  Uno  Who. 

the  house.  The  Indian  could  not  shelter  passion  under 
friendship's  name,  as  she  stole  from  the  dark  like  a  guilty 
thing  longing  to  catch  a  glimpse,  not  a  meeting,  only  a 
crumb  of  comfort  for  her  heart  to  feed  upon  in  that  last 
hour  when  she  would  sink  to  rise  no  more. 

After  Garita  had  retired,  Uno  went  to  her  room  say- 
ing as  she  did  so :  "  There  are  so  many  valuables  in  our 
boudoir  that  I  am  taking  extra  precautions  by  seeing 
that  every  entrance  to  our  rooms  is  locked." 

She  left  the  key  in  the  doors  as  Meno  had  skeleton 
keys  to  all  the  rooms  of  the  mansion.  Osceola  spent 
the  night  in  their  boudoir,  Uno  taking  a  room  opposite 
Garita's.  The  door  opened  in  a  curve  of  the  hall.  They 
were  both  corner  rooms  of  the  halls  that  crossed  each 
other,  and  at  the  crossing  was  a  light  suspended  from 
the  ceiling.  Uno  could  see  Garita's  door  from  the  key- 
hole of  hers,  also  when  the  door  was  slightly  opened. 

It  was  two  o'clock,  the  house  was  still  as  death. 
Through  the  keyhole  Uno  saw  the  light  suddenly  turn 
down,  not  out.  At  that  instant  the  well  oiled  locks  of 
two  doors  were  turned.  Uno  saw  Meno  take  from  her 
right  hand  a  steel  that  glittered  in  the  dim  light.  Then 
holding  it  in  her  left  hand  while  with  the  right  she  used 
the  skeleton  key.  It  did  not  work,  and  she  saw  her  drop 
it  in  her  pocket,  taking  another  which  Uno  knew  would 
turn  the  key.  At  that  instant  she  glided  from  her  room 
and  stepping  behind  Meno  laid  her  right  hand  on 
Meno's  left  that  held  the  dagger,  saying  as  she  did  so : 
"  My  poor  Meno,  come  with  me." 

At  the  sound  of  Uno's  voice  she  gasped  as  if  suffocat- 


Uno  Who.  243 

ing;  Uno,  holding  the  hand  which  held  the  dagger  firmly 
clasped  in  hers,  led  her  to  the  room  she  had  just  left. 
As  the  door  closed  Osceola  put  his  hand  on  the  knob. 
Uno,  looking  Meno  in  the  eyes  that  glittered  like  the 
steel  she  still  firmly  held,  said :  "  You  thought  to  find 
me  there,"  avoiding  speaking  Garita's  name.  "  You 
did  not  know  there  were  officers  in  there  guarding  the 
treasures." 

In  her  excitement  at  the  mention  of  the  presents  she 
loosened  her  hold  on  the  dagger,  and  Uno  took  posses- 
sion of  it.  Then  with  her  eyes  still  on  Meno,  she  said : 
"  I  thought  I  heard  some  one  at  this  door."  She 
backed  up  to  the  door,  and  through  the  opening  slipped 
the  dagger  in  her  father's  hand,  then  putting  her  arm 
around  Meno  she  said: 

"  I  feel  like  going  to  early  mass.  What  say  you  ?  " 
Then  looking  at  her  watch  she  said :  "  It  is  now  three 
o'clock.  We  have  only  an  hour  to  wait." 

She  did  not  appear  to  notice  what  Uno  said,  but 
dropped  on  her  knees  before  her,  and  putting  up  her 
hand  said :  "  Fate  sets  apart  one  common  doom  for  all 
who  love  too  well.  I  have  loved  and  that  love  has  been 
my  curse.  I  shall  know  no  better  life.  I  can  know 
no  worse.  The  washing  waves  of  this  wretched  life  is 
all  that  is  left  for  me.  You  have  been  my  friend, 
knowing  the  intensity  of  an  Indian's  nature,  and  to- 
night you  have  saved  me  from  a  terrible  deed,  for  God 
only  knows  how  I  hate  her.  When  he  left  you  as  chil- 
dren he  said:  'Meno,  take  good  care  of  her  for  my 
sake/" 


244  Uno  Who. 

"  Come,  Meno,  I  will  go  to  your  room  with  you  and 
we  will  get  ready  for  mass." 

"I  will  go,  and  when  I  am  ready,  I  will  return  to 
you,"  said  Meno. 

She  did  not  go  to  her  room,  but  went  to  the  porter's 
lodge,  saying  she  wished  the  gate  opened,  as  she  was 
going  to  mass.  He  was  but  half  awake  and  said :  "  This 
is  an  early  hour  to  get  a  man  out  for  that  sort  of  busi- 
ness. I  thought  it  was  for  the  wedding,  or  I  would  not 
have  budged  an  inch." 

"  I  see  you  are  all  willing  to  work  for  the  wedding," 
was  her  reply. 

"Yes,  but  we  are  all  don'  gon'  ela'r  of  getting  a 
chance  to  work  for  yours,"  was  his  angry  reply. 

When  she  left  the  lodge  she  went  some  distance  to 
a  boat-house  where  were  anchored  several  boats  of  dif- 
ferent kinds,  among  them  a  small  yacht.  The  men  in 
charge  were  still  sleeping  and  she  walked  to  the  end 
of  the  pier  and  threw  herself  into  the  sea.  There  was 
a  high  wind  which  had  prevailed  during  the  night, 
and  she  was  washed  upon  the  beach. 

In  the  morning  the  sailors  discovered  her  and  in- 
formed Osceola,  who  had  everything  hushed  up  until 
after  the  wedding.  He  assisted  the  sailors  who  took 
her  lifeless  form  into  the  boat-house,  and  he  smoothed 
her  dark  hair  down,  the  long,  tangled  hair,  all  dripping 
from  the  sea. 

In  the  excitement  for  the  preparations  of  the  wed- 
ding, the  incidents  of  the  night  and  early  morning 
were  for  a  time  forgotten.  In  order  that  Uno's  mind 


Uno  Who.  245 

might  be  free  from  anxiety,  Osceola  told  her  what  had 
happened. 

She  said:  "Thank  God  that  danger  is  over." 

Garita  walked  alone  to  the  altar  where  she  met  hei 
brother,  Pamphilo,  who  gave  her  away.  Her  path  was 
strewn  with  flowers  by  her  two  little  nieces,  as  they 
walked  in  advance  of  her. 

The  sun  never  shone  upon  a  happier  or  a  more  beau- 
tiful bride.  They  spent  their  honeymoon  at  the 
beautiful  plantation  home  of  Alberto  in  Alabama,  then 
joined  their  friends  in  Saratoga,  later  going  to  Eng- 
land, making  happy  the  heart  of  Lady  Margaret,  who 
said  that  everything  was  just  as  it  should  have  been 
long  ago. 

Garita  and  Paulo  were  made  happy  by  her  mother, 
whose  mind  was  already  made  up  to  spend  her  declin- 
ing years  with  them.  There  was  no  lack  of  good  cheer 
at  their  beautiful  home  in  Spain,  where  in  sweet,  con- 
fiding trust  Garita  found  the  peace  she  so  longed  for, 
not  the  peace  which  brooded  over  Eden,  but  the  peace 
which  crowned  Gethsemane. 

Thus  the  prophecy  has  been  fulfilled.  Garita  has  had 
her  sad  life  with  pale-face  man.  She  has  been  in 
great  danger  from  a  woman  of  the  tribe,  and  the  pride 
of  the  de  Gomoras  has  been  saved;  all  by  a  seventh 
daughter  of  the  tribe  of  You-Know-Who. 

THE  END. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


UG  2 


Ql 


OCT  0  1 


990 


m  L9 — 15m-10,'48  (B1039  )  444 


UNIVERSITY  ot  CALIFORNIA 

AT 


17k       Uno  Who, 


IG2 


PS 
317U 


II 1 1 II  mi  mill  I 

006  023  607  2 


( 


